Manual Radio SDH

User Manual
SRT 1F
Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications
UMN
911-362/02C0000
Issue 5, September 2007

UMN SRT 1F
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the introduction
of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes
of the agreement under which the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted in
any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The documentation has been prepared to
be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia
Siemens Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the
documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity, or performance of the mentioned
hardware or software products are given “as is” and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or software products
shall be defined conclusively and finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer.
However, Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions contained in the document
are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens
Networks, explain issues which may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO EVENT WILL NOKIA SIEMENS
NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES,SUCH AS BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR DATA,THAT MAY
ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights
according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is
a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners, and they are mentioned for
identification purposes only.
Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2007. All rights reserved.
SRT 1F
ii 911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007
UMN Status of Manual
STATUS OF MANUAL
- Current Issue 5, September 2007
- Previous Issue 5, August 2007
In Issue 5, September 2007, as to the previous issue:

- the SV SNMP/IP unit has been added;
- the 2x(3+1) DT configuration with K-shelf has been added;
- the Tx SD branching configuration has been added.
- the Annexes “Unit part numbers” and “Installation material part
numbers” have been added.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007 i
Status of Manual UMN
This page intentionally left blank
SRT 1F
UMN Table of Contents
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment .......................................... 1-1
1.2 Equipment Features................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Equipment Details .................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.1 Ordering Guide......................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 BRU (Branching Network Unit) .............................................................. 1-16
1.3.3 MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) ................................................. 1-16
1.3.4 SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit) .................................. 1-16
1.3.5 Optional BBIU (BaseBand Interface Unit for OPT MSP)........................ 1-17
1.4 General Specifications ........................................................................... 1-18
1.4.1 General Information ............................................................................... 1-18
1.4.2 Transmitter (TX) ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.4.3 Receiver (RX)......................................................................................... 1-24
1.4.4 Modulator (MOD) ................................................................................... 1-25
1.4.5 Demodulator (DEM) ............................................................................... 1-25
1.4.6 Digital Processing .................................................................................. 1-26
1.4.7 System Performances............................................................................ 1-28
1.4.8 RF Interference ...................................................................................... 1-33
1.4.9 RF Interface ........................................................................................... 1-34
1.4.10 Countermeasures to Fading................................................................... 1-35
1.4.11 Base Band Signal Interface for STM-1 System...................................... 1-36
1.4.11.1 Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface ................................................. 1-36
1.4.11.2 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface .............................................. 1-37
1.4.11.3 Jitter ....................................................................................................... 1-38
1.4.11.4 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) ................................................................. 1-38
1.4.12 Auxiliary Signal Interface........................................................................ 1-39
1.4.12.1 Way Side (WS)....................................................................................... 1-39
1.4.12.2 Engineering Order Wire (EOW) ............................................................. 1-39
1.4.12.3 User Channel (UC)................................................................................. 1-40
1.4.12.4 Radio User Channel (RUC).................................................................... 1-40
1.4.12.5 External Station Alarms / Housekeeping................................................ 1-41
1.5 Mechanical Specification........................................................................ 1-42
1.5.1 SRT 1F K-shelf....................................................................................... 1-42
1.5.1.1 General .................................................................................................. 1-42
1.5.1.2 K-shelf Rack Construction...................................................................... 1-49
1.5.2 SRT 1F Multi-shelf ................................................................................. 1-50
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007 i
Table of Contents UMN
1.5.2.1 General .................................................................................................. 1-50

1.5.2.2 Multi-shelf Rack Construction ................................................................ 1-55
1.5.3 Mixed application with SRT 1F K-shelf and Multi-shelf .......................... 1-56
1.5.4 SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. system ....................................................................... 1-58
1.5.4.1 General .................................................................................................. 1-58
1.5.4.2 1+1 N.E. Rack Construction................................................................... 1-63
1.5.5 Shelf Layout ........................................................................................... 1-64
1.5.5.1 K-shelf .................................................................................................... 1-64
1.5.5.2 BRU shelf ............................................................................................... 1-69
1.5.5.3 MSTU shelf ............................................................................................ 1-70
1.5.5.4 SCSU shelf............................................................................................. 1-71
1.5.5.5 1+1 N.E. shelf ........................................................................................ 1-74
1.5.5.6 BBIU shelf .............................................................................................. 1-75
1.5.6 Unit Construction.................................................................................... 1-76
1.5.7 Weight .................................................................................................... 1-77
1.6 Environmental and EMC Specification................................................... 1-78
1.6.1 Environmental Conditions ...................................................................... 1-78
1.6.1.1 Operating Conditions ............................................................................. 1-78
1.6.1.2 Transport and Storage ........................................................................... 1-79
1.6.1.3 Corrosion and External Agents .............................................................. 1-79
1.6.1.4 Waste ..................................................................................................... 1-79
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Conditions.............................................. 1-80
1.6.2.1 Emission................................................................................................. 1-80
1.6.2.2 Immunity................................................................................................. 1-81
1.6.2.3 Safety ..................................................................................................... 1-82
1.7 Power Supply ......................................................................................... 1-83
1.7.1 General .................................................................................................. 1-83
1.7.2 Power Supply Distribution ...................................................................... 1-83
1.7.3 Secondary Voltages ............................................................................... 1-84
1.7.4 Power Supply Efficiency......................................................................... 1-84
1.8 POWER CONSUMPTION...................................................................... 1-87
1.8.1 Transceiver Unit ..................................................................................... 1-87
1.8.2 Base Band Units .................................................................................... 1-88
1.9 Frequency Plan ...................................................................................... 1-89
1.9.1 General Information ............................................................................... 1-89
1.9.2 Frequency Plan ...................................................................................... 1-89
1.9.2.1 Upper 4 GHz band ................................................................................. 1-89
SRT 1F
1.10 Antenna System................................................................................... 1-108

1.11 RF Branching Network ......................................................................... 1-109
1.11.1 Loss Equalized RF Branching Network................................................ 1-124
1.11.2 Channel Filter Insertion loss................................................................. 1-126
1.11.3 Branching losses.................................................................................. 1-127
1.11.3.1 Branching losses in K-shelf configuration ............................................ 1-128
1.11.3.2 Branching losses in Multi-shelf configuration ....................................... 1-128
1.11.3.3 Branching losses in 1+1 Not Expansible.............................................. 1-129
2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Equipment Configurations and Features.................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 System ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Alternated and Co-channel Operation...................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Baseband Interface .................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.3.1 K-shelf and Multi-shelf.............................................................................. 2-3
2.1.3.2 1+1 N.E. model ........................................................................................ 2-7
2.1.4 STM-1 Signal Transmission ................................................................... 2-10
2.1.4.1 STM-1 Signal Interface .......................................................................... 2-10
2.1.4.2 Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function) ....................................................... 2-10
2.1.4.3 RX Space Diversity ................................................................................ 2-13
2.1.4.4 TX+RX Space Diversity.......................................................................... 2-15
2.1.4.5 MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................. 2-16
2.1.4.6 Co-Channel Operation ........................................................................... 2-19
2.1.5 Auxiliary Service Channels .................................................................... 2-21
2.1.5.1 Engineering Orderwire (EOW) ............................................................... 2-21
2.1.5.2 Wayside Traffic (WS) ............................................................................. 2-25
2.1.5.3 User Channel (UC)................................................................................. 2-26
2.1.5.4 Radio User Channel (RUC).................................................................... 2-26
2.1.5.5 Housekeeping ........................................................................................ 2-27
2.1.5.6 Digital Communication Channel (DCC).................................................. 2-27
2.1.6 OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System ............................................. 2-28
2.1.6.1 MSOH and RSOH .................................................................................. 2-30
2.1.6.2 RFCOH .................................................................................................. 2-32
2.1.6.3 Radio Frame Structure........................................................................... 2-33
2.1.7 Radio Protection Switch System ............................................................ 2-38
2.1.7.1 Outline of Radio Protection Switching.................................................... 2-38
2.1.7.2 USW and BSW....................................................................................... 2-40
2.1.7.3 Switching Priority.................................................................................... 2-42
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007 iii
2.1.7.4 Switching Initiator and Operation Time .................................................. 2-43

2.1.7.5 Occasional Traffic (option) ..................................................................... 2-44
2.1.8 Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) ...................................... 2-45
2.1.8.1 Signal Interface ...................................................................................... 2-47
2.1.8.2 Bipolar Switch for Electrical Interface (BSW Electrical) unit................... 2-47
2.1.8.3 Bipolar Switch for Optical Interface (BSW Optical) unit ......................... 2-47
2.1.8.4 Supervisory (SV) unit ............................................................................. 2-52
2.1.8.5 Timing Control Unit (TCU) for MST mode (optional card) ...................... 2-58
2.1.8.6 Housekeeping (HK) unit (optional card) ................................................. 2-62
2.1.8.7 Embedded Communication Unit (ECU) (optional card, TL1/OSI only)... 2-63
2.1.8.8 Occasional Interface Electrical (OCC E) unit (optional card) ................. 2-64
2.1.8.9 Occasional Interface Optical (OCC O) unit (optional card) .................... 2-64
2.1.8.10 Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit ......................................... 2-64
2.1.9 Baseband Interface Unit (BBIU) (optional for OPT MSP) ...................... 2-65
2.1.9.1 Optical Interface (OPT INTF) unit for BBIU shelf ................................... 2-65
2.1.9.2 MSP SW and BBC for BBIU shelf .......................................................... 2-68
3 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Preparations for Installation ..................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.1 Storage, Unpacking and Inspection ......................................................... 3-2
3.1.1.2 Storage..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1.3 Preparation............................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1.4 Unpacking and Inspection........................................................................ 3-3
3.1.1.5 General Unpacking Method ..................................................................... 3-3
3.1.2 Storage of Spare Units............................................................................. 3-4
3.1.3 Accessories.............................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers........................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Warning and General Handling................................................................ 3-5
3.2.1.1 Tools Required......................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1.2 Warning Messages .................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.1.3 Storage..................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.1.4 Handling ................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.2 Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables .................................... 3-8
3.2.2.1 Tools Required......................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.2.2 Preparation............................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.2.3 Connection Procedure ............................................................................. 3-8
3.2.2.4 Disconnection Procedure ......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors ............................................ 3-8
SRT 1F
iv 911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007
3.2.3.1 Tools Required......................................................................................... 3-8

3.2.3.2 Procedure................................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors ........................................ 3-10
3.2.4.1 Connector End-face Definitions ............................................................. 3-10
3.2.4.2 End-face Zone Definitions...................................................................... 3-10
3.2.4.3 Defect Definitions ................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.4.4 Scratch and Pit Defects.......................................................................... 3-11
3.2.4.5 Chip Defects........................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.4.6 Crack Defects......................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.4.7 Tools Required....................................................................................... 3-13
3.2.4.8 Procedure............................................................................................... 3-13
3.3 Rack Installation..................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.1 Precautions ............................................................................................ 3-14
3.3.1.1 Suitable Places for Equipment Installation............................................. 3-14
3.3.2 Safety Measures for Equipment Handling.............................................. 3-14
3.3.3 Tools Required....................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.4 Preparation............................................................................................. 3-15
3.3.4.1 Rack Mounting ....................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.4.2 Rack Securing........................................................................................ 3-15
3.3.5 Rack Configuration................................................................................. 3-18
3.4 SRT 1F Multi-shelf installation ............................................................... 3-19
3.4.1 N+1 Terminal equipment layout ............................................................. 3-19
3.4.2 2x(N+1) E/W Double Terminal single-rack equipment layout ................ 3-20
3.4.3 SRT 1F Multi-shelf equipment installation.............................................. 3-21
3.4.3.1 Shelves layout........................................................................................ 3-21
3.4.3.2 How to Install Shelves & Units ............................................................... 3-23
3.4.3.3 Shelf Connections .................................................................................. 3-31
3.4.3.4 Connector and Connector Pin Assignment ............................................ 3-66
3.5 SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) installation ...................................... 3-93
3.5.1 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) rack layout ................................................... 3-93
3.5.2 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) equipment installation.................................. 3-94
3.5.2.1 RF Port Arrangement ............................................................................. 3-94
3.5.2.2 Shelf Dimensions ................................................................................... 3-95
3.5.2.3 Antenna Port Position ............................................................................ 3-96
3.5.2.4 Rack Mount Material .............................................................................. 3-97
3.5.2.5 Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack ...................................... 3-98
3.5.2.6 Connection of Primary Power Lead ..................................................... 3-101
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007 v
3.5.2.7 Baseband Signal Cable Connection .................................................... 3-102

3.5.2.8 Interconnection for Co-Channel operation ........................................... 3-104
3.5.2.9 Connectors and Connector Pin Assignment ........................................ 3-105
3.6 SRT 1F K-shelf Installation .................................................................. 3-111
3.6.1 K-shelf rack layout................................................................................ 3-111
3.6.2 SRT 1F K-shelf equipment installation................................................. 3-112
3.6.2.1 Shelf layout .......................................................................................... 3-112
3.6.2.2 How to Install Shelves & Units ............................................................. 3-113
3.6.2.3 Shelf Connections ................................................................................ 3-150
3.6.3 Connector, Pin Assignment and Cable Connection ............................. 3-176
3.6.3.1 K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC ...................................................................... 3-176
3.6.3.2 Coaxial Cable connection for Optional BBIU ....................................... 3-190
3.6.3.3 K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC...................................................................... 3-192
3.6.3.4 Expansion K-shelf ................................................................................ 3-206
3.7 Wiring and Assembly for Connectors................................................... 3-217
3.7.1 Wiring and Assembly for Multi-pin Connectors .................................... 3-217
3.7.1.1 Assembly for the D-sub Connector (15-pin)......................................... 3-217
3.7.2 Wiring and Assembly for Coaxial Connectors...................................... 3-223
3.7.2.1 Assembly for the 1.0/2.3 type Coaxial Connector ................................ 3-223
3.8 Coaxial Cable Installation for EMC Requirement................................. 3-225
3.8.1 Coaxial Cable Wiring Installation ......................................................... 3-225
3.8.2 EMC-control Measure at the Coaxial Cable Inlet ................................. 3-227
3.8.3 Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables ............................................................ 3-228
3.8.4 Precaution for Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables ..................................... 3-230
3.8.5 Metal Plate Installation for EMC Requirement ..................................... 3-231
4 ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP ................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Acceptance of the SRT 1F Rack.............................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Perform Overall Visual Inspection............................................................ 4-2
4.1.2 Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack...................................... 4-3
4.1.3 Test Equipment Required ........................................................................ 4-3
4.1.3.1 Procedure for shelves using AMP PS connector ..................................... 4-3
4.1.3.2 Procedure for shelves NOT using AMP PS connector............................. 4-4
4.2 Installation of the Slide-in Units................................................................ 4-5
4.2.1 Warning Messages .................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.1.1 Laser Warning.......................................................................................... 4-5
SRT 1F
vi 911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007
4.2.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge Warning .............................................................. 4-6

4.2.2 Slide-In Installation Procedures ............................................................... 4-7
4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units ................................................... 4-7
4.2.3.1 Inserting a Slide-In Unit............................................................................ 4-8
4.2.3.2 Removing a Slide-In Unit ......................................................................... 4-9
4.2.3.3 Removing an Optical Unit ...................................................................... 4-10
4.3 Card Settings ......................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 MSTU Setting......................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1.1 MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................. 4-12
4.3.1.2 DADE Setting for SD.............................................................................. 4-15
4.3.2 Hardware Setting ................................................................................... 4-17
4.3.2.1 SV TL1/OSI unit ..................................................................................... 4-19
4.3.2.2 SV SNMP/IP unit.................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.2.3 TCU Unit ................................................................................................ 4-22
4.3.2.4 BSW Electrical Unit ................................................................................ 4-23
4.3.2.5 OCC INTF Elecrical Unit ........................................................................ 4-24
4.3.2.6 BSW Optical Unit / OCC INTF Optical Unit............................................ 4-25
5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 5-1
5.1 LED Indications ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 LCT for TL1/OSI SV ................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.1 Start-up LCT Operation for SV TL1/OSI ................................................ 5-15
5.2.2 Alarm (Condition) Type and Description ................................................ 5-19
5.2.3 Performance Monitor.............................................................................. 5-27
5.2.4 Analog Monitor ....................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.5 Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI)................................................ 5-31
5.3 Radio Protection Switch for SV TL1/OSI................................................ 5-32
5.3.1 Automatic Switching and Status Indication ............................................ 5-34
5.3.2 Manual Control....................................................................................... 5-34
5.3.3 SW PM Data .......................................................................................... 5-35
5.3.4 Auto Refresh .......................................................................................... 5-35
5.3.5 Notice for RPS Operation....................................................................... 5-36
5.3.5.1 Power off of SCSU ................................................................................. 5-36
5.3.5.2 Lockout................................................................................................... 5-36
5.3.5.3 Power off of MSTU................................................................................. 5-36
5.4 Other Functions of SV TL1/OSI ............................................................. 5-37
5.4.1 Loop Back .............................................................................................. 5-37
5.4.2 Multiplex Section Protection................................................................... 5-38
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007 vii
5.4.3 TCU unit Protection................................................................................ 5-38

5.4.4 Synch Switch.......................................................................................... 5-38
5.4.5 ALS Release .......................................................................................... 5-39
5.5 Web LCT for SNMP/IP SV ..................................................................... 5-40
5.5.1 System ................................................................................................... 5-40
5.6 Radio Protection Switch for SV SNMP/IP .............................................. 5-42
5.6.1 Automatic Switching and Status Indications .......................................... 5-44
5.6.2 Manual Controls ..................................................................................... 5-44
5.6.3 SW PM Data .......................................................................................... 5-45
5.6.4 Notice for RPS Operations..................................................................... 5-45
5.6.4.1 Power off of SCSU ................................................................................. 5-45
5.6.4.2 Lockout................................................................................................... 5-45
5.6.4.3 Power off for MSTU................................................................................ 5-46
5.7 Other Functions of SV SNMP/IP ............................................................ 5-47
5.7.1 Loop Back .............................................................................................. 5-47
5.7.2 TCU unit Protection................................................................................ 5-48
5.7.3 Synch Switch.......................................................................................... 5-48
5.8 Unit Replacement................................................................................... 5-49
5.8.1 Fan Replacement................................................................................... 5-50
5.8.2 MSTU and Other Units........................................................................... 5-52
5.8.3 SV TL1/OSI unit Replacement ............................................................... 5-53
5.8.4 SV SNMP/IP unit Replacement.............................................................. 5-55
5.8.5 Returning Replaced Unit ........................................................................ 5-58
A APPENDIX .................................................................................................................... 1
A.1 Abbreviation of Terms ................................................................................. 1
A.2 Unit part numbers...................................................................................... 12
A.3 Installation material part numbers ............................................................. 16
SRT 1F
viii 911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007
UMN 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment

The SRT 1F series radio equipment is a high capacity (155 Mb/s STM-1)
system designed for trunk line transmission applications.
The SRT 1F series operates in the 4/5/U6/11 GHz radio frequency bands
with 40 MHz frequency spacing, and in the U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz radio
frequency bands with 28.00, 29.00 and 29.65 MHz frequency spacing.
The equipment is fully solid state and is designed to meet ITU-T and ITU-
R Recommendations for long haul and high capacity digital microwave
radio systems. The modulation scheme used is 64/128 QAM Multi-Level
Coded Modulation (MLCM) with forward error correction.
The SRT 1F can be used in various types of SDH networks such as ring,
media diversity or linear configurations, and over various communication
routes, i.e., waterways, mountains, inter or intra-city routes.
The SRT 1F is conceived to work in ACAP (Adjacent Channel Alternate
Pattern), ACCP (Adjacent Channel Co-Polar) and CCDP (Co-Channel
Double Polarization, with XPIC) operational modes.
The system accepts one synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1) signal per RF
frequency for alternated operation, or two synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1)
signals per RF frequency for co-channel operation.
The SRT1F radio equipment is available in 3 versions:
• SRT 1F K-shelf configuration, up to 16 transceiver units can be
housed in one rack
• SRT 1F Multi-shelf configuration, up to 8 transceiver units can be
housed in one rack
• SRT 1F 1+1 N.E., compact solution for max 1+1/2+0 configuration
Multi-shelf configuration is required in the following case:
- when double terminal E/W configuration on one rack is required and
MCF/controller is required to be TL1/OSI type.
1+1 N.E. solution is required in the following case:
- no more than 500 mm rack occupancy and no request of future
expansion to more than 2 TRs per terminal.
In all the other cases, Nokia Siemens Networks recommended solution is
generally based upon K-shelf configuration.
Several auxiliary functions are provided, such as 2 Mb/s wayside traffic
(carried by RFCOH and SOH respectively) and digital service channels
(carried by RFCOH), all protected by the N+1 Radio Protection System
(RPS).
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007 1-1
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION UMN
1.2 Equipment Features

The main features of the SRT 1F radio equipment are:
• Completely solid-state
• Fully SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) compatible digital radio.
• Section overhead (SOH) bits insertion/extraction at both terminal and
repeater stations, in compliance with SDH optical fibre transmission
systems.
• Interoperable with third party vendor SDH transmission equipment.
(Further study might be necessary for undefined overhead bytes,
etc.).
• Two alternative options available for MCF/Controller card: TL1/OSI
option and SNMP/IP option.
• MST Mode available via proper Timing Control Unit, without any need
of additional ADM/MUX card.
• RST Mode available with SNMP/IP MCF/Controller.
• SDH STM-1 interchangeable electrical or optical (S-1.1 or L-1.1 via
proper SFP module) interface available by proper BSW (Bipolar
Switch) card.
• 1+1 protected STM-1 optical interface for Multiplex Section Protection
(MSP) available as an option with TL1/OSI MCF/controller by proper
BBIU shelf for OPT MSP function.
• Super high density packaging:
Up to sixteen (16) complete SDH radio system including Synchronous
Equipment Management Function (SEMF) are mounted in one ETSI
rack (2200×600×300 mm) for 2x(7+1)CC single-rack with K-shelf
configuration.
• Double Terminal 2x(3+1) East/West configuration in one ETSI rack
available.
• High power amplifier using GaAs Field Effect Transistor (GaAs FET)
with +29 dBm (NP, Normal Power version) and +32 dBm (HP, High
Power version) output power (+29 dBm for 11 GHz band and +27
dBm for 13 GHz band, no HP transceivers are available at 11 and
13GHz).
• Low power consumption of the RF High Power Amplifier using IF pre-
distortion linearity compensation.
• Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is available as standard
configuration.
• Low noise amplifier using High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT)
with a noise figure of 1.5 dB (typical) for 4-6 GHz band.
• High spectral efficiency of 8.5 bits/sec/Hz using 64 QAM Multi-Level
Coded Modulation (64 QAM MLCM) and 11.4 bits/sec/Hz using 128
QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (128 QAM MLCM) for co-channel
operation.
SRT 1F
1-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007
• High efficiency error correction using Multi-Level Coded Modulation

(MLCM).
• Space diversity reception is available as a standard function (enabled
by software setting). In-Phase (IP) combiner is implemented, working
at IF level.
• Transmit space diversity is also available as standard function (via
proper branching composition) for very severe propagation conditions.
• Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (ATDE) with 11-taps fully digital
linear TransVersal Equalizer (TVE) and 10-taps Decision Feedback
Equalizer (DFE).
• Adaptive Frequency Domain Equalizer (AFDE) with Slope Equalizer
working at IF.
• Errorless hitless protection switching with early warning detection.
• 2x 2 Mb/s wayside traffic channels using SOH and RFCOH are
available per each STM-1 as a standard feature.
• 1x 64 kb/s user channel using F1 SOH byte is available per each
STM-1 as a standard feature.
• 2x 64 kb/s EOW Voice Channels using E1 and E2 SOH bytes are
available as a standard feature for omnibus and express respectively.
• Up to 2x 64 kb/s Radio User Channel (RUC) using RFCOH are also
available per each terminal as an option. RUC can be chosen as VF
or digital 64 kb/s signal. Digital 64 kb/s signal interface complies with
ITU-T recommendation G.703 for co-directional or contra-directional
interface.
• Up to 8 DI (Digital Inputs) and 4 DO (Digital Outputs) can be managed
by the system as housekeeping alarms/telecontrols as a standard
feature. Housekeeping facility may be increased by adding up to two
Housekeeping optional units. Each Housekeeping unit increases the
housekeeping facility by 32 DI and 16 DO more (maximum 72 DI and
36 DO per terminal).
• Event management facility:
Alarms and status of the equipment is reported by the SEMF
(Synchronous Equipment Management Function) using the Data
Communication Channel (DCC)
• Performance management facility:
Traffic performance of each hop and of each end-to-end can be
monitored on each RF channel.
Monitoring items are BBE (Background Block Error), BBER
(Background Block Error Ratio), ES (Errored Seconds), ESR (Errored
Second Ratio), SES (Severely Error Seconds), SESR (Severely Error
Second Ratio), UAS (UnAvailable Seconds) and OFS (Out of Frame
Second), number of pointer change and number of MSP and RPS
switching.
• Configuration management facility:
NE configuration is retrieved by the network management terminal
and items such as NE ID, and alarm thresholds can be set as
“provisioning”.
SRT 1F
• Resource management facility:

Physical inventory such as unit name can be read by the SEMF.
• Security management:
Several maintenance levels are provided to avoid malfunction.
• Software download (SWDL) facility:
Firmware used for SRT 1F operation can be remotely downloaded
from the network management terminal.
• Local Craft Terminal available for network element (NE) management
facilities via Windows-based GUI (Graphical User Interface).
• Full integration inside Nokia Siemens Networks NetViewer EMS.
• SNMP Agent and HTTP web server embedded in SNMP/IP
MCF/Controller for integration inside third party vendor EMS.
• Compatible with European Union’s Directives RoHS and WEEE.
SDH MUX SDH MUX SDH Radio SDH Radio SDH MUX
LTE ADM 1+N 1+N LTE
MS Mode MS Mode
Tributary Tributary Tributary
MS MS MS MS
Note:
MS : Multiplex Section LTE : Line Terminal Equipment
RS : Regenerator Section ADM : Add Drop Multiplexer
Network feature : Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) with Section Adaption (SA).
Figure 1-1 - Linear Configuration
SDH MUX SDH MUX SDH MUX

LTE ADM LTE
SDH Radio SDH Radio
1+N or 0+N 1+N or 0+N
Tributary Tributary RS Mode RS Mode Tributary
MS RS RS RS
Network feature : Network protection switching with media diversity
Figure 1-2 - Media Diversity Configuration
SRT 1F
MS MS
Tributary
SDH MUX
ADM
SDH MUX SDH MUX

ADM ADM
Tributary Tributary
SDH Radio SDH Radio
1+N or 0+N 1+N or 0+N
RS/MS Mode RS/MS Mode
RS or MS RS or MS RS or MS
Network feature : Network protection switching with ring operation
Figure 1-3 - Standard Ring Configuration
SRT 1F
1.3 Equipment Details
1.3.1 Ordering Guide
Assembling an SRT 1F terminal means to select the proper equipment

from the ordering guide. Please contact Nokia Siemens Networks’ Sales
and Marketing dept. for the current ordering guide.
The available configurations can be grouped into 6 classes. The following
diagram shows such classification. The drawings in next pages show
ordering guide for each class. All the configurations are available at all
bands, with or without Space Diversity, with HP (High Power) or NP
(Normal Power) transceivers (where applicable).
The configurations N+0 and 2x(N+0) can be considered as particular
cases of the N+1 and 2x(N+1) reported below.
Table 1.1 - Classification of available configurations for SRT 1F

Version Interface
Multi-shelf
Electrical
with MSP
w/o MSP
1+1 N.E.
K-shelf
Optical
Optical
Ref. Configuration Description
Figure 1-4 N+1 Terminal (N < 8) x x x x x

Figure 1-5 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack x x x
Figure 1-6 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack x x x
Figure 1-7 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks (*) x x x x x
Figure 1-9 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack x x x x
and
Figure 1-10
Figure 1-11 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) x x x
(*) also mixed configuration with one rack K-shelf and one rack Multi-shelf is possible, useful for
expansion of existing N+1 Multi-shelf terminal to 2x(N+1) by using K-shelf in the slave rack.
SRT 1F
All K-shelf configurations with space diversity are available with just RX
space diversity, or with TX+RX space diversity. In case of RX SD, the SD
circulator is a simple RF adaptor (ADPT). In case of TX+RX SD, the SD
circulator is a 3-poles RF low-loss duplexer (DUP), same as TX/RX
circulator. The following table clarifies the use of ADPT and DUP
depending on branching configurations:
Branching configuration No. of DUP No. of ADPT

Single polarization without SD 1 0
Single polarization with RX SD 1 1
Single polarization with RX+TX SD 2 0
Double polarization without SD 2 0
Double polarization with RX SD 2 2
Double polarization with RX+TX SD 4 0
SRT 1F
Figure 1-4 shows the configuration of SRT 1F (N+1) terminal equipment.
SRT 1F radio
: ETSI Rack and shelfing x 1
N+1 Terminal
Available with Multi-shelf or with K-shelf up to 7+1
(N < 8)
: RF Branching Network Unit Block :

BRU
RF Branching Network Circuit: 1 set (RF channel allocation dependent)
TX/RX circulator: x 2 max (depends on single or double polarization)
SD circulator: x 2 max (depends on with/without space diversity)
MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block :

Main Signal Transmission Unit: x (N+1), N < 8
SCSU : BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :
SV :: Supervisory UnitUnit
MCF/controller x 1for single RPS: x 1 (TL1/OSI or SNMP/IP)
BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x N, N < 8 (Electrical or Optical)
TCU : Timing Control Unit: x 1 ( + 1 max as option)
HK : Housekeeping Unit (option): x 2 max
ECU : Embedded Communication Unit (option): x 1 max
OCC : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit (option): x 1 max (El. or Opt.)
VF : VF module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max
DIG : 64 kb/s module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max
BBIU : Optional BaseBand Interface Unit shelf for OPT MSP: x 1 max
TCU is mandatory for TL1/OSI, optional for SNMP/IP.

ECU is applicable with TL1/OSI only.
HK is mandatory if there are more than 2 BSW optical equipped.
BBIU is applicable with TL1/OSI only.
Sum of VF and DIG modules shall be max 2 per SV card.
Figure 1-4 - SRT 1F N+1 (N < 8) Terminal Radio Equipment
SRT 1F
Figure 1-5 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2×(N+1) Single Terminal

on one rack equipment (N < 4).
SRT 1F radio
2x(N+1) Single Terminal
Available with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
on one rack (N < 4)

BRU
TX/RX circulator: x 2

Main Signal Transmission Unit: x 2*(N+1), N < 4
MCF/controller x 1for double RPS: x 1 (TL1/OSI or SNMP/IP)
BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 2*N, N < 4 (Electrical or Optical)
BSW INTF : BaseBand Switch Interface Unit: x 1

Figure 1-5 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack Radio Equipment
SRT 1F

on one rack equipment (3 < N < 8).
SRT 1F radio
Available with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST and Expansion K-shelf
on one rack (3 < N < 8)

BRU


Figure 1-6 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack Radio Equipment
SRT 1F

on two racks equipment (N < 8).
SRT 1F radio
Available with Multi-shelf and/or with K-shelf up to 7+1
on two racks (N < 8)

BRU

: BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :
BBIU : Optional BaseBand Interface Unit shelf for OPT MSP: x 2 max

BBIU is applicable with TL1/OSI only.
Figure 1-7 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks Radio Equipment
SRT 1F
Figure 1-8 shows typical 2×(N+1) Double Terminal applications for

repeater configuration (Maximum number of N is 3). A single rack is used
for both East side and West side circuits for floor space saving. The
system can be assumed as an integrated couple of network element NE-
A and NE-B installed together in the same rack. Of course, just one of the
two parts between NE-A and NE-B can be equipped, the other part
remaining unequipped for future adjacent hop expansion.
The following applications are also possible with 2x(3+1) DoubleTerminal
system:
• 2x(3+1) E/W cross-band repeater (different band in each
direction).
• 2x(3+1) dual-band operation (different bands, same direction).
2x(3+1) Double Terminal is available with both Multi-shelf and K-shelf

versions.
(2+1) (2+1)
NE-A NE-B
W1
W2
W1
W2
W1
W2
W1
W2
P
P
Double Terminal
Back to Back Repeater
(3+1) (1+1)
NE-A NE-B
W1
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
P
P
Double Terminal
East West
ADM
Figure 1-8 - Examples of Back to Back and Add/Drop (Repeater) applications
SRT 1F
Figure 1-9 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Double Terminal

on one rack equipment for repeater use (N < 4) with Multi-shelf.
SRT 1F radio
2x(N+1) Double Terminal
with Multi-shelf
on one rack (N < 4)

BRU

MCF/controller x 1for single RPS: x 2 (TL1/OSI or SNMP/IP)
TCU : Timing Control Unit: x 2 max

Figure 1-9 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack Radio Equipment with Multi-
shelf version
SRT 1F
Figure 1-10 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Double Terminal

on one rack equipment for repeater use (N < 4) with K-shelf.
SRT 1F radio
2x(N+1) Double Terminal
with K-shelf 2x(3+1) DT
on one rack (N < 4)

BRU

MCF/controller x 1for single RPS: x 2 (SNMP/IP only)

Figure 1-10 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack Radio Equipment with K-
shelf version
SRT 1F
Figure 1-11 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible)
terminal radio equipment working in 1+1 ACAP or ACCP protected. Also
1+1 CCDP operation is possible. Of course also 2+0 configuration is
allowed, by simply equipping Occasional Traffic card and disabling the
RPS. Further, the SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. can be partially equipped with just
one transceiver to build a 1+0 terminal expansible to 1+1.
SRT 1F radio
: ETSI rack is optional item for 1+1 N.E.
1+1 N.E.
Terminal
Shelf : 1+1 N.E. shelf: x 1
BRU : RF Branching Network Circuit: 1 set (RF channel allocation dependent)
MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit: x 2
SV Supervisory UnitUnit
:: MCF/controller x 1for single RPS: x 1 (TL1/OSI or SNMP/IP)
BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 1 (Electrical)
OPT CONV : Opt/El. Converter for Optical Interface (option): x 1 max
MOUNT KIT : Installation Kit for stand-alone, wall or rack mounting (option): x 1 max

Figure 1-11 - SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Terminal Radio Equipment
SRT 1F
Note : 1+1 N.E. System consists of one shelf only. The following units are dedicated units of
1+1 N.E. system. All the other units are common to Multi-shelf and K-shelf versions:
• OPT CONV (Optical Interface Converter) is an optional card exclusively designed for
SRT 1F 1+1 NOT-EXPANSIBLE model that translates the STM-1 signal interface
between Electrical interface and Optical interface. This card is a simple media
converter without MSP function.
• OPT OCC (Optical Occasional) is an optional card exclusively designed for SRT 1F
1+1 NOT-EXPANSIBLE model that provides an optical interface for occasional
traffic. This card is a simple media converter without MSP function.
1.3.2 BRU (Branching Network Unit)
Detail requirements for BRU:

i) Operating frequency band
ii) Assigned RF channel number and frequency
iii) System configuration (1+0, 1+1, 2+1,........., 7+1)
iv) Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or CCDP operation
v) With RX SD, or TX+RX SD, or without SD (Space Diversity).
1.3.3 MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit)
Detail requirements for MSTU:

i) Operating frequency band and RF channel sub-band.
ii) Standard power output or high power output for 4 to L8 GHz band
iii) Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or CCDP operation
Note: SD receiver circuit is equipped as standard and be enabled by
software as “provisioning” setting.
1.3.4 SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit)
Detail requirements for SCSU:

i) RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels
ii) Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or CCDP operation
iii) TL1/OSI or SNMP/IP
iv) STM-1 electrical or optical interface
v) Required optional unit name such as HK, ECU, TCU, OCC card
(electrical or optical) and relevant quantity
vi) Sub-module of SV unit for RUC (VF or Digital or both or none).
SRT 1F
1.3.5 Optional BBIU (BaseBand Interface Unit for OPT MSP)
Detail requirements for BBIU shelf for OPT MSP function:

i) Number of working channels for STM-1 optical interface with MSP
ii) Use of Occasional Traffic (OCC) on the protection channel
The following diagram shows the equipping guide for BBIU shelf.
Optional BBIU
Optional BBIU Shelf
Shelf
: BBIU shelf with bonnet cover: x 1
for
forOptical
N+1 OPTinterface with MSP
MSP function
BBIU : Baseband Interface Unit :
BBC : Base
: Multiplex
Band Section
Control Unit:
Protection
x 1 Switch Unit x 1
MSPSW : Multiplex
: MultiplexSection
SectionProtection
Protection
Switch
Switch
Unit:
Unit x xN1
OPT INTF : Optical

: Optical Interface
Interface Unitx x2*N
Unit: 1(for Protection channel)
OPT INTF : Optical

: Optical
Interface
Interface
Unit
Unit
(option):
x 2N (N=x 1No.
(forofoptional
workingOCC
channels
card)
Figure 1-12 - Optional BBIU shelf for OPT MSP function for SRT 1F
SRT 1F
1.4 General Specifications
1.4.1 General Information
Table 1.2 - General Specifications

Description
Modulation 64 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) for 4/5/U6/11 GHz band
128 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) for U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz band
Capacity ACAP and ACCP operation
One (1) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency
CCDP operation
Two (2) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency
Auxiliary signal
(1) Wayside traffic (2.048 Mb/s)
Two (2) channels per STM-1 by using RFCOH and SOH as standard:
Maximum 2N channels for N+1 operation or
Maximum 2 x 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) operation.
(2) User Channel (SOH, 64 kb/s)
One (1) channel per STM-1 using SOH as standard:
Maximum N channels for N+1 operation or
Maximum 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) operation.
(3) Radio User Channel (RFCOH, 64 kb/s)
Maximum 2 channels per system using RFCOH available as option:
Maximum 2 channels for N+1 operation or
Maximum 2 x 2 channels for 2 x (N+1) operation.
Repeating Method Regenerative (back to back terminal connection)
Overhead Byte Same insertion/extraction method as for SDH fibre optic transmission
Access system for terminal and repeater station
RS Section
A1, A2, C1, B1, E1, F1, D1–D3 byte
MS Section
B2, E2, K1, K2, D4–D12, M1 and S1 byte.
Hypothetical In accordance with the latest ITU-R recommendation

Reference Digital
Path (HRDP)
SRT 1F
1.4.2 Transmitter (TX)
Table 1.3 - Transmitter section

Description
Output power +29 dBm (NP) or +32 dBm (HP) ±1 dB for 4-L8GHz band
+29 dBm ±1 dB for 11GHz band
+27 dBm ±1 dB for 13GHz band
measured at MSTU unit output (point A’ of Figure 1-13)
Linearity Linearizer circuit is employed to maintain optimum linearity
compensation
Local carrier RF band oscillation With PLL
Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable
Coverage of upper or lower half of the corresponding band
(quarter band for 11 and 13GHz).
Local Frequency Within ± 10 ppm
stability
Spurious emission For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output
< –60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz
< –30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz
IF 1st IF: 70 MHz
2nd IF: 844 MHz
IF input Signal level: –10 dBm nominal
(Test In) Variation: ±1 dB
Impedance: 75 ohm unbalanced
Return loss: > 20 dB/ 70 MHz ±13 MHz for 64 QAM
> 20 dB/ 70 MHz ±11 MHz for 128 QAM
RF filter Chebycheff type

3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM
30 MHz for 128 QAM
ATPC Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) is standard. Power control
level: 10 dB
Response time: 100 ms
Control initiation: Received signal threshold detection SW settable:
RSL = -45 dBm or -55 dBm or -65 dBm
Transmitted output In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.1.3 (2004-12).
spectrum (point B’)
64 MLCM, 40 MHz spacing: Figure 1-14
128 MLCM, 29/29.65 MHz spacing: Figure 1-15
128 MLCM, 28MHz spacing: Figure 1-16
SRT 1F
Z’ E’ A’ B’ C’ D’
Modulator Transmitter Transmit Branching
Feeder
RF Filter (*)
Diversity Receiver Path

ED A’D BD CD DD
Receiver Branching
Demodulator Receiver Feeder
RF Filter (*)
(**) (**)
Main Receiver Path
Z E A Receiver B Branching C D
Demodulator Receiver Feeder
RF Filter (*)
(*) no filtering included

(**) connection at RF, IF or baseband
Figure 1-13 - Radio Building Blocks (ETSI standard)
SRT 1F
Figure 1-14 - Transmitter output spectrum (64 QAM system, 40 MHz spacing)
SRT 1F
Figure 1-15 - Transmitter output spectrum (128 QAM system, 29/29.65 MHz spacing)
SRT 1F
Figure 1-16 - Transmitter output spectrum (128 QAM system, 28 MHz spacing)
SRT 1F
1.4.3 Receiver (RX)
Table 1.4 - Receiver section

Description
Noise figure 1.5 dB typical (for 4 ~ 8 GHz band)
2.0 dB guaranteed (for 4 ~ 8 GHz band
2.5 dB typical (for 11 GHz band)
3.0 dB guaranteed (for 11 GHz band)
4.0 dB typical (for 13 GHz band)
4.5 dB guaranteed (for 13 GHz band)
Note: Noise figure is measured at the MSTU unit input on both the main and
SD receiver, independently, at maximum IF amplifier gain.
Local carrier RF band oscillation with PLL
Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable
Coverage of upper or lower half of the corresponding band
(quarter band for 11 and 13GHz).
Spurious emission For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output
< –60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz
< –30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz
Local Frequency stability Within ±10 ppm
Image rejection More than 100 dB with RX BPF measured at the MSTU output when the image
and main signal levels are equal, and with unmodulated carrier.
Normal received power –32 to –55 dBm
AGC dynamic range –17 to –77 dBm measured at MSTU input
IF 1st IF: 70MHz
2nd IF: 844MHz
IF output (70 MHz) Signal level: –10 dBm nominal, +1 dB/–2 dB variation for –17 to –77 dBm
(Test Out) modulated RX input
Impedance : 75 ohm unbalanced
Return loss : > 20 dB/ 70 MHz ±13 MHz for 64 QAM
±11 MHz for 128 QAM
Measured at the MSTU unit monitoring point.
RF filter Chebycheff type
3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM
30 MHz for 128 QAM
IF filter Butterworth type
3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz
SRT 1F
1.4.4 Modulator (MOD)
Table 1.5 - Modulation

Description
Modulation For 40 MHz Channel spacing:
64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM)
For 28/29/29.65 MHz Channel spacing:
128-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM)
Spectrum shaping 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM
18% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM(7/13GHz)
25% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128QAM MLCM(U4/L6/L8GHz)
Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution.
Local carrier Crystal oscillator (XO)
Local frequency Within ± 15 ppm
stability
IF 70 MHz
1.4.5 Demodulator (DEM)
Table 1.6 - Demodulation

Description
Demodulation Coherent detection/instantaneous decision
Spectrum shaping 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM
18% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM(7/13GHz)
25% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128QAM MLCM(U4/L6/L8GHz)
Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution.
IF 70 MHz
Adaptive Time 11-tap linear transversal equalizer (TVE) and
Domain Equalizer 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE)
in baseband
Adaptive Frequency Slope Equalizer
Domain Equalizer
in IF
SRT 1F
1.4.6 Digital Processing
Table 1.7 - Digital Processing

Description
BSW Electrical CMI to CMI
BSW Optical Optical – to – Electrical (CMI) conversion
Electrical (CMI) – to – Optical conversion
MSTU (SDH Frame) CMI – to – Unipolar conversion
Unipolar – to – CMI conversion
Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame
Section Adaptation (change the pointer)
Scrambler/descrambler
Addition/drop of section Overhead bit
(1) Framing bit (A1, A2)
(2) Regenerator section parity (B1)
(3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3)
(4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1)
(5) User channel (F1)
(6) Multiplex section parity (B2)
(7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12)
(8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2)
(9) AIS, FERF (K1, K2)
(10) Section trace (J0)
(11) Far End Block Error (M1)
(12) Synchronization status byte (S1)
OPT INTF for BBIU Optical – to – Electrical (CMI) conversion
shelf for OPT MSP
Electrical (CMI) – to – Optical conversion
function
Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame
Section Adaptation (change the pointer)
Scrambler/descrambler
Addition/drop of section Overhead byte
(1) Framing bit (A1, A2)
(2) Regenerator section parity (B1)
(3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3)
(4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1)
(5) User channel (F1)
(6) Multiplex section parity (B2)
(7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12)
(8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2)
(9) MSP CONT (K1, K2)
(10) Section trace (J0)
(11) Far End Block Error (M1)
(12) Synchronization status byte (S1)
FERF = Far End Receive Failure

MSP = Multiplex Section Protection
SRT 1F
Table 1.8 - Digital Processing (continued)

Description
MSTU (Radio Frame) SDH frame to Radio frame conversion
Radio frame complementary Overhead (RFCOH) insertion and detection
(1) Frame alignment
(2) Redundancy bit for MLCM
(3) Digital service channel
(4) RPS control signal
(5) Route identification
(6) Way side traffic
(7) Transfer bit for 1 bit error
(8) Transfer bit for frequency measurement
(9) ATPC Control signal
Scrambling 215–1 patterns
Route ID 16 addresses pre-settable
ATPC = Automatic Transmit Power Control
SRT 1F
1.4.7 System Performances
Table 1.9 - System Performances
Description
Up-fade BER BER = 10–3 at RSL of –17 dBm measured at point A.
BER = 10–10 at RSL of –21 dBm measured at point A.
Down-fade BER In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3 (2004-12).
For 64 QAM MLCM:
BER = 10–3 at RSL of –76.5 dBm typical
Measured at point A.
For 128 QAM MLCM:
Measured at point A.
Note 1 : Space Diversity improves RSL by 2 dB.
Note 2 : RSL is 1.0 dB higher for 11 GHz and 2.5 dB higher for 13
GHz.
Note 3 : Down-fade BER curves at point B are reported as follows.
64QAM 4/5/U6 GHz Typical Figure 1-17
64QAM 11 GHz Typical Figure 1-18
128QAM U4/L6/7/L8 GHz Typical Figure 1-19
128QAM 13 GHz Typical Figure 1-20
Residual BER BER < 10–13 /hop/day at normal receiving condition
RSL = Receive Signal Level
SRT 1F
64 MLCM 4/5/U6G Bands Typical BER curves
1.E-02
Point A
Point B 4G
1.E-03 Point B 5G
Point B U6G
ETSI
1.E-04
1.E-05
BER
1.E-06
1.E-07
1.E-08
1.E-09
1.E-10
-80.0 -78.0 -76.0 -74.0 -72.0 -70.0 -68.0 -66.0 -64.0 -62.0 -60.0
RSL (dBm)
Figure 1-17 - BER vs RSL Typical down fade (64 MLCM 4/5/U6G system)
SRT 1F
64 MLCM 11G Band Typical BER curves
1.E-02
1.E-03 Point A
Point B 11G
ETSI
1.E-04
1.E-05
BER
1.E-06
1.E-07
1.E-08
1.E-09
1.E-10
-80.0 -78.0 -76.0 -74.0 -72.0 -70.0 -68.0 -66.0 -64.0 -62.0 -60.0
RSL (dBm)
Figure 1-18 - BER vs RSL Typical down fade (64 MLCM 11G system)
SRT 1F
128 MLCM U4/L6/7/L8G Bands Typical BER curves
1.E-02
Point A
Point B U4G
1.E-03 Point B L6G
Point B 7G
Point B L8G
ETSI
1.E-04
1.E-05
BER
1.E-06
1.E-07
1.E-08
1.E-09
1.E-10
-80.0 -78.0 -76.0 -74.0 -72.0 -70.0 -68.0 -66.0 -64.0 -62.0 -60.0
RSL (dBm)
Figure 1-19 - BER vs RSL Typical down fade (128 MLCM U4/L6/7/L8G system)
SRT 1F
128 MLCM 13G Band Typical BER curves
1.E-02
1.E-03 Point A
Point B 13G
ETSI
1.E-04
1.E-05
BER
1.E-06
1.E-07
1.E-08
1.E-09
1.E-10
-76.0 -74.0 -72.0 -70.0 -68.0 -66.0 -64.0 -62.0 -60.0 -58.0 -56.0
RSL (dBm)
Figure 1-20 - BER vs RSL Typical down fade (128 MLCM 13G system)
SRT 1F
1.4.8 RF Interference
Table 1.10 - RF Interference

Description
Co-channel < External >
In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3 (2004-12).
64QAM system:
RSL degradation < 1 dB at BER = 10–6:
C/I = 31 dB (typical), 33 dB (ETSI limit)
128QAM system:
< Internal >
In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.1.3 (2004-12).
64QAM and 128QAM system:
Adjacent channel In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3 (2004-12).
64QAM system:
C/I = -27 dB (typical), -4 dB (ETSI limit)
128QAM system:
Innermost channel C/N degradation at BER = 10–3 : < 1 dB
measured at duplexer input and Inter-Port Isolation (IPI) of 40 dB
XPIC Improvement factor using XPIC for co-channel operation > 18 dB
measured at BER = 10–3 interference curve
SRT 1F
1.4.9 RF Interface
The following is the RF waveguide interface to/from the antenna system.
Table 1.11 - RF Interface
Frequency band Flange (IEC standard)

4 GHz band UDR 40
U4 GHz band UDR 40
5 GHz band UDR 48
L6 GHz band UDR 70
U6 GHz band UDR 70
7 GHz band UDR 70
L8 GHz band UDR 84
11 GHz band UDR 100
13 GHz band UDR 120
SRT 1F
1.4.10 Countermeasures to Fading
Table 1.12 - Countermeasures to Fading

Description
RX SD In Phase combiner in IF stage LO endless phase shifter
TX SD A subset of RF channels are transmitted by SD antenna
SD DADE Method Two types are available;
Compensation with RF feeder length (equivalent to 25 m), or
Compensation with delay adjuster at IF (equivalent to 120 ns).
SD DADE is adjusted through the delay line on the MSTU unit.
Adaptive Equalizer Adaptive time domain equalizer in baseband full digital type
(a) 11-tap transversal equalizer (TVE)
(b) 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE)
Adaptive frequency domain equalizer in IF
(a) Slope equalizer (SLP EQL)
Radio protection Single protection RPS1 in N+1 configuration
system Double protection RPS1 and RPS2 in 2x(N+1) ST configuration
Unipolar switch (USW) in unipolar stage
Errorless protection switching with early warning detection for fade
Uni-directional switching
Bipolar switch (BSW) in bipolar stage
Hit switch for equipment failure
Bi-directional switching
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) inside Demodulator
module for Co-channel operation
Demodulator without XPIC can be upgraded with XPIC at factory by
new hardware/software installation.
FEC Multi-Level Coded Modulation(MLCM)
Coding gain for 64QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=10–3
3.5 dB at BER=10–6
Coding gain for 128QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=10–3
3.7 dB at BER=10–6
ATPC ATPC range: 10 dB
Control speed: 100 dB/sec
SRT 1F
1.4.11 Base Band Signal Interface for STM-1 System
The Base Band Signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T G.957 and
G.703 Recs.
1.4.11.1 Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface

In BSW Optical unit the optical transceiver function is demanded to SFP
module. The type of SFP module defines the particular ITU-T G.957
application (S-1.1, L-1.1, other) concerned.
Table 1.13 - STM-1 Optical Interface (SFP module on BSW Optical unit)
Bit Rate SDH level 1: 155.52 Mbit/s ± 20 ppm
Unit Name SFP S-1.1 SFP L-1.1
Application code (ITU-T G.957) (S-1.1) (L-1.1)
Typical hop 0-15 Km 15-40 Km
Operation wavelength range (nm) 1260-1360 1280-1335
Transmitter at reference point S:
Source Type MLM MLM
Mean Launched Power: Maximum (dBm) –8 0
Mean Launched Power: Minimum (dBm) –15 –5
Minimum Bit Rate Extinction Ratio (dB) 8.2 10
Maximum RMS width (nm) 7.7 3
Receiver at reference point R:
Minimum Sensitivity (dBm) –28 –34
Minimum Overload (dBm) –8 –10
Maximum Optical Path Penalty (including chirp penalty 1 1
and dispersion penalty) (dB)
Connector Used LC Duplex
In case of use of BBIU optional shelf for OPT MSP function, the optical
interface has got built-in optical transceiver function, in accordance with
ITU-T G.957 application (S-1.1 or L-1.1).
SRT 1F
Table 1.14 - STM-1 Optical Interface (OPT INTF unit on BBIU shelf for OPT MSP)
Bit Rate SDH level 1: 155.52 Mbit/s ± 20 ppm
Unit Name OPT INTF 1 OPT INTF 2
Application code (ITU-T G.957) (S-1.1) (L-1.1)
Typical hop 0-15 Km 15-40 Km
Operation wavelength range (nm) 1260-1360 1280-1335
Transmitter at reference point S:
Source Type MLM MLM
Mean Launched Power: Maximum (dBm) –8 0
Mean Launched Power: Minimum (dBm) –15 –5
Minimum Bit Rate Extinction Ratio (dB) 8.2 10
Maximum RMS width (nm) 7.7 4
Receiver at reference point R:
Minimum Sensitivity (dBm) –28 –34
Minimum Overload (dBm) –8 –10
Maximum Optical Path Penalty (including chirp penalty 1 1
and dispersion penalty) (dB)
Connector Used SC or FC Duplex
1.4.11.2 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface
Table 1.15 - STM-1 Electrical Interface (BSW Electrical unit)

Bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s ± 20 ppm
Code format Coded Mark Inversion (CMI)
Pulse mask In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703
Impedance 75-ohm nominal, unbalanced
Return loss > 15 dB / 8~240 MHz, measured at base band input port
Input cable length The attenuation of the coaxial cable pair should be assumed to follow an
approximately root √f law and to have a maximum insertion loss of 12.7 dB at
a frequency of 78 MHz.
Coaxial cable TCE2H2HH2 1 (0.4-1.9)/M or equivalent
Connector Used 1.0/2.3 microsiemens connector.
SRT 1F
1.4.11.3 Jitter
Jitter tolerance
The SRT 1F radio equipment tolerates the input jitter applied according to
ITU-T Rec. G.958 with Type A specified on Table 2.
Jitter transfer
The SRT 1F radio equipment meets the jitter transfer specification given
in ITU-T Rec. G.958 Figure 6.2 with the jitter transfer parameter specified
for Type B in Table 1/G.958 when sinusoidal jitter up to the mask level in
Figure 6.3/G.958 with the jitter tolerance parameter specified for Type A
in Table 2/G.958 is applied at the STM-1 input.
1.4.11.4 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Terminal
When the Base Band signal (optical/electrical) or radio signal from the
optical equipment or radio equipment is lost, the SRT1F generates AU-
AIS (MS mode) or MS-AIS (RS mode) to the next equipment. When the
AU-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT1F transfers
the AU-AIS to the next equipment after SOH processing. When MS-AIS is
detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT1F transfers MS-AIS to
the next equipment after RSOH processing in case of RS operation, and
transfers AU-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH and MSOH
processing in case of MS operation.
Repeater
When frame or signal loss is detected, SRT1F generates MS-AIS to the
next equipment.
AIS initiator
• Loss of Signal (LOS)
• Loss of Frame (LOF)
• Loss of Pointer (LOP)
• B2-ERR
• MS-AIS, AU-AIS revealed
• Section Trace ID Mismatch
SRT 1F
1.4.12 Auxiliary Signal Interface
1.4.12.1 Way Side (WS)
Table 1.16 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (WS)

Capacity 2048 kbit/s x 2 per STM-1
Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH and/or SOH bits
One wayside traffic is transferred through RFCOH bits, the other is through
undefined bytes in SOH
Digital interface In accordance with ITU-T G.703 Rec.
Connector Multi-pin connector for 120 Ω balanced
used Coaxial connector, 1.0/2.3 microsiemens for 75 Ω unbalanced
1.4.12.2 Engineering Order Wire (EOW)
Table 1.17 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (EOW)

Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from E1 and E2 of SOH.
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony)
Express/selective orderwire and omnibus orderwire
Interface 2-W for internal telephone set and external use
4-W for branching connector
Interface level 2W Interface:
Input level: 0.0 dBr nominal
Output level : –2.0 dBr nominal
Voice maximum level: 3 dBmo
4W Interface:
Input level: –4 dBr nominal (–16 to –0.5 dBr, 0.5 step)
Output level : –4 dBr nominal (–8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step)
Selective call DTMF (Dual Tone Multiple Frequency) for both E1 and E2 independently.
Four (4) calling digits are used:
Two (2) digits for group number: (G1,G2)
Two (2) digits for station number: (G3,G4)
When calling, (#,G1,G2,G3,G4) is dialled by push-phone TEL.
Two (2) dialling methods are available:
Individual station calling: (#,G1,G2,G3,G4)
Broadcasting calling: (#, G1,G2,*,*)
4W cascade Up to 20 NEs for E1 and E2 independently, due to voice frequency (VF)
connection degradation caused by D/A, A/D conversion in PCM CODEC
Simultaneous Up to 6 NEs for E1 and E2 independently, due to leakage of voice

communication frequency (VF) signals in 2W interface
SRT 1F
1.4.12.3 User Channel (UC)
Table 1.18 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (User Channel)

Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from F1 byte of SOH.
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 1 (equivalent to 1 CH telephony) per STM-1
Interface 120 Ohm Co-directional or contra directional
Pulse mask In accordance with ITU-T G.703
Output jitter In accordance with ITU-T G.823 (applicable for co-directional only)
Jitter Tolerance In accordance with ITU-T G.823 (applicable for co-directional only)
Connector used Multi-pin connector
1.4.12.4 Radio User Channel (RUC)
Table 1.19 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (RUC)

Transmission - Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH bits
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) per system
Interface Combination of VF and 64 kbit/s available by mounting optional sub-PCB
module on the SV units.
VF interface Input level : –16 dBr nominal (–16 to –0.5 dBr, 0.5 step)
Output level: +7 dBr nominal (–8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step)
No. of CH Maximum 2 CH
Amplitude response: In accordance with ITU-T G.712
Signal-to-distortion: In accordance with ITU-T G.712
Impedance 600 Ω balanced
Digital interface Interface: Co-directional or contra-directional

Connector used Multi-pin connector
SRT 1F
1.4.12.5 External Station Alarms / Housekeeping

The system allows as standard up to 8 DI (Digital Inputs) for collection of
external station alarms plus 4 DO (Digital Outputs) for remote telecontrol
of station devices (housekeeping function).
In case of BSW Optical interface, 4 DI and 2 DO per each BSW Optical
are used for collection of BSW alarms/controls.
The number of housekeeping DI/DO ports may be increased by equipping
up to two optional HK units. Each HK unit adds 32 DI and 16 DO to
housekeeping facility.
Table 1.20 - Housekeeping Signal Interface (HK)

Unit to be equipped HK input (DI) HK output (DO)
Available as standard 8 4
equipping 1 HK optional card 40 20
equipping 2 HK optional cards 72 36
NOTE: Maximum 1 HK unit per direction can be equipped in 2x(N+1) single rack double terminal.
No HK unit can be equipped in 1+1 N.E. system.
Table 1.21 - Housekeeping Electrical Characteristics

INPUT I = 0.3 mA to 11.3 mA
OUTPUT Imax = 100 mA
Vmax = 110 V (DC)
The alarms forwarded have the following logic:
• OPEN = normal
• CLOSE = alarm
SRT1F equipment Other equipment
Housekeeping input (DI)
6.4 kΩ L ● ●
Photo ← 0.3 mA to 11.3 mA

coupler
● ●
Housekeeping output (DO)
L ● ●
Max. I = 100 mA
Relay →
Max. V = DC 110 V
L ● ●
Figure 1-21 - Housekeeping Electrical Characteristics
SRT 1F
1.5 Mechanical Specification

housed in one rack
housed in one rack
The available configurations are summarized in Table 1.1.
Multi-shelf configuration is required in the following case:
- when double terminal E/W configuration on one rack is required and
MCF/controller is required to be TL1/OSI type.
1+1 N.E. solution is required in the following case:
- no more than 500 mm rack occupancy and no request of future
expansion to more than 2 TRs per terminal.
In all the other cases, Nokia Siemens Networks recommended solution is
generally based upon K-shelf configuration.
1.5.1 SRT 1F K-shelf
1.5.1.1 General
The SRT 1F ETSI rack for K-shelf has the following dimensions:
• 2200 mm height
• 600 mm width
• 300 mm depth
Figure 1-22 shows ETSI rack layout in the case of equipping K-shelf and
Expansion K-shelf in the same rack.
SRT 1F
K-shelf
Expansion K-shelf
Figure 1-22 - ETSI rack layout for SRT 1F K-shelf system
Five (5) types of system configuration are available as follows:

• N+1 Terminal (N < 8) using K-shelf up to 7+1 (see Figure 1-23);
• 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack using K-shelf up to
2x(3+1) ST (see Figure 1-24);
• 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack using K-shelf up to
2x(3+1) ST and expansion K-shelf in the same rack (see Figure 1-25);
• 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks using K-shelf up to 7+1
(see Figure 1-26);
• 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack using K-shelf up to
2x(3+1) DT (see Figure 1-27).
The N+0/2x(N+0) configurations can be considered as particular cases of

the system configurations above.
SRT 1F
Figure 1-23 - Typical Rack Configuration for N+1 Terminal (N < 8) using
SRT 1F K-shelf up to 7+1
The BBIU shelf is optional item to be equipped only if OPT MSP

protection is required.
Inter-shelf cabling and connections between BBIU and K-shelf are
needed if BBIU is equipped.
SRT 1F
Figure 1-24 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
SRT 1F
Figure 1-25 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST and expansion K-shelf in the same rack
Inter-shelf cabling and connections between K-shelf and Expansion K-

shelf are needed.
SRT 1F
Figure 1-26 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 7+1 in two separate racks

Inter-rack cabling and connections are required to the PCB backplane
between main and slave rack.
SRT 1F
Figure 1-27 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT
SRT 1F
1.5.1.2 K-shelf Rack Construction

The equipment construction is as follows:
• ETSI standard Rack
2,200 (H) x 600 (W) x 345 (D) mm with shelf bonnet cover
• K-shelf with PCB backplane and bonnet cover
• Expansion K-shelf with PCB backplane and bonnet cover
• Optional BBIU shelf with PCB backplane and bonnet cover
• RF branching network
• Slide-in-units(SIU)
The following connectors and power supply terminals are on the PCB
backplane:
• Multi-pin and coaxial connectors for data
• Multi-pin connectors for alarm and status output for housekeeping bits
• Power supply terminal from power supply system and non-fuse
breaker
K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf comprise the RF branching network unit

(BRU) section, main signal transmission unit (MSTU) section, baseband
interface and supervisory/control & switching unit (SCSU) section and
user interface area (UIA) section. BBIU is optional shelf for OPT MSP
function.
A multi-layer PCB backplane is used for plug-in units. Multi-pin
connectors on the backplane are high-reliability type and have protection
facilities against mis-insertion.
The RF branching network is housed above the MSTU section. The RF
branching network consists of RF band pass filters and circulators for RF
channel separation.
Connection between the RF branching network and the MSTU units are
made by semi-rigid coaxial cables with SMA connectors via an MSTU
adapter.
All units are plug-in type and no wiring is required during installation and
maintenance. Units have card-pullers for easy card extraction and unit
locking. All units can be accessed from the front of the rack.
SRT 1F
1.5.2 SRT 1F Multi-shelf
1.5.2.1 General
The SRT 1F ETSI rack for Multi-shelf has the following dimensions:
• 2200 mm height
• 600 mm width
• 300 mm depth
Figure 1-28 shows ETSI rack layout in the case of equipping Multi-shelf
with BBIU optional shelf for OPT MSP in the same rack.
SRT 1F
Figure 1-28 - ETSI rack layout for SRT 1F Multi-shelf system
Three (3) types of system configuration are available as follows:

• N+1 Terminal (N < 8) using Multi-shelf (see Figure 1-29)
• 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks using Multi-shelf (see
Figure 1-30)
• 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack using Multi-shelf (see
Figure 1-31)
The N+0/2x(N+0) configurations can be considered as particular cases of

the system configurations above.
SRT 1F
Figure 1-29 - Typical Rack Configuration for N+1 Terminal (N < 8) using
SRT 1F Multi-shelf

Inter-shelf cabling and connections between BBIU and SCSU are needed
if BBIU is equipped.
SRT 1F
using SRT 1F Multi-shelf

SRT 1F
Figure 1-31 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack
using SRT 1F Multi-shelf
SRT 1F
1.5.2.2 Multi-shelf Rack Construction

• ETSI standard Rack
2,200 (H) x 600 (W) x 345 (D) mm with shelf bonnet cover
• RF branching network section (BRU shelf with bonnet cover)
• MSTU shelf with PCB backplane and bonnet cover
• SCSU shelf with PCB backplane and bonnet cover
• Optional BBIU shelf with PCB backplane and bonnet cover
• Slide-in-units(SIU)
backplane:
• Multi-pin and coaxial connectors for data
• Power supply terminal from power supply system and non-fuse
breaker
The shelves comprise the RF branching network unit (BRU) section, main
signal transmission unit (MSTU) section, baseband interface, user
interface and supervisory/control & switching unit (SCSU) section. BBIU
is optional shelf for OPT MSP function.
connectors on the backplane are high-reliability type and have protection
facilities against mis-insertion.
The RF branching network shelf is housed above the MSTU shelf. The
RF branching network consists of RF band pass filters and circulators for
RF channel separation.
Connection between the RF branching network and the MSTU units are
made by semi-rigid coaxial cables with SMA connectors via an MSTU
adapter.
All units are plug-in type and no wiring is required during installation and
maintenance. Units have card-pullers for easy card extraction and unit
locking. All units can be accessed from the front of the rack.
SRT 1F
1.5.3 Mixed application with SRT 1F K-shelf and Multi-shelf
This paragraph treats a particular case where K-shelf is used to expand

an existing Multi-shelf from N+1 CC single-polarized to 2x(N+1) CC. The
configuration in this case is
• 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks using Multi-shelf and K-
shelf up to 7+1 (see Figure 1-32)
The 2x(N+0) configuration can be considered as particular case of the
system configuration above.
Also in this case the SRT 1F ETSI rack has the following dimensions:
• 2200 mm height
• 600 mm width
• 300 mm depth
SRT 1F
using SRT 1F Multi-shelf in the main rack and SRT 1F K-shelf up to 7+1 in the slave rack

SRT 1F
1.5.4 SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. system
1.5.4.1 General
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. system can be installed according to stand-alone, wall
mounting and ETSI rack mode.
In case of rack mounting, standard ETSI rack may be used:
• 2200 mm height
• 600 mm width
• 300 mm depth
Figure 1-33 shows ETSI rack layout in the case of equipping one system
1+1 N.E. Up to two systems 1+1 N.E. can be equipped in the same ETSI
rack for double terminal application (see Figure 1-34).
SRT 1F
Figure 1-33 - ETSI rack layout for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (1 system)
SRT 1F
Figure 1-34 - ETSI rack layout for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (2 systems)
The configuration available with 1+1 N.E. assembly is the following:

• 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) AP/CC Terminal (see Figure 1-35)
1+0 and 2+0 configurations can be considered as particular cases of the
system configuration above.
SRT 1F
Figure 1-35 - Typical Rack Configuration for 1+1 Not Expansible AP/CC Terminal using
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Assembly in ETSI rack mounting mode
SRT 1F
The equipment of the cards inside the 1+1 N.E. shelf can be made
according to the following set of configuration, depending on the
requirements of the interface and the need for occasional traffic.
1+0 configuration, STM-1e interface 1+1 configuration, STM-1e interface 1+1 OCC configuration, STM-1e interface
M M M M M
S S S S S
T T T T T T T T O
C C C C
U U
U U U
U U U C
S S E S
W P W P W
V V V
B B B
S S S
W W W
1+0 configuration, STM-1o interface 1+1 configuration, STM-1o interface 1+1 OCC configuration, STM-1o interface
M M M M M
S S S S S
T T T T T T T T O
C C C C
U U
U U U
U U U C
S S O S
W P W P W
V V V
B O B O B O
S P S P S P
W T W T W T
Figure 1-36 - Equipment Configurations for 1+1 N.E. Terminal
SRT 1F
1.5.4.2 1+1 N.E. Rack Construction

• Rack is optional item (stand-alone or wall mounting are available)
• One or Two 1+1 N.E. assemblies.
backplane:
• Multi-pin and co-axial connectors for data
• Power supply terminal from power supply system.
The 1+1 N.E. assembly comprise the main signal transmission unit
(MSTU), supervisory control, switching unit and RF branching network
unit (BRU).
connectors on the backplane have high-reliability features and are
provided with facilities which prevent wrong insertion.
The RF branching network is housed above and behind the shelf. The RF
branching network consists of RF band pass filters and,
All units are of the plug-in type hence needing no wiring during the
installation and maintenance works. Units have card-pullers for easy card
extraction and unit locking. All units can be accessed through front panel.
SRT 1F
1.5.5 Shelf Layout
1.5.5.1 K-shelf
Figure 1-37 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 7+1.
Figure 1-38 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST.
Figure 1-39 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST and
Expansion K-shelf for up to 2x(7+1) ST.
Figure 1-40 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT.
Figure 1-41 shows the K-shelf front and side views.
490 mm
W/ C W/ C W/ C W/ C
BPF BPF BPF BPF SD BRU

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU
MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
1,155 mm
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
SV
ECU1
ECU2 NFB
Connectors TERM UIA
Figure 1-37 - Layout of K-shelf up to 7+1
SRT 1F
490 mm
W/C W/C W/C W/C

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU(PRT, RPS1)
MSTU(PRT, RPS2)
MSTU(M1, RPS1)
MSTU(M2, RPS1)
MSTU(M3, RPS1)
MSTU(M1, RPS2)
MSTU(M2, RPS2)
MSTU(M3, RPS2)
MSTU
1,155 mm
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
SV
ECU1
ECU2 NFB
Connectors TERM UIA
Figure 1-38 - Layout of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
SRT 1F
UMN
911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007

SRT 1F
Figure 1-39 - Layout of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST and Expansion K-shelf
MSTU
MSTU
SCSU
SCSU
BRU
BRU
UIA
UIA
RX
SD
TX
RX
SD
TX
TERM
TERM
NFB
MSTU(M3, RPS2) MSTU(M7, RPS2)
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
W/C
MSTU(M2, RPS2) BSW INTF

MSTU(M6, RPS2)
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BSW(M3)
W/C
BSW(M2) OCC INTF

490 mm
MSTU(PRT, RPS2) MSTU(M4, RPS2)
Connectors
Connectors
BSW(M1) BSW(M7)
HK2 BSW(M6)
ECU1
ECU2
SV
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
HK1 BSW(M5)
W/C
TCU-Y BSW(M4)
MSTU(M2, RPS1) TCU-X
MSTU(M6, RPS1) OCC INTF
BSW(M7)
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BSW(M3) BSW(M6)
W/C
BSW(M2) BSW(M5)
MSTU(PRT, RPS1) BSW(M1)
MSTU(M4, RPS1) BSW(M4)
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1,155 mm 930 mm
1-66
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1-67
MSTU
SCSU
BRU
UIA
Figure 1-40 - Layout of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT

SD
RX
TX
TERM
NFB
MSTU(M3, W-side)
BPF
BPF
BPF
W/C
MSTU(M2, W-side) BSW INTF

OCC INTF
MSTU(M1, W-side)
BPF
BPF
BPF
BSW(M3)
W/C
BSW(M2)
490 mm
MSTU(PRT, W-side)
Connectors
BSW(M1)
HK2
MSTU(M3, E-side)
SV
SV
BPF
BPF
BPF
HK1
W/C
TCU-Y
MSTU(M2, E-side) TCU-X

OCC INTF
MSTU(M1, E-side)
BPF
BPF
BPF
BSW(M3)
W/C
BSW(M2)
MSTU(PRT, E-side) BSW(M1)
1,155 mm
SRT 1F
UMN
Figure 1-41 - K-shelf front and side view
SRT 1F
1.5.5.2 BRU shelf

Figure 1-42 shows the layout of the BRU shelf. Maximum twelve (12)
pass-band filters, two (2) TX/RX circulators and two (2) RX SD Adaptors
can be mounted in one BRU shelf. Optional BEF (Band Elimination
Filters) can be housed when required for innermost channels separation.
Figure 1-43 shows the front and side views of MSTU shelf.
Figure 1-42 - BRU shelf layout
Figure 1-43 - BRU shelf front and side view
SRT 1F
1.5.5.3 MSTU shelf

Figure 1-44 shows the layout of the MSTU shelf. Maximum eight (8)
MSTU units can be mounted in one MSTU shelf.
Figure 1-45 Shows the front and side views of MSTU shelf.
Figure 1-44 - MSTU shelf layout
Figure 1-45 - MSTU shelf front and side view
SRT 1F
1.5.5.4 SCSU shelf

Figure 1-46 shows the layout of the SCSU. There are two types of SCSU:
• SCSU for single terminal can house one SV unit, one TCU unit,
and maximum seven (7) BSW units. SV unit can be RPS Group 1
type or RPS Group 2 type, depending on configuration: RPS
Group 1 type means main RPS, and is used in N+1 AP/CC and in
master rack of 2x(N+1) CC; RPS Group 2 means second RPS,
and is used in slave rack of 2x(N+1) CC. In addition to the above
units, one back-up TCU unit, two HK units, one OCC INTF unit,
and up to two ECU units can be optionally mounted.
• SCSU for E/W double terminal can house one SV unit, one TCU
unit and maximum three (3) BSW unit per each direction (East
and West). In addition to the above units, one HK unit and one
OCC INTF unit can be optionally mounted per each direction (East
and West).
Figure 1-47 shows the front and side views of SCSU shelf.
SRT 1F
SCSU RPS Group 1 SCSU RPS Group 2
SCSU Double Terminal
Figure 1-46 - SCSU shelf layout
SRT 1F
SCSU shelf
SCSU Double Terminal shelf
Figure 1-47 - SCSU shelf front and side views
SRT 1F
1.5.5.5 1+1 N.E. shelf

Figure 1-48 shows the layout of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. assembly. Up to two (2)
MSTU units can be equipped, one TCU card, one SV card, one BSW
card and the following optional items:
• Up to one OPT card, optical converter for BSW interface
• Up to one OCC card, occasional traffic interface, which can be
electrical or optical
Figure 1-49 Shows SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. shelf front and side views.
Figure 1-48 - Layout of 1+1 N.E. assembly

(85)
588
(503)
(294) (298)
359 (mm)
Figure 1-49 - 1+1 N.E. shelf front and side views
SRT 1F
1.5.5.6 BBIU shelf

BBIU shelf is an optional unit equipped in both K-shelf and Multi-shelf
configuration to provide optical interface with MSP protection.
Figure 1-50 shows the layout on the optional BBIU shelf for STM-1 optical
interface. One block can house a maximum of fifteen (15) OPT INTF
units, seven (7) MSP SW units, and one BBC unit.
Figure 1-51 shows BBIU shelf front and side views.
Figure 1-50 - BBIU shelf layout
Figure 1-51 - BBIU shelf front and side views
SRT 1F
1.5.6 Unit Construction
Table 1.22 shows a list of the units/blocks equipped in SRT 1F system. A

User Interface Access block is available on SCS section including
backplane connectors, DC Power terminal and non-fuse breakers area.
Table 1.22 - Unit Construction

Abbreviation
Item Slide-in-Unit Name/ module Remarks
/Block
1 Radio Frequency Branching Network BRU BRU Includes filters and circulators
+29 dBm/+32 dBm for 4-8 GHz
2 Main Signal Transmission Unit MSTU MSTU +29 dBm for 11 GHz
+27 dBm for 13 GHz
SV for up to N+1 AP/CC (RPS1)
3 MCF/Controller Supervisory Unit SV and SV up to 2x(N+1) CC (RPS1
and RPS2) are available
BSW Interconnection between GP1 and
4 Baseband Switch Interface
INTF GP2 RPS groups in 2x(N+1) CC
For STM-1 electrical interface with
5 Baseband Switch for Electrical Interface BSW E
microcoaxial 1.0/2.3 connectors
For STM-1 optical interface Can
6 Baseband Switch for Optical Interface BSW O
equip SFP module S-1.1 or L-1.1
OPT
7 SFP Module for BSW Optical short haul
BSW1
Code S-1.1
OPT
8 SFP Module for BSW Optical long haul
BSW2
Code L-1.1
One TCU is mandatory in case
MCF/Controller is TL1/OSI type.
9 Timing Control Unit for MST mode TCU
A second TCU can be housed for
SCSU 1+1 redundancy (optional)
Occasional Traffic Interface for STM-1 Low priority traffic using PRT
10 Electrical Interface
OCC E
channel (optional)
Occasional Traffic Interface for STM-1 Low priority traffic using PRT
11 Optical Interface
OCC O
channel (optional)
OPT Optical/Electrical converter for
12 Optical Converter for BSW in 1+1 N.E.
CONV 1+1 N.E. (optional)
Occasional Traffic Interface for STM-1 OCC O Low priority traffic using PRT
13 Optical Interface for 1+1 N.E. 1+1NE channel for 1+1 N.E. (optional)
Max. 36-item remote control and
14 Housekeeping HK
max.72-item supervisory (optional)
Card for DCCM management
15 Embedded Communication Unit ECU
(optional)
SV Sub-module for 64kb/s digital
16 Digital RUC Sub-unit DIG
RUC (optional)
SV Sub-module for voice channel
17 Voice Frequency RUC Sub-unit VF
RUC (optional)
Multiplex Section Protection Switch Unit MSP
18 SW
STM-1 Switch for MSP protection
19 Baseband Control Unit BBC BBIU Controller

OPT BBIU
20 STM-1 Optical Interface Unit 1 S.1-1 Type
INTF 1
STM-1 Optical Interface Unit 2 OPT
21 INTF 2
L.1-1 Type
SRT 1F
1.5.7 Weight
Table 1.23 shows the weight of the units/shelves of SRT 1F.
Table 1.23 - Weight of Each Unit and Equipment

ITEM Weight (kg)
Racks:
ETSI Rack 2200mm for Multi-shelf 45.0 kg
ETSI Rack 2200mm for K-shelf 36.0 kg
Shelves:
K-shelf 30 kg (included front cover)
Expansion K-shelf 28 kg (included front cover)
BRU shelf 9.0 kg (included front cover)
MSTU shelf 13 kg (included front cover)
SCSU shelf 17 kg (included front cover)
SCSU Double Terminal shelf 18 kg (included front cover)
1+1 N.E. shelf 18 kg (included front cover)
BBIU shelf (optional shelf for OPT MSP) 16 kg (included front cover)
Units:
MSTU Transceiver Unit 7.0 kg (included MSTU adaptor)
SV MCF/Controller Unit 1.5 kg
TCU 0.4 kg
BSW Electrical 0.4 kg
BSW Optical 0.5 kg (included SFP module)
BSW INTF for RPS2 in 2x(N+1) CC 0.4 kg
HK (optional unit) 0.4 kg
ECU (optional unit) 0.9 kg
OCC INTF (optional unit) 0.3 kg
OPT INTF for BBIU shelf (optional unit) 1.5 kg
BBC for BBIU shelf (optional unit) 1.5 kg
MSP SW for BBIU shelf (optional unit) 0.5 kg
Branching Circulator 0.6 kg
Branching Filter 0.7 kg
SRT 1F
1.6 Environmental and EMC Specification
1.6.1 Environmental Conditions
1.6.1.1 Operating Conditions
Normal conditions: ETSI 300-019-1-3 Class 3.2

Temperature limits: -5 to 45 °C
Humidity limits: 5% to 95%
Maximum temperature limit: up to 50 °C
Altitude: Up to 4500 metres
Climatogram:
50
Absolute Air Humidity [g/m3]

40
Air Temperature ［℃］
30
29
20
10
-10
1
-20
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Relative Air Humidity [％]
Figure 1-52 - Climatogram for class 3.2: Partly temperature-controlled locations
SRT 1F
1.6.1.2 Transport and Storage
Transport The equipment meets the environmental

conditions standardized in ETSI 300-019-1-2
Class 2.3
Storage The equipment meets the environmental

conditions standardized in ETSI 300-019-1-1
Class 1.3
Climatogram:
50
40
30
25
Absolute Air Humidity [g/m3]

20
Air Temperature [℃]
10
-10
-20
-30
0.26
-40
-50
-60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Relative Air Humidity [％ ]
Figure 1-53 - Climatogram for class 1.3: Not weather-protected storage locations
1.6.1.3 Corrosion and External Agents
Corrosion: The equipment meets the environmental

conditions standardized in ETSI 300-019-1 Class
3.2
External Agents: The equipment meets the environmental

conditions standardized in IEC 60529 / EN 60529.
1.6.1.4 Waste
The system is compliant with European Union’s RoHS and WEEE
directives.
RoHS: Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous

Substances in electrical and electronic equipment
(EC 95)
WEEE: Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(EC 175)
SRT 1F
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Conditions
EMC parameters are in accordance with ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.5.1 and
EN 301 489-4 V1.3.1.
1.6.2.1 Emission
Emission is in accordance with ETSI EN 55022:
• Radiated Emission
Definition of the capability of the radio equipment to limit spurious

radiations from the enclosure.
Reference Document CISPR22

Limits Class ‘B’
Frequency range (MHz) Quasi-peak limits dB (μV/m)
30 ÷ 230 30
230 ÷ 1000 37
Limits valid at a measuring distance of 10 m.
• Conducted Emissions
Definition of the capability of the radio equipment to limit internal noise

from the DC power input ports.
- DC lines
Reference Document CISPR22

Limits Class ‘B’
Frequency range (MHz) Quasi-peak limits dB (μV/m) Average limits dB (μV/m)
0.15 ÷ 0.50 66 to 56 56 to 46
0.5 ÷ 5 56 46
5 ÷ 30 60 50
- AC lines Not Applicable
- Signal lines Not Applicable
SRT 1F
1.6.2.2 Immunity
• RF electromagnetic field (80-2000 MHz)
Definition of the radio equipment capability to operate with specified

performance conditions in presence of a radio frequency electromagnetic
field disturbance vs. the enclosure.
Reference Document EN 61000-4-3

Test Level 3 V/m
Performance No Error
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

performance conditions in the event of an electrostatic discharge.

Test Level
- contact discharge Level 2 (±4kV)
- Air discharge Level 3 (± 8kV)
• Fast transients common mode (burst)

performance conditions in case of fast transients on one of the input /
output ports.
- DC lines

Test Level Level 1 (0.5kV)
- AC lines Not applicable
- Signal and Control Lines

Test Level Level 1 (0.5kV)
SRT 1F
• Radio frequency common mode (0.15 - 80 MHz )

performance conditions in presence of a RF electromagnetic disturbance
on the input / output ports.
- DC lines

Test Level Clamp injection method level 2 (3Vrms)
- AC lines Not applicable
- Signal and Control Lines

Test Level Clamp injection method level 2 (3Vrms)
1.6.2.3 Safety
The equipment complies with EN 60950-1 second edition (2005-12).
SRT 1F
1.7 Power Supply
1.7.1 General
Nominal Voltage (V) -48 V

Feeding Voltage Tolerance (V) ± 20% (-36 to -72 V)
Power supply circuits of all the equipment have the provisioning as

follows:
• Over current protection (Secondary)
• Over voltage protection (Secondary)
• Surge protection (Primary) : Vp = 2 kV
• Rise and fall time (Vp/2) : tr = 1.2 μsec, tf = 50 μsec.
Power supply terminal for dual-feed 1:1 protected DC power supply
(system-X and system-Y) is located on SCS section (UIA block) and non-
fuse power breakers are located on each MSTU unit and in SCS section
(UIA block) for SV unit, TCU-X and TCU-Y units.
1.7.2 Power Supply Distribution
The system accepts the external supply coming from the batteries,
generating the required secondary voltages.
One Non-fuse power breaker per each MSTU Transceiver unit is
equipped.
One Non-fuse power breaker for SV MCF/Controller unit is equipped.
One Non-fuse power breaker per each TCU unit (TCU-X and TCU-Y) is
equipped.
A reference scheme is reported in Figure 1-54 and Figure 1-55 for K-shelf
configuration and Multi-shelf configuration, respectively.
In K-shelf configuration, all the system is fed with 1:1 redundancy through
2x10mmq bipolar shielded type cable and M8 lugs on PDU interface in
SCS section.
In Multi-shelf configuration, the SCSU shelf is fed with 1:1 redundancy
and the transceivers are independently fed with 1:N redundancy (in N+1
configuration). All the connectors are AMP type and cable is 2x1.5mmq
bipolar shielded type.
In 1+1 N.E. shelf, the system is fed with 1:1 redundancy through
2x1.5mmq bipolar shielded type cable and AMP type connectors in SCS
section.
If equipped, the optional BBIU shelf for OPT MSP application is
independently fed with 1:1 redundancy through 2x1.5mmq bipolar
shielded type cable and AMP type connectors.
SRT 1F
1.7.3 Secondary Voltages
+5V for BSW Electrical from Transceiver section.

+3.3V for BSW Optical from Transceiver section.
+5V for ECU and HK from MCF/Controller.
+5V for MSP SW from OPT INTF X and Y (redundancy) in case of OPT
MSP shelf equipped.
All bipolar switch circuits and OCC cards and BSW INTF card are
powered by transceiver unit on protection slot, so that the switching is
inhibited in case of failure of the transceiver unit on the protection slot.
1.7.4 Power Supply Efficiency
Electrical efficiency 80%
SRT 1F
-48V -48V
Protectio Main1 Main 7
...
D/ D/ D/
D D D
SCS
+5/+3.3
V
MCF/
BSW-Wn
BSW-W1
... Controller
ECU2
ECU1
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK2
HK1
D/
D
+5V
Figure 1-54 - Power Supply distribution scheme for K-shelf configuration
SRT 1F
-48V -48V -48V -48V -48V
Protectio Main1 Main 7
...
D/ D/ D/
D D D
SCS
+5/3.3V
MCF/
BSW-Wn
BSW-W1
... Controller
ECU2
ECU1
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK2
HK1
D/
D
+5V
Figure 1-55 - Power Supply distribution scheme for Multi-shelf configuration
SRT 1F
1.8 POWER CONSUMPTION
1.8.1 Transceiver Unit
The MSTU Transceiver Unit includes BB, MODEM, TX/RX and RX SD.
The power consumption of Transceiver Unit depends on the ATPC
setting.
ATPC can work in accordance with three modes:

• “ATPC off”: the TX power is fixed to nominal power
• “ATPC low”: the TX power is fixed to nominal power minus 10dB
• “ATPC on”: the TX power is linearly varying between nominal power
and nominal power minus 10dB
Nominal power is +29dBm for 4-8GHz NP, +32dBm for 4-8GHz HP,
+29dBm for 11GHz, +27dBm for 13GHz.
Typical and guaranteed values for Transceiver Unit power consumption

are reported in Table 1.24 for minimum and maximum consumption cases
relevant to “ATPC low” and “ATPC off” modes, respectively:
Table 1.24 - MSTU Power Consumption

Typical (W) Guaranteed (W)
Band HP/NP XPIC ATPC low ATPC off ATPC low ATPC off
NP N 73 98 90 110
(+29 dBm) Y 78 103 95 115
4-8 GHz
HP N 83 108 115 135
(+32 dBm) Y 88 113 120 140
N 83 108 115 135
11/13 GHz NP
Y 88 113 120 140
SRT 1F
1.8.2 Base Band Units
All the values reported in the Table 1.25 have a tolerance of ± 10%.
Table 1.25 - BaseBand Units Power Consumption

SV (MCF/controller) 16 W
TCU (Timing Control Unit) 10 W
BSW Electrical 2/9 1 W
BSW Optical 7/141 W
BSW INTF for RPS2 in 2x(N+1) CC 2W
HK (optional unit) 5W
ECU (optional unit) 6W
OCC INTF Electrical (optional unit) 1W
OCC INTF Optical (optional unit) 6W
OPT INTF 1+1N.E. (optional unit) 3W
OPT OCC 1+1N.E. (optional unit) 3W
OPT INTF for BBIU shelf (optional unit) 24 W
BBC for BBIU shelf (optional unit) 5W
MSP SW for BBIU shelf (optional unit) 0.5 W
1 Under working of protection channel
SRT 1F
1.9 Frequency Plan
1.9.1 General Information
Table 1.26 shows the ITU-R recommendations for the radio frequency
plan.
Table 1.26 - ITU-R Recommendations

Band Radio Frequency (MHz) Recommendation
U4 GHz band 3,803.5 – 4,203.5 ITU-R Recommendation F.382-8
4 GHz band 3,600 – 4,200 ITU-R Recommendation F.635-6 Annex-1
L6 GHz band 5,925 – 6,175 ITU-R Recommendation F.383-7
U6 GHz band 6,430 – 7,110 ITU-R Recommendation F.384-9
L7 GHz band 7,125 – 7,425 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-8 Annex-1
U7 GHz band 7,425 – 7,725 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-8
W7 GHz band 7,110 – 7,750 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-8 Annex-3
L8 GHz band 7,725 – 8,275 ITU-R Recommendation F.386-6
11 GHz band 10,700 – 11,700 ITU-R Recommendation F.387-10
13 GHz band 12,750 – 13,250 ITU-R Recommendation F.497-6
1.9.2 Frequency Plan
1.9.2.1 Upper 4 GHz band

• 3803.5 to 4203.5 MHz
• Center frequency 4003.5 MHz
• Guard band 21 MHz (Lower band and Upper band)
• Center gap 68 MHz
• 29 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation)
58 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation)
• 213 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
• 5+1 protection system for ACAP/ACCP operation
2x(5+1) protection system for CCDP operation
• Specified RF frequency is shown in Figure 1-56.
SRT 1F
1.9.2.1.1 4 GHz band

• 3600 to 4200 MHz
• Center frequency 3900 MHz
1.9.2.1.2 5 GHz band

• 4400 to 5000 MHz
1.9.2.1.3 Lower 6 GHz

• 5925 to 6425 MHz
• Guard band 20.2 MHz (Lower band) and 20.21 MHz (Upper band)
• Center gap 44.49 MHz
• 29.65 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation)
59.30 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation)
• 252.04 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
SRT 1F
1.9.2.1.4 Upper 6 GHz band

• 6430 to 7110 MHz
1.9.2.1.5 Lower 7 GHz band

• 7125 to 7425 MHz
• Guard band 10 MHz (Lower band) and 17 MHz (Upper band)
1.9.2.1.6 Upper 7 GHz band

• 7425 to 7725 MHz
SRT 1F
1.9.2.1.7 7 GHz band

• 7110 to 7750 MHz.
• Center frequency (lower part): 7275 MHz.
• Center frequency (upper part): 7597 MHz.
• Guard band (lower part): 11 MHz.
• Guard band (upper part): 13 MHz.
• Center gap (lower part): 84 MHz.
• Center gap (upper part): 56 MHz.
• 28 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation).
56 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation).
• 161 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing (lower part).
• 154 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing (upper part).
• 7+1 protection system for ACAP/ACCP operation.
2x(7+1) protection system for CCDP operation.
1.9.2.1.8 Lower 8 GHz band

• 7725 to 8275 MHz
• Guard band 22.7 MHz (Lower band) and 8.43 MHz (Upper band)
• Center gap 103.77 MHz
• 29.65 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation)
59.30 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation)
• 311.32 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
SRT 1F
1.9.2.1.9 11 GHz band

• 10700 to 11700 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.387-10)
1.9.2.1.10 11 GHz band

• 10700 to 11700 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 Annex-2)
1.9.2.1.11 13 GHz band

• 12750 to 13250 MHz
• Guard band 15 MHz (Lower band) and 23 MHz (Upper band)
SRT 1F
Figure 1-56 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-8)
Table 1.27 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-8)

RF CH RF FREQUENCY(MHz) LO FREQUENCY(MHz)
1 3824.5 2980.5
2 3853.5 3009.5
3 3882.5 3038.5
4 3911.5 3067.5
5 3940.5 3096.5
6 3969.5 3125.5
1' 4037.5 3193.5
2' 4066.5 3222.5
3' 4095.5 3251.5
4' 4124.5 3280.5
5' 4153.5 3309.5
6' 4182.5 3338.5
SRT 1F
Alternated operation
600 MHz
320 MHz
20 MHz 80 MHz 20 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’
V(H)
H(V)
80 MHz
40 MHz
Co-channel operation
600 MHz
320 MHz
20 MHz 80MHz 20 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 1x’ 2x’ 3x’ 4x’ 5x’ 6x’ 7x’
40 MHz
80 MHz
Figure 1-57 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-6)
Table 1.28 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-6)

1 3620.0 2776.0
2 3660.0 2816.0
3 3700.0 2856.0
4 3740.0 2896.0
5 3780.0 2936.0
6 3820.0 2976.0
7 3860.0 3016.0
1’ 3940.0 3096.0
2’ 3980.0 3136.0
3’ 4020.0 3176.0
4’ 4060.0 3216.0
5’ 4100.0 3256.0
6’ 4140.0 3296.0
7’ 4180.0 3336.0
SRT 1F
Figure 1-58 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099-3 Annex-1)

Table 1.29 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099-3 Annex-1)
1 4430.0 3586.0
2 4470.0 3626.0
3 4510.0 3666.0
4 4550.0 3706.0
5 4590.0 3746.0
6 4630.0 3786.0
7 4670.0 3826.0
1’ 4730.0 3886.0
2’ 4770.0 3926.0
3’ 4810.0 3966.0
4’ 4850.0 4006.0
5’ 4890.0 4046.0
6’ 4930.0 4086.0
7’ 4970.0 4126.0
SRT 1F
500 MHz
252.04 MHz
20.2 MHz 59.3 MHz 20.21 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’
8 8’
V(H)
H(V)
44.49 MHz
29.65 MHz
500 MHz
252.04 MHz
20.2 MHz 59.3 MHz 20.21 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’
8 8’
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 1x’ 2x’ 3x’ 4x’ 5x’ 6x’ 7x’

8 8 ’
29.65 MHz
44.49 MHz
Figure 1-59 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-7)

Table 1.30 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-7)
RF CH RF FREQUENCY (MHz) LO FREQUENCY (MHz)
1 5945.20 5101.20
2 5974.85 5130.85
3 6004.50 5160.50
4 6034.15 5190.15
5 6063.80 5219.80
6 6093.45 5249.45
7 6123.10 5279.10
8 6152.75 5308.75
1’ 6197.24 5353.24
2’ 6226.89 5382.89
3’ 6256.54 5412.54
4’ 6286.19 5442.19
5’ 6315.84 5471.84
6’ 6345.49 5501.49
7’ 6375.14 5531.14
8’ 6404.79 5560.79
SRT 1F
680 MHz
340 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’
8 8’
V(H)
H(V)
60 MHz
40 MHz
680 MHz
340 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’
8 8’
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 1x’ 2x’ 3x’ 4x’ 5x’ 6x’ 7x’

8 8 ’
40 MHz
60 MHz
Figure 1-60 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-9)
Table 1.31 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-9)

RF CH RF Frequency (MHz) LO Frequency MHz)
1 6460.0 5616.0
2 6500.0 5656.0
3 6540.0 5696.0
4 6580.0 5736.0
5 6620.0 5776.0
6 6660.0 5816.0
7 6700.0 5856.0
8 6740.0 5896.0
1’ 6800.0 5956.0
2’ 6840.0 5996.0
3’ 6880.0 6036.0
4’ 6920.0 6076.0
5’ 6960.0 6116.0
6’ 7000.0 6156.0
7’ 7040.0 6196.0
8’ 7080.0 6236.0
SRT 1F
300 MHz
161 MHz
10 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’
V(H)
H(V)
49 MHz
28 MHz
300 MHz
161 MHz
10 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 49 MHz 1x’ 2x’ 3x’ 4x’ 5x’
28 MHz

1 7135 6291
2 7163 6319
3 7191 6347
4 7219 6375
5 7247 6403
1’ 7296 6452
2’ 7324 6480
3’ 7352 6508
4’ 7380 6536
5’ 7408 6564
SRT 1F
300 MHz
154 MHz
17 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’
V(H)
H(V)
42 MHz
28 MHz
300 MHz
154 MHz
17 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 1x’ 2x’ 3x’ 4x’ 5x’

42 MHz
28 MHz
Figure 1-62 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-8)

Table 1.33 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-8)
1 7442 6598
2 7470 6626
3 7498 6654
4 7526 6682
5 7554 6710
1’ 7596 6752
2’ 7624 6780
3’ 7652 6808
4’ 7680 6836
5’ 7708 6864
SRT 1F
Funzionamento alternato
640 MHz
161 MHz 154 MHz
1l 2l 3l 4l 5l 1’l 2’l 3’l 4’l 5’l 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 1’h 2’h 3’h 4’h 5’h
V(H)
H(V)
84 MHz 56 MHz
28 MHz 28 MHz
Funzionamento co-canale
640 MHz
161 MHz 154 MHz
1l 2l 3l 4l 5l 1’l 2’l 3’l 4’l 5’l 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 1’h 2’h 3’h 4’h 5’h
V(H)
H(V)
1lx 2lx 3lx 4lx 5lx 1’lx 2’lx 3’lx 4’lx 5’lx 1hx 2hx 3hx 4hx 5hx 1’hx 2’hx 3’hx 4’hx 5’hx
84 MHz 56 MHz
28 MHz 28 MHz
Figure 1-63 - W7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-8 Annex 3)
Table 1.34 - W7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-8 Annex 3)
RF RF LO RF RF LO
CH FREQUENCY FREQUENCY CH FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
1l 7121 6277 1h 7457 6613
2l 7149 6305 2h 7485 6641
3l 7177 6333 3h 7513 6669
4l 7205 6361 4h 7541 6697
5l 7233 6389 5h 7569 6725
1’l 7317 6473 1’h 7625 6781
2’l 7345 6501 2’h 7653 6809
3’l 7373 6529 3’h 7681 6837
4’l 7401 6557 4’h 7709 6865
5’l 7429 6585 5’h 7737 6893
SRT 1F

1 7747.70 6903.70
2 7777.35 6933.35
3 7807.00 6963.00
4 7836.65 6992.65
5 7866.30 7022.30
6 7895.95 7051.95
7 7925.60 7081.60
8 7955.25 7111.25
1’ 8059.02 7215.02
2’ 8088.67 7244.67
3’ 8118.32 7274.32
4’ 8147.97 7303.97
5’ 8177.62 7333.62
6’ 8207.27 7363.27
7’ 8236.92 7392.92
8’ 8266.57 7422.57
SRT 1F
1000 MHz
530 MHz
15 MHz 80 MHz 15MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 10’ 11’ 12’
V(H)
H(V)
90 MHz
40 MHz
1000 MHz
530 MHz
15 MHz 80 MHz 15MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 10’ 11’ 12’
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x 1x’ 2x’ 3x’ 4x’ 10x’ 11x’ 12x’
40 MHz
90 MHz
Figure 1-65 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10)

Table 1.36 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10)
1 10715.0 9871.0
2 10755.0 9911.0
3 10795.0 9951.0
4 10835.0 9991.0
5 10875.0 10031.0
6 10915.0 10071.0
7 10955.0 10111.0
8 10995.0 10151.0
9 11035.0 10191.0
10 11075.0 10231.0
11 11115.0 10271.0
12 11155.0 10311.0
SRT 1F
Table 1.36- 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10) (Continued)

1’ 11245.0 10401.0
2’ 11285.0 10441.0
3’ 11325.0 10481.0
4’ 11365.0 10521.0
5’ 11405.0 10561.0
6’ 11445.0 10601.0
7’ 11485.0 10641.0
8’ 11525.0 10681.0
9’ 11565.0 10721.0
10’ 11605.0 10761.0
11’ 11645.0 10801.0
12’ 11685.0 10841.0
SRT 1F
1000 MHz
490 MHz
35 MHz 80 MHz 35MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 10’ 11’ 12’
V(H)
H(V)
50 MHz
40 MHz
1000 MHz
490 MHz
35 MHz 80 MHz 35MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 10’ 11’ 12’
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x 1x’ 2x’ 3x’ 4x’ 10x’ 11x’ 12x’
40 MHz
50 MHz
Figure 1-66 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10 Annex-2)

Table 1.37 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10 Annex-2)
1 10735.0 9891.0
2 10775.0 9931.0
3 10815.0 9971.0
4 10855.0 10011.0
5 10895.0 10051.0
6 10935.0 10091.0
7 10975.0 10131.0
8 11015.0 10171.0
9 11055.0 10211.0
10 11095.0 10251.0
11 11135.0 10291.0
12 11175.0 10331.0
SRT 1F
Table 1.37- 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10 Annex-2) (Continued)
RF CH RF LO
FREQUENCY(MHz) FREQUENCY(MHz)
1’ 11225.0 10381.0
2’ 11265.0 10421.0
3’ 11305.0 10461.0
4’ 11345.0 10501.0
5’ 11385.0 10541.0
6’ 11425.0 10581.0
7’ 11465.0 10621.0
8’ 11505.0 10661.0
9’ 11545.0 10701.0
10’ 11585.0 10741.0
11’ 11625.0 10781.0
12’ 11665.0 10821.0
SRT 1F
500MHz
266 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’ 8’
V(H)
H(V)
70 MHz
28 MHz
500MHz
266 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’ 8’
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x 1x’ 2x’ 3x’ 4x’ 5x’ 6x’ 7x’ 8x’
70 MHz
28 MHz
Figure 1-67 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-6)

Table 1.38 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-6)
1 12765 11921
2 12793 11949
3 12821 11977
4 12849 12005
5 12877 12033
6 12905 12061
7 12933 12089
8 12961 12117
1’ 13031 12187
2’ 13059 12215
3’ 13087 12243
4’ 13115 12271
5’ 13143 12299
6’ 13171 12327
7’ 13199 12355
8’ 13227 12383
SRT 1F
1.10 Antenna System

A common antenna system is used to transmit and receive. In this case
two (2) antennas per hop are used without space diversity and four (4)
antennas per hop are used with space diversity.
Single-feed antenna is used in case of single-polarized channelling is
adopted and expansibility to use of both polarizations is not required. In
this case, one RF waveguide feeder per antenna is required.
Dual-feed antenna is used for both vertical (V) and horizontal (H)
polarization in case of operation at both polarizations. Dual-fed antenna
may be used also in the case where single-polarized channelling is
adopted, but expansibility to double polarization operation is required.
Two feeders are needed per antenna for the use of V and H polarization.
SRT 1F
1.11 RF Branching Network

The typical arrangement of loss-equalized RF branching network used by
SRT1F K-shelf and Multi-shelf for N+1 single-feed operation, N+1
alternate operation and 2x(N+1) co-channel operation are shown in
Figure 1-68 to Figure 1-73.
As shown in the RF Branching Network pictures, Band Elimination Filter
(BEF) may be required in order to guarantee necessary TX/RX separation
between innermost channels, in case they are used inside the same
antenna branching.
Table 1.39 shows the cases for which the use of BEF is recommended by
Nokia Siemens Networks in order to match ETSI requirements about
innermost channels separation. Different use of BEF is recommended
depending on the fact that the innermost channels are used at the same
polarization, or the innermost channels are cross-polarized. It is due to
better separation provided by H/V isolation of double polarization antenna
(assumed 35 dB), with respect of TX/RX separation provided by main
antenna circulator (TX/RX DUP) in case of co-polar innermost channels
(25 dB). Insertion loss of each BEF filter is typically 0.7 dB.
Table 1.39 - Use of BEF for Innermost Channels Separation

Nr. of BEF Nr. of BEF
Innermost innermost co- innermost Innermost
RF Band polar cross-polar
RF spacing channels
RX TX RX TX
U4 GHz 68 MHz 1 1 0 0 CH6-CH1'
4 GHz 80 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH7-CH1'
5 GHz 60 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH7-CH1'
L6 GHz 44.49 MHz 1 2 0 2 CH8-CH1'
U6 GHz 60 MHz 1 2 0 2 CH8-CH1'
L7 GHz 49 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH5-CH1'
U7 GHz 42 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH5-CH1'
L8 GHz 103.77 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH8-CH1'
11 GHz 90 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH12-CH1'
11 GHz Annex-2 50 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH12-CH1'
13 GHz 70 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH8-CH1'
SRT 1F
V(H)
C/W Main
Antenna
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1 CH8’ CH6’ CH7’ CH5’

BEF
Receive side
Transmit side
CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5 CH4’ CH2’ CH3’ CH1’
Transmit side Receive side
Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter

BEF: Band Elimination Filter
C/W: Coaxial/Waveguide adapter
CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-68 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation (Main Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
V(H)
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR C/W SD
Antenna
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP
RX SD ADPT
CH5’ CH7’ CH6’ CH8’

BEF
SD Receive side
SD Receive side

CIR: Circulator
ADPT: Adapter
Figure 1-69 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation (Space Diversity Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
H(V)
C/W Main
Antenna
V(H)
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP
BEF
C/W
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP TX/RX DUP BP BP BP BP
CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1 Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter BEF
Transmit side BEF: Band Elimination Filter

C/W: Coaxial/Waveguide adapter CH7’ CH5’ CH3’ CH1’
CIR: Circulator Receive side

DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-70 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation (Main Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
H(V)
CIR CIR CIR C/W SD
Antenna
V(H)
BP BP BP BP RX SD ADPT
SD Receive side
CIR CIR CIR C/W
BP BP BP BP RX SD ADPT
BEF Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter

CIR: Circulator
SD Receive side ADPT: Adaptor
Figure 1-71 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation (Space Diversity Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
H(V)
C/W Main
Antenna
V(H)
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1 CH8’ CH6’ CH7’ CH5’

BEF
Receive side
Transmit side
C/W
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH4x CH2x CH3x CH1x CH8x’ CH6x’ CH7x’ CH5x’

BEF

CH8 CH6x CH7x CH5x CH4x’ CH2x’ CH3x’ CH1x’
x Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter
CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-72 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation (Main Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
H(V)
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR C/W SD
Antenna
V(H)
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP RX SD ADPT
BEF
CH1’ CH3’ CH2’ CH4’ CH5’ CH7’ CH6’ CH8’
SD Receive side SD Receive side
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR C/W
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP RX SD ADPT

BEF
CH1x’ CH3x’ CH2x’ CH4x’ CH5x’ CH7x’ CH6x’ CH8x’
CIR: Circulator
SD Receive side SD Receive side ADPT: Adaptor
Figure 1-73 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation (Space Diversity Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
V(H)
C/W Antenna
#1
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP

BEF
Receive side
Transmit side
Receive side

CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-74 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #1 Part)
SRT 1F
V(H)
C/W Antenna
#2
TX/RX DUP
CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2 CH8’ CH6’ CH7’ CH5’ BEF
SD Receive side
Transmit side
SD Receive side

CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-75 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #2 Part)
SRT 1F
H(V)
C/W Antenna
#1
V(H)
CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP
CH4 CH2 CH8’ CH6’ CH4’ CH2’
C/W
CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP TX/RX DUP BP BP BP BP
CH3 CH1 Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter BEF

CIR: Circulator Receive side

DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-76 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #1 Part)
SRT 1F
H(V)
C/W Antenna
#2
V(H)
CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP
CH8 CH6 CH8’ CH6’ CH4’ CH2’
Transmit side SD Receive side
C/W
CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP TX/RX DUP BP BP BP BP
CH7 CH5 Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter BEF

CIR: Circulator SD Receive side

DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-77 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #2 Part)
SRT 1F
H(V)
C/W Antenna
#1
V(H)
TX/RX DUP

BEF
Receive side
Transmit side
Receive side
C/W
TX/RX DUP
CH7x CH5x CH3x CH1x CH8x’ CH6x’ CH7x’ CH5x’

BEF

CH4x’ CH2x’ CH3x’ CH1x’
Receive side
CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-78 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #1
Part)
SRT 1F
H(V)
C/W Antenna
#2
V(H)
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH8’ CH6’ CH7’ CH5’

BEF
SD Receive side
C/W
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH8x’ CH6x’ CH7x’ CH5x’

BEF
SD Receive side
CH8 CH6x CH4x CH2x CH4x’ CH2x’ CH3x’ CH1x’
x Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter
CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-79 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #2
Part)
SRT 1F
A different discussion shall be made for SRT1F 1+1 N.E. model. From
physical restriction, basically, the compact shelf for 1+1 N.E. can equip
maximum three (3) filter bodies, each one including a pair of two
frequency channels. Figure 1-80 shows BRU configuration in case of AP
single-polarized channels. In this case the branching philosophy is the
same as K-shelf and Multi-shelf models. Figure 1-81 and Figure 1-82
show BRU configuration in case of dual-polarized channels, AP or CC. In
this case, the branching philosophy is different, since TX and RX side of
the same channel are coupled in the same filter before being forwarded to
the antenna port.
Assumed: Prot = CH1 (V) / M1 = CH3 (V)

Non-SD model SD model
R T DUP TRD SD R T DUP
(V) (V) (V)
1’ 1 1’ 1’ 1
(V) (V) (V) (V) (V)
C C C C C
3’ 3 3’ 3’ 3
(V) (V) (V) (V) (V)
R T SD R T
Figure 1-80 - 1+1 N.E. AP Single Polarization
Assumed: Prot = CH1 (V) / M1 = CH3 (H)

DUP T T DUP DUP SD T T DUP
(H) (V) (H) (V)
3’
3 1 (H) 3 1
(H) (V) (H) (V)
C
C C C C
C
3’ 1’ 3’ 1’
(H) (V) 1’ (H) (V)
TRD (V) TRD
(H) (V)
R R SD R R
Figure 1-81 - 1+1 N.E. AP Double Polarization
SRT 1F
Assumed: Prot = CH1 (V) / M1 = CH1 (H)

DUP T T DUP DUP SD T T DUP
(H) (V) (H) (V)
1’
1 1 (H) 1 1
(H) (V) (H) (V)
C
C C C C
C
1’ 1’ 1’ 1’
(H) (V) 1’ (H) (V)
TRD (V) TRD
(H) (V)
R R SD R R
Figure 1-82 - 1+1 N.E. CC Double Polarization
SRT 1F
1.11.1 Loss Equalized RF Branching Network
Insertion loss of RF branching network is specified using loss equalized

RF branching network configuration model as defined by Radio Building
Blocks (ETSI standard).
Please refer to Figure 1-83 and Figure 1-84 for equalized loss branching
block diagram of the system for configurations 1+1 and 3+1, respectively.
Equalized loss branching block diagrams for other configurations follow
same criterion. Besides the ETSI standard points A/A’, B/B’ and C/C’,
even points α/α’ and β/β’ have been indicated for reference.
Antenna Port
ref. C/C’
DU
P
ref. β' ref. β
DL CI ref. B' D CI ref. B
ref. α' BPFR BPF L BPFR BPF
ref. α
adpt adpt adpt adpt

ref. ref.
A' A
MST MST MST MST

U U U U
M PROT PROT M
1
Transmit Side Receive1
Side
MSTU: Transceiver Unit

adpt: MSTU adaptor
BPF: Band Pass Filter
CIR: channel circulator
DUP: TX/RX antenna circulator
DL: Dummy load (termination)
Figure 1-83 - Loss equalized RF branching network for 1+1 protection system
SRT 1F
Antenna Port
ref. C/C’
DU
P
ref. β' ref. β
DL CI CI D CI CI ref. B
ref. B'
R
BPF BPF BPFR BPF L BPFR BPF BPFR BPF
ref. α' ref. α
adpt adpt adpt adpt adpt adpt adpt adpt

ref. A' ref.
A
MST MST MST MST MST MST MST MST

U U U U U U U U
M M2 M PROT PROT M M M
3 1 1 2 3
Transmit Side Receive
Side
MSTU: Transceiver Unit

adpt: MSTU adaptor
BPF: Band Pass Filter
CIR: channel circulator
DUP: TX/RX antenna circulator
DL: Dummy load (termination)
Figure 1-84 - Loss equalized RF branching network for 3+1 protection system
SRT 1F
1.11.2 Channel Filter Insertion loss
This paragraph provides insertion loss information in order to calculate

system performances parameters at point B-B’ starting from system
performances parameters at point A-A’.
The following table shows the calculation of TX loss between points A’
and B’, obtained as sum between the MSTU adapter loss (TX side) and
filter insertion loss.
4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
MSTU adaptor TX loss (A’-α’) 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.80
BPF Filter Insertion loss (α’-B’) 0.60 0.80 0.90 0.85 0.90 1.25 1.20 1.15 1.20 1.50
TX Loss (A’-B’) 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.3
The following table shows the calculation of RX loss between points A

and B, obtained as sum between the MSTU adapter loss (RX side) and
filter insertion loss.
4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
MSTU adaptor RX loss (A-α) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.55 0.70 0.65 0.70 0.85 0.80 1.00
BPF Filter Insertion loss (α-B) 0.60 0.80 0.90 0.85 0.90 1.25 1.20 1.15 1.20 1.50
RX Loss (A-B) 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.9 1.9 2.0 2.0 2.5
The following table shows CIR channel circulator loss, useful to calculate
the power level at point B/B’ starting from monitoring point β/β’.
4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
CIR channel circulator loss (B’-β’) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
CIR channel circulator loss (B-β) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
SRT 1F
1.11.3 Branching losses
This paragraph provides information about total branching loss (Tx + Rx)
calculated from points A and A’ including antenna circulators.
Total Branching Loss =
= Transmit side loss (Reference A’ - Reference B’ - Reference C’) +
+ Receive side loss (Reference B - Reference A - Reference C)
Branching loss calculation is based on the loss equalized RF branching
network model in accordance with Figure 1-83 and Figure 1-84. In case
that not loss equalized RF branching network or not Nokia Siemens
Networks recommended RF channel allocation rule is applied, insertion
loss should be calculated individually.
In case of use of innermost RF channels, BEF should be added for the
innermost RF channels, according to Table 1.39. In this case, the
insertion loss for the innermost RF channels shall be increased by BEF
loss (0.7 dB per each BEF filter).
SRT 1F
1.11.3.1 Branching losses in K-shelf configuration

K-shelf branching losses depend on the maximum number of channels in
the same polarization. In Table 1.40 Np is the maximum number of
channels in the same polarization.
Table 1.40 - K-shelf Branching Losses

Np 4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
1 4.3 4.7 5.0 5.4 5.6 6.7 6.8 6.8 7.6 8.9
2 4.3 4.7 5.0 5.4 5.6 6.7 6.8 6.8 7.6 8.9
3 5.5 5.9 6.1 6.5 6.8 7.9 7.9 8.0 8.8 10.1
4 5.5 5.9 6.1 6.5 6.8 7.9 7.9 8.0 8.8 10.1
5 6.2 6.6 6.9 7.2 7.5 8.7 8.5 8.8 9.8 10.9
6 6.2 7.4 6.9 7.2 7.5 - - 8.8 9.8 10.9
7 7.2 - 7.6 8.2 8.5 - - 9.8 10.5 11.8
8 - - - 8.2 8.5 - - 9.8 10.5 11.8
1.11.3.2 Branching losses in Multi-shelf configuration

Table 1.41 shows the Multi-shelf branching losses in case of channel use
according to AP channel arrangement.
Table 1.42 shows the Multi-shelf branching losses in case of channel use
according to CC channel arrangement.
Table 1.41 - Multi-shelf Branching Losses for AP standard
4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
1+0 4.7 5.1 5.5 6.1 6.2 7.4 7.9 8.0 8.4 9.4
1+1 4.7 5.1 5.5 6.1 6.2 7.4 7.9 8.0 8.4 9.4
2+1 5.3 5.7 6.1 6.7 6.8 8.0 8.5 8.6 9.0 10.0
3+1 5.7 6.1 6.6 7.1 7.2 8.5 9.1 9.2 9.3 10.7
4+1 5.7 6.1 6.6 7.1 7.2 8.5 9.1 9.2 9.3 10.7
5+1 5.7 6.1 6.6 7.1 7.2 - - 9.2 9.3 10.7
6+1 5.8 - 6.6 7.2 7.4 - - 9.4 9.3 10.8
7+1 - - - 7.2 7.4 - - 9.4 9.3 10.8
Table 1.42 - Multi-shelf Branching Losses for CC standard

4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
1+0 4.7 5.1 5.6 6.1 6.2 7.4 7.9 8.0 8.2 -
1+1 4.7 5.1 5.6 6.1 6.2 7.4 7.9 8.0 8.2 -
2+1 5.7 6.1 6.6 7.1 7.2 8.4 8.9 9.0 9.2 -
3+1 6.2 6.6 7.1 7.6 7.7 8.9 9.4 9.6 9.6 -
4+1 7.2 7.6 8.1 8.6 8.7 9.9 10.4 10.6 10.6 -
5+1 7.2 7.6 8.1 8.6 8.7 - - 10.6 10.6 -
6+1 8.2 - 9.1 9.6 9.7 - - 11.6 11.6 -
7+1 - - - 11.9 12.5 - - 11.9 11.9 -
SRT 1F
1.11.3.3 Branching losses in 1+1 Not Expansible

Table 1.43 shows the branching losses in case of 1+1 N.E. model.
Table 1.43 -1+1 N.E. Branching Losses

4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
1+0
1+1 4.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 4.9 6.0 6.0 6.5 6.8 8.4
2+0
SRT 1F
SRT 1F
UMN 2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Equipment Configurations and Features
2.1.1 System
The SRT 1F radio equipment is designed to transmit STM-1 (155.520

Mb/s) signals. The SRT is equipped with N+1 Radio Protection System
(RPS).
housed in one rack
housed in one rack
The available configurations can be grouped into 6 classes. The following
diagram shows such classification. All the configurations are available at
all bands, with or without Space Diversity, with HP (High Power) or NP
(Normal Power) transceivers (where applicable).
All the below configurations are available as ACAP, ACCP and CCDP.
The configurations N+0 and 2x(N+0) can be considered as particular
cases of the N+1 and 2x(N+1) reported below.
Table 2.1 - Classification of available configurations for SRT 1F

Version Interface
Multi-shelf
Electrical
with MSP
w/o MSP
1+1 N.E.
K-shelf
Optical
Optical
Ref. Configuration Description
Figure 1-4 N+1 Terminal (N < 8) x x x x x

Figure 1-5 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack x x x
Figure 1-6 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack x x x
Figure 1-7 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks (*) x x x x x
Figure 1-9 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack x x x x
and
Figure 1-10
Figure 1-11 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) x x x
(*) also mixed configuration with one rack K-shelf and one rack Multi-shelf is possible, useful for
expansion of existing N+1 Multi-shelf terminal to 2x(N+1) by using K-shelf in the slave rack.
SRT 1F
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION UMN
SRT 1F Multi-shelf model is composed by the following parts/shelves:

• BRU: Branching Network Unit with RF filters, circulators and a
duplexer for RF combining/branching and interface to/from the
antenna system.
• MSTU: Main Signal Transmission Unit with Transmitter (TX),
Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1
Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions.
• SCSU: Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit with Supervisory (SV),
Bipolar Switch (BSW), Timing Control (TCU), Embedded
Communication (ECU) and Housekeeping (HK) functions.
• BBIU (optional): Base-Band Interface Unit with Baseband Interface
for STM-1 Optical. Multiplex Section Protection Switches (MSPSW)
are also housed in this unit. The BBIU is optional shelf to be equipped
in case of need of Multiplex Section Protection (MSP).
SRT 1F K-shelf model is composed by the following parts/shelves:
• K-shelf up to 7+1: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU section,
SCS section, User Interface Area (UIA) in a single compact shelf,
1155mm high. It can be used in conjunction with MCF/Controller card
for single RPS protection, for N+1 terminal in one rack, N<8. Or in
conjunction with MCF/Controller card for double RPS protection, for
2x(N+1) single terminal in two racks, N<8.
• K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU
section, SCS section, User Interface Area (UIA) in a single compact
shelf, 1155mm high. It can be used in conjunction with MCF/Controller
card for double RPS protection, for 2x(N+1) single terminal in one
rack, N<4.
• Expansion K-shelf: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU section,
SCS section, User Interface Area (UIA) in a single compact shelf,
930mm high. It can be used in conjunction with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1)
ST, for 2x(N+1) single terminal in one rack, 3<N<8.
• K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU
section, SCS section, User Interface Area (UIA) in a single compact
shelf, 1155mm high. It can be used in conjunction with up to two
MCF/Controller cards for single RPS protection, for 2x(N+1) double
terminal in one rack, N<4.
• BBIU (optional): Base-Band Interface Unit with Baseband Interface
for STM-1 Optical. Multiplex Section Protection Switches (MSPSW)
are also housed in this unit. The BBIU is optional shelf to be equipped
in case of need of Multiplex Section Protection (MSP). It is not
applicable in case of K-shelves up to 2x(3+1).
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model is composed by the following parts:
• SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. shelf: includes all the functional blocks installed in a
single shelf, 503mm high (588mm including BRU C/W adapters).
Please refer to Chapter 1 for standard equipment rack and shelf layout of
SRT 1F system.
SRT 1F
2.1.2 Alternated and Co-channel Operation
The SRT 1F can provide frequency allocation as follows:

• Alternated operation:
An STM-1 signal is transmitted by an RF frequency using an only
polarization. Even channels and odd channels shall use opposite
polarization
• Co-channel operation:
Up to two STM-1 signals can be transmitted simultaneously by an RF
frequency using dual polarization (CCDP), thus doubling the spectrum
efficiency. The transmission capacity of Way side and User channel
will be doubled through CCDP operation.
2.1.3 Baseband Interface
2.1.3.1 K-shelf and Multi-shelf

Three types of baseband interface are available for SRT 1F K-shelf and
Multi-shelf:
• SE INTF (BSW Electrical): STM-1 Electrical Interface by means of
BSW Electrical is the standard interface for SRT 1F system. The SRT
1F system with SE INTF is composed of BRU, MSTU and SCSU
sections. Figure 2-1 shows the block diagram.
• OPT INTF without MSP (BSW Optical): STM-1 Optical Interface
without optical line protection (MSP) can be provided by equipping
BSW Optical with proper SFP module (S-1.1 or L-1.1) in alternative to
BSW Electrical. Also mixed equipping of BSW Electrical and BSW
Optical in the same terminal is possible. The SRT 1F system with
OPT INTF (without MSP) is composed of BRU, MSTU and SCSU
sections. Figure 2-1 shows the block diagram.
• OPT INTF with MSP (OPT INTF in BBIU shelf): STM-1 Optical
Interface with optical line protection (MSP) can be provided by
equipping optional BBIU shelf. The SRT 1F system with OPT INTF
with MSP is composed of BRU, MSTU, SCSU and BBIU sections.
Figure 2-2 shows the block diagram. It is also possible to equip the
BBIU partly in such a way to have a system without MSP, but ready
for upgrade to MSP protection. The block diagram is reported in
Figure 2-3.
The following optional cards are available for Occasional Traffic interface:
• Occasional Interface Electrical (OCC)
• Occasional Interface Optical (OPT OCC)
SRT 1F
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF

STM-1
Prot CH CMI
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
STM-1
Electrical
MSTU
or
Optical
Main 1 STM- BSW TDP USW MOD TX BPF
1 CMI Electrical
or
Optical RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU

1 CMI Electrical
or
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU

1 CMI Electrical
or
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU
BRU
UCF1
WS R,S
to/from Main N STM- STM-1 Unipolar

1 CMI
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2) NOTE :
Q interface
Housekeeping DI BRU : Branching Network Unit
DO MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit
SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU
Figure 2-1 - Block Diagram of SRT 1F Terminal without SD in case of STM-1 Interface
Electrical or Optical without MSP
SRT 1F
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF
Prot CH STM-1
CMI
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
STM-1
Optical MSTU
OPT
X STM-1 CMI TDP USW MOD TX BPF
INTF BSW
MSP
Main 1
SW Electrical
OPT RDP USW DEM RX BPF
Y INTF
MSTU
WS R,S
UC(F1)
OPT
INTF BSW
MSP
Main 2
SW Electrical
Y INTF
MSTU
WS R,S
UC(F1)
OPT
INTF BSW
MSP
Main 3
SW Electrical
Y INTF
WS R,S
MSTU
UC(F1) BBIU
BRU
UCF1
WS R,S

1 CMI
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
Q interface
BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU
Figure 2-2 - Block Diagram of SRT 1F Terminal without SD in case of STM-1 Interface Optical
with MSP by means of optional BBIU shef
SRT 1F
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF
Prot CH STM-1
CMI
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
STM-1
Optical MSTU
OPT
STM-1 CMI TDP USW MOD TX BPF
INTF BSW
Main 1 MSP
SW Electrical
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
UC(F1)
MSTU
WS R,S
OPT
INTF BSW
MSP
Main 2
SW Electrical
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
UC(F1)
MSTU
WS R,S
OPT
INTF BSW
MSP
Main 3
SW Electrical
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
UC(F1)
WS R,S
MSTU
BBIU
BRU
UCF1
WS R,S

1 CMI
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
Q interface
BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU
Figure 2-3 - Block Diagram of SRT 1F Terminal without SD in case of STM-1 Interface Optical
ready for upgrade to MSP redundancy by means of optional BBIU shef
SRT 1F
2.1.3.2 1+1 N.E. model

Two types of baseband interface are available for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E.:
• SE INTF (BSW Electrical): STM-1 Electrical Interface by means of
BSW Electrical is the standard interface for SRT 1F system. The BSW
Electrical is the same card as K-shelf and Multi-shelf models. Figure
2-4 shows the block diagram.
• OPT INTF without MSP (OPT CONV, Optical Interface Converter):
STM-1 Optical Interface without optical line protection (MSP) can be
provided by equipping proper OPT CONV card in conjunction with
BSW Electrical. OPT CONV is an optional card dedicated for use with
1+1 N.E. model which acts as a media converter of the STM-1 signal
interface from Electrical to Optical and vice-versa. Figure 2-5 shows
the block diagram.
The following optional cards are available for Occasional Traffic interface:
• Occasional Interface Electrical (OCC), same card as K-shelf and
Multi-shelf systems
• Occasional Interface Optical for 1+1 N.E. (OCC O), card dedicated
for use with 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF
Prot STM-1 CMI

CH RDP USW DEM RX BPF
STM-1
Electrical MSTU
Main 1 TDP USW MOD TX BPF

STM-1 BSW
CMI Electrical RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU
BRU
RUC 1,2 NOTE :

EOW 2W (E1,E2)
BRU : Branching Network Unit
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
Q interface MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
Figure 2-4 - Block Diagram of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Terminal single polarization without SD in
case of STM-1 Electrical Interface
SRT 1F
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF
Prot STM-1 CMI

STM-1 CH RDP USW DEM RX BPF
Optical
MSTU
STM-1
Main 1 TDP USW MOD TX BPF
OPT CMI BSW
CONV Electrical
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU
BRU
RUC 1,2 NOTE :

EOW 2W (E1,E2) BRU : Branching Network Unit
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
Q interface MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
Figure 2-5 - Block Diagram of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Terminal single polarization without SD in
case of STM-1 Optical Interface
SRT 1F
2.1.4 STM-1 Signal Transmission
Reference shall be made to block diagrams from Figure 2-1 to Figure 2-5.
2.1.4.1 STM-1 Signal Interface
SCSU
The STM-1 Electrical signal input/output terminals are located on the
BSW (Bipolar Switch) Electrical front panel on the SCSU (Supervisory,
Control & Switching Unit).
The STM-1 Optical signal input/output terminals are located on the BSW
(Bipolar Switch) Optical front panel on the SCSU (Supervisory, Control &
Switching Unit).
BBIU
In case of use of optional BBIU shelf to implement optical interface with
MSP, the STM-1 Optical signal input/output terminals are located on the
front panel of the OPT INTF unit of BBIU (Baseband interface unit). The
Optical STM-1 is converted to the STM-1 CMI signal and sent to the BSW
Electrical unit of the SCSU via the MSP Switch unit on BBIU.
2.1.4.2 Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function)

The MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) is composed of Transmitter
(TX), Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1
Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions. The Unipolar Switch (USW) for
the Radio Protection System (RPS) is also a part of the MSTU.
SE INTF
The STM-1 CMI signal inputs from the BSW unit of SCSU. The incoming
STM-1 CMI signal is converted into eight (8) streams of unipolar
19.440Mbps data, which are applied to the Transmit Data Processing
(TDP) circuit.
TDP
The TDP circuit processes drop/insert the Multiplex Section Overhead
(MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) to be terminated
from the STM-1 data. The AU-Pointer is also re-written. A Unipolar Switch
(USW) provides hitless switching for the Radio Protection System. After
the USW, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is
applied to the incoming STM-1 signal to compose the Radio Frame. The
RFCOH is composed of Radio Frame Alignment, Wayside, Radio User
Channel, RPS Control, Redundancy bit for MLCM and other signals.
Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) is provided to perform forward
error correction on the data to transmit across the radio section.
SRT 1F
QAM MOD Module

The Radio Frame inputs the QAM Modulator Module (QAM MOD
Module). The QAM MOD Module is composed of a spectrum shaping
device and a Modulator controller (MOD), the Digital to Analog converter
(D/A) and the Quadrature Amplitude Modulator (QAM) to generate the
QAM signal. The QAM MOD Module output is applied to the Transmit IF
(TIF) circuit.
TIF
The incoming QAM signal is converted to the 1st IF (70MHz) signal. The
1st IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then applied to the
Linearizer (LNZ). The LNZ works to compensate the distortion which is
caused by the non-linearity of the RF transmit circuit. The 1st IF signal is
converted to the 2nd IF (844MHz) signal, then applied to the Transmit RF
Module (TRF Module).
TRF Module
The TRF accepts the 2nd IF and converts it to the Radio Frequency (RF)
by mixing it with the signal coming from the Local Oscillator Module (LO
Module). The RF signal is amplified through RF amplifiers. The MSTU
output level is +29 dBm (+ 27 dBm for 13 GHz). It is controlled by the
Automatic Level Control (ALC) which keeps it constant against input
signal level, amplifier gain and other ambient factor variations. High
power version transmitting +32dBm is available from 4 GHz to 8 GHz.
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) can automatically control the
MSTU output power between PtxMAX and PtxMIN = PtxMAX – 10 dB based
on the propagation loss across the radio section. The ATPC automatically
changes the MSTU output level back to HIGH when the RX receiving
level becomes lower than the specified level. ATPC is an option setting
through the LCT. This function is provided to save the power drained by
the MSTU and improve possible interference on adjacent frequency
channels and opposite polarization. ATPC function may be disabled. In
this case, the output power may be fixed to PtxMAX (ATPC OFF) or to
PtxMIN (ATPC LOW) without taking care of the propagation conditions.
The MSTU output is applied to the Branching Network Unit (BRU), then to
the antenna. The spurious emission of the transmitter is suppressed by
the BRU’s Band-Pass Filter (BPF) and by the Band Elimination Filter
(BEF) for Innermost channels separation, if required.
LO Module
The LO Module is a phase-locked loop oscillator circuit supplying the RF
Local signals to the Transmitter and Receiver. The oscillation frequency
setting is based on MSTU operation frequency.
SRT 1F
RRF Module
The Receive RF Module (RRF Module) accepts the received RF signal
from the antenna through BRU. Receiver selectivity is determined by the
BRU’s BPF and by BEF, if required.
The received RF signal (standard level : - 35 dBm, AGC dynamic range:
- 17 dBm to - 70s dBm) is amplified by a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), then
converted to the 2nd IF (844MHz). The 2nd IF signal is amplified and
applied to the Receive IF (RIF) circuit.
RIF
The 2nd IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then converted to the
1st IF (70MHz). The 1st IF signal is applied to the DEM circuit. The Rx
amplifiers are Automatically Gain Controlled (AGC) to maintain the 1st IF
output level constant against large variations of the RF Rx level at the
MSTU input.
AGC current of Main 1 channel can be monitored through proper
connector on the backplane of SCSU section for testing and maintenance
service.
The Mixer (MIX) converts the 1st IF signal down to the QAM signal and
applies it to the QAM Demodulator Modulate (QAM DEM Module).
QAM DEM Module

The QAM DEM Module is composed of the QAM demodulator, the Analog
to Digital converter (A/D), the Demodulator controller (DEM), the
spectrum shaping device and the Transversal Equalizer (TVE) with
Decision Feedback Equalizer (DFE).
The spectrum shaping device shares spectrum shaping function with the
QAM MOD Module of the transmitter side.
The TVE with DFE equalizes waveform distortion caused by multi-path
fading in the baseband time domain. The radio frame baseband clock
signal is recovered from the received IF signal by the QAM DEM Module.
The output of QAM DEM Module, the radio frame baseband signal and
the clock signal, are sent to the Receive Data Processing (RDP) circuit.
SRT 1F
RDP
The first stage of the RDP is the MLCM decoder. Forward error correction
consists in checking redundancy bits contained in the radio frame. Radio
parity (RP) bits before error correction, part of the MLCM redundancy bits,
are detected to monitor the error performance across the radio section
from the modulator to the demodulator.
RP Bit Error Ratio deterioration (BER-ALM) is one of the automatic USW
operation factors. Another automatic USW operation factor is frame
synchronization loss (LOF) on the radio frame.
The RFCOH is extracted to regenerate the STM-1 signal.
The RPS function at the receiver end is performed by the USW. The
USW can hitless switch in case of manual operation and most of the
automatic operation caused by ordinary fading.
MSOH and RSOH drop/insert and AU-Pointer rewriting are carried out
and the eight (8) unipolar streams are converted intto an STM-1 CMI
signal, which is forwarded to the BSW unit of the SCSU.
The BSW provides hitless switch towards the protection channel in case
of hardware failure. Further, it isolates the channel to be tested during
maintenance service.
2.1.4.3 RX Space Diversity

As a counter measure to severe propagation path conditions, Space
Diversity (SD) reception is provided as standard function, provided that
the Branching network section is equipped with the necessary adaptors
and filters for Space Diversity part. Also in field upgrade from “without SD”
to “with SD” is possible without any HW change, just equipping the
missing items in the Branching network section. Enable or disable the SD
function is to be set through the LCT.
Figure 2-6 shows the block diagram of RF/IF section of MSTU and BRU
applied for SD reception.
The MSTU is equipped with two sets of receiver. One receiver (Main
receiver) is connected to the Main antenna (upper) and the other one (SD
receiver) is connected to the SD antenna (lower).
Two receiver outputs are combined together after phase synchronization.
Phase synchronization is achieved by controlling the 2nd IF local carrier to
SD receiver through the Endless Phase Shifter (EPS). The combining
ratio of two receiver outputs is controlled through algorithms to optimize
transmission performance.
The SD system can improve the Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) up to 3 dB
during the stable propagation condition period, and remarkably reduce
the possibility of outage due to multi-path fading.
SRT 1F
to/from From
Main Antenna SD Antenna
DUP
MOD MIX IFA LNZ MIX FIL MIX AMP BPF
BPF
st nd TXPL
1 IF 2 IF RF
LOC LOC LOC
EPS RXPL
DEM MIX DELA HYB MIX AMP MIX LNA BPF

Y EQL
MIX AMP MIX LNA BPF

IF
MSTU
DADE
Prot
MOD MIX IFA LNZ MIX FIL MIX AMP
st nd TXPL
1 IF 2 IF RF
LOC LOC LOC
EPS RXPL
BPF
DEM MIX DELA HYB MIX AMP MIX LNA
Y EQL
BPF
MIX AMP MIX LNA
IF
MSTU
DADE
Main 1 BRU
MOD : Modulator LNA : Low Noise Amplifier

IFA : IF Amplifier HYB : Hybrid as IF Combiner
LNZ : Linearizer IF DADE : Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer (adjustable)
MIX : Mixer as Freq. Converter DELAY EQL : Delay Equalizer (adjustable)
FIL : Filter DEM : Demodulator
AMP : RF Amplifier LOC : Local Oscillator
EPS : Endless Phase Shifter TX/RX PLO : Phase Locked Loop Oscillator
Figure 2-6 - Block Diagram of Space Diversity Reception
SRT 1F
2.1.4.4 TX+RX Space Diversity

As a further counter measure to severe propagation path conditions, even
transmit diversity is possible, meaning that some TX channels are
transmitted by the diversity antenna by proper branching arrangement
(see Figure 2-7).
RX Space Diversity concept
TX+RX Space Diversity concept
All CHs
CH Subset
Figure 2-7 - Concept of RX and TX+RX Space Diversity
SRT 1F
2.1.4.5 MSTU Front Panel

Figure 2-8 shows the front panel of MSTU unit.
Table 2.2 shows the functions of MSTU front panel.
Table 2.2 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel

No. Item Function
(1) FAN 4 cooling fans for transmitter.
(2) FAN PWR Power cable connector for cooling fans
(3) POWER ON/OFF DC power supply switch for MSTU unit
(4) TX LO MON Monitor terminal for TX local frequency
(5) 70M IN 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement
(6) REF I/O In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation
OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT.
(7) 70M OUT MN 70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD
70M OUT SD antenna reception
(8) DADE DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference
(9) D-EQL Delay equalizer for branching network
(10) XPIC OUT XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation
(master) Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal
(11) XPIC IN (slave) XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation
(12) INCR Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only)
DECR
Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a LCT terminal for maintenance
ITEM No.
(13) LED indicator Alarm/status indicator :
UNIT/RCI Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking
LINE Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on
* : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the LCT.
SRT 1F
(1) FAN
70M IN (5)
(2) FAN PWR
REF I/O (6)
70M OUT MN
ON (7)
70M OUT SD
(3) POWER ON/OFF
OFF
DADE (8)
D-EQL (9)
(4) TX F MON
XPIC OUT (10)

XPIC IN (11)
INCR
DECR (12) Factory use only.
ITEM No. must be “0“
ITEM No.
for normal operation.
UNIT/RCI (13)
LINE
Figure 2-8 - Front Panel of MSTU unit
SRT 1F
2.1.4.5.1 Top View of MSTU Adapter

In K-shelf and Multi-shelf versions, the RF output/input connectors from/to
MSTU unit are located at the top of each MSTU unit and are mounted on
the MSTU plug-in adapter, which acts as an intermediate device between
MSTU and RF channel filter.
Figure 2-9 shows the top view of MSTU adapter used in Multi-shelf.
Figure 2-10 shows the upper view of MSTU adapter used in K-shelf.
Figure 2-9 - Top View of MSTU Adapter in Multi-shelf
SMA Connector
TX RX SD
TX port: Transmitter output

RX port: Main RX input
SD port: SD RX input
Figure 2-10 - Upper View of MSTU Adapter in K-shelf
SRT 1F
2.1.4.6 Co-Channel Operation

The Co-channel frequency operation system can transmit two STM-1
signals per RF simultaneously by using same RF frequency carrier both
V- and H- polarization. This operation is able to double the spectrum
efficiency.
For Co-channel operation, SRT 1F has following features:
• Powerful XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceller) function
XPIC equalizer is mounted inside the MSTU. MSTU is available in
both versions with and without XPIC. In case of need to upgrade an
MSTU without XPIC into MSTU with XPIC by adding XPIC function,
this operation can be done at factory.
• Receiver RF local oscillator synchronization
Synchronization between H- and V-polarization for each RF channel
2.1.4.6.1 Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC)

The XPIC is provided to improve the interference distortion caused by
antenna Cross Polarization Interference (XPD) between V-polarization
and H-polarization.
For Co-channel operation, high Cross Polarization Discrimination (XPD)
antennas are generally used. However, cross polarization interference
cannot be compensated only by high XPD antenna because XPD
degradation due to propagation path at the presence of multi-path fading
is also considered.
Therefore in addition to high XPD antenna use, Cross Polarization
Interference Canceller is essentially required.
The XPIC of SRT 1F system is an adaptive interference cancellation
circuit using 11-tap transversal equalizer. Two (2) receivers of same radio
frequency receive the mixture of desired and undesired (interference)
signal components and extract their interfered signals each other and
subtracts from the received signal after automatic adaptive
amplitude/phase adjustment.
Figure 2-11 shows the functional diagram of XPIC and Figure 2-12 shows
the cross cable connection of MSTUs.
2.1.4.6.2 Receive Local Carrier Oscillator

Two (2) receivers of same frequency shall be supplied with local carrier
signals synchronized each other. A cable connection to/from REF I/O of
two MSTUs is required and the baseband clock signals are synchronized
each other by software setting.
2.1.4.6.3 Route ID
Different route Identification (Route ID) for radio section shall be set for
securing the signal identification between V-polarization and H-
polarization.
2.1.4.6.4 Master/Slave setting

Master/Slave setting of MSTU is carried out through the LCT.
SRT 1F
Desired signal
Transmitter X LOC Receiver X LOC
REF I/O XPIC OUT IF LOC

70 MHz
XPIC
Interference RF LOC XPIC IN
XPIC
XPIC OUT
REF I/O 70 MHz IF LOC
Desired signal
Transmitter Y LOC Receiver Y LOC
Figure 2-11 - XPIC Block Diagram
REF I/O (RF

LOC)
XPIC IN (70 MHz)

XPIC OUT (70 MHz)
Figure 2-12 - Cable inter-connections for co-channel MSTUs
SRT 1F
2.1.5 Auxiliary Service Channels
In addition to the main signal (STM-1 signal), the SRT 1F system can also
transmit several auxiliary service signals.
Some signals are accessible for user’s utilization through the connectors
in the connection area on the SCSU. Some signals are exclusively used
by the SRT 1F to control the SRT 1F system itself.
The following auxiliary service signals for user’s utilization are available:
Transmitted by STM-1 SOH (Section Overhead)

• Two Engineering Orderwires per system (available as standard)
• One Wayside Traffic per STM-1 (available as standard)
• One User Channel per STM-1 (available as standard)
Transmitted by RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead)

• One Wayside Traffic per STM-1 (available as standard)
• Up to two Radio User Channels per system (available as option)
Further, housekeeping function is available as standard and upgradeable
in a scalable way as option. DCC use is also available for SEMF signal
transmission.
2.1.5.1 Engineering Orderwire (EOW)

The SRT 1F provides two engineering orderwires as a standard feature.
One is transmitted by E1 byte of RSOH (Regenerator Section OH). The
other one is transmitted by E2 byte of MSOH (Multiplex Section OH).
Generally, the EOW from E1 is used as omnibus, and the EOW from E2
as express. Voice frequency signals of E1 and E2 are independent and
have no mutual communication. The EOW interfacing circuit is the SV
unit in the SCSU. The SV unit has two sets of orderwire interface for E1
and E2: 2-wire VF modular socket for telephone set connection and 4-
wire VF circuit for the connection to/from other equipment. The SV unit
has a common circuit for Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) function and
LED/Buzzer for station calling. The buzzer functionality can be
enabled/disabled via proper HW dip switch on the front panel. The RF
channel to transmit orderwires is software settable in TL1/OSI SV, it is M1
(Main 1) for SNMP/IP SV. Orderwires are RPS parallel path duplication
protected. Figure 2-13 shows block diagram of EOW circuit inside the SV
card. Figure 2-14 shows the flow diagram of E1 and E2 signals.
Order wire connection can be applicable between any network elements
connected. However, voice quality degradation must to be considered
because there are stations linked with 4W analogue voice frequency band
cascaded connection. Thus, maximum number of cascaded voice
frequency inter-connections is 20 NEs per network due to PCM CODEC
executions. In addition, considering the leakage of voice frequency
signals in 2W interfaces, the number of NEs that can communicate
simultaneously (the number of TEL SETs simultaneously in off-hook
status) is restricted to 6 for E1 and E2 each per network.
SRT 1F
To other units
4W
interface
Analog voice addition for E1

LINE side LED, buzzer
RPS1-M1 DTM call
E1 byte (R-
RPS1-PRT Detection
SOH)
Voice addition
Ring back
RADIO RPS1-M1 Ringer
side E1
RPS1-PRT 2W INTF
byte (R-
SOH) External
(2W)
Analog voice addition for E2
DTM call
LINE side Detection
RPS1-M1
E2 byte (M-
SOH) RPS1-PRT
Ring back
Voice addition
External
Ringer (2W)
RADIO RPS1-M1 2W INTF
side E2
byte (M- RPS1-PRT
SOH) 4W
interface
PCM To other units
Figure 2-13 - Block Diagram of EOW Circuit inside SV card
MSTU
Prot
E1
VF(E1) MSTU
Telephone
2W Main 1 To/from
set Software
E1 E2 Other
VF(E2) SV unit Selection E1
MSTU Station
In SCSU Main 2
E2
(Main 1 E2
VF(E1) E1
To/from fixed for
4W MSTU
Other SNMP/IP)
Main N
Equipment
VF(E2) E2
Figure 2-14 - EOW Signal Flow
SRT 1F
2.1.5.1.1 Orderwire Extension

SRT 1F provides two RJ-11 modular jacks for orderwire telephone
connection, E1 and E2. In addition, 4-wire VF terminals of E1 and E2 are
provided for connection to external equipment.
Signal 4-wire Voice Frequency
Impedance 600 ohm balanced
Input Level Standard -4.0 dBr

-16.0 to -0.5 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step
Output Level Standard -4.0 dBr

-8.5 to +7.0 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step
Maximum Output Level +3.17 dBm0 for μ-law

+3.14 dBm0 for A-law
For TL1/OSI SV, the level attenuation is available via SW by LCT. For
SNMP/IP SV, the level attenuation is available via proper HW dip
switches (ATT A, ATT B, ATT C, ATT D) located on SV itself.
2.1.5.1.2 Digital-Through
At repeater stations and back to back stations, orderwires can be
forwarded as digital signal level when telephone sets are on-hook or not
connected. When one of the telephone sets (E1 or E2) is off-hooked, both
the E1 and E2 line are terminated and converted to the voice frequency
level.
Digital through function is provided to minimize the degradation of
orderwires due to analog/digital conversion and noise/distortion intrusion
at the analog signal level.
2.1.5.1.3 Ring Protection

In case of ring network configuration, the orderwire lines establish a loop
circuit. This loop circuit may cause the orderwire signal to self oscillate
(hauling). To prevent hauling, a port of the orderwire circuit shall be
disconnected at the master station.
If any section of the loop was interrupted by line failure, the orderwire ring
protection automatically reconnects the loop in order to recover the
orderwire communication.
Figure 2-15 shows the function of Orderwire Ring Protection.
SRT 1F
Master station Master station
These ports are

disconnected to
stop hauling.
VF circuit VF circuit
Without Ring Protection With Ring Protection
Line failure
VF circuit
Master station
In case of Line Failure

With Ring Protection
These ports are
reconnected to recover
the orderwire circuit.
Figure 2-15 - EOW Ring Protection
SRT 1F
2.1.5.2 Wayside Traffic (WS)

The SRT 1F system is provided to transmit two Wayside Traffics (WS,
2.048 Mb/s each) per each STM-1 for local E1 traffic transportation as a
standard feature.
One of two Wayside traffics (WS SOH) is transmitted by the undefined
national usage byte of SOH. Another Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH) is
transmitted by the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead.
The interface circuit of Wayside traffics (WS SOH and WS RFCOH) is the
BSW (Bipolar Switch) unit on the SCSU. Input/output port connectors are
located on the front panel of the BSW unit (for 75 ohm unbalanced),
another interface is located in the connection area of the SCSU (for 120
ohm balanced). Figure 2-16 shows the signal flow of the Wayside
channels.
Interface conditions of input/output port are set by software setting.
Wayside signals are RPS (USW and BSW) protected.
MSTU
Prot Prot
WS (SOH)
MSTU
Main 1 BSW Main 1 Main 1
WS (RFCOH)
To/from
Other
Station
WS (SOH)
MSTU
Main 2 BSW Main 2
Main 2
WS (RFCOH)
WS (SOH)
MSTU
Main N BSW Main N Main N
WS (RFCOH)
Figure 2-16 - Wayside Traffic Signal Flow
SRT 1F
2.1.5.3 User Channel (UC)

A 64 kb/s User Channel (UC) per RF channel is available as a standard
function for user’s data communication. This user channel is transmitted
through byte F1 of the RSOH. User Channel can be co-directional or
contra-directional. The user channel interfacing circuit is the multi-pin
connector in the connection area of SCSU. Figure 2-17 shows the user
channels signal flow.
User Channels are RPS (USW and BSW) protected.
MSTU
Prot
64 kb/s
In/Out port Prot
BSW units Main 1 MSTU

Main 1 Main 1 To/from
in
Main 2 Other
SCSU
Main 2 Main 1 Stations
Main N
Main N Main 2
Main N
Figure 2-17 - Signal Flow of User Channel (F1)
2.1.5.4 Radio User Channel (RUC)

Up to two Radio User Channels (RUC) per system can be provided as
optional feature to transmit voice frequency signals (VF) or 64 kb/s digital
data for user’s utilization. The RUCs are transferred by the Radio Frame
Complementary OH. The two RUC can be chosen both digital, both VF,
or one VF and one digital. Each RUC is added by equipping of proper
sub-module on SV unit in SCSU section (max two sub-modules per SV).
RUC channels are transmitted by the Main 1 and Protection channel in
parallel for duplication and RPS protection. At the receive side, one of the
RUC sets is selected. Figure 2-18 shows the RUC signal flow.
RUC
In/out port
RUC #1, #2
MSTU
VF/64 kb/s #1 Prot
Prot
SV unit
in To/from
SCSU Other
VF/64 kb/s #2
Station
MSTU
Main 1 Main 1
RUC #1, #2
Figure 2-18 - Radio User Channel (RUC) Signal Flow
SRT 1F
2.1.5.5 Housekeeping
of station devices (housekeeping function). Housekeeping bits are RPS
parallel path duplication protected.

6.4 kΩ L ● ●

coupler
● ●
L ● ●
Max. I = 100 mA
Relay →
Max. V = DC 110 V
L ● ●
2.1.5.6 Digital Communication Channel (DCC)

Digital Communication Channels (DCCs) are provided for the
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) signal
transmission.
SRT 1F
2.1.6 OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System
The SRT 1F system uses three kinds of overhead bit to transfer the
signals for system supervise/control and user’s utilization.
In addition to the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator
Section Overhead (RSOH) of STM-1 frame, the Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is provided inside the overall radio
frame.
If MCF/Controller type TL1/OSI is used, only MS mode is applicable.
If MCF/Controller type SNMP/IP is used, the operational mode can be set
as MS mode or RS mode via LCT.
Figure 2-20 shows access points of MSOH, RSOH and RFCOH in case
of MS mode.
Figure 2-21 shows access points of MSOH, RSOH and RFCOH in case
of RS mode.
SDH Radio System
Terminal Repeater Terminal
◎ ○ ○ ◎
Radio Frame Radio Frame
MS MS
● ● ● ●
RFCOH RFCOH RFCOH

RSOH RSOH RSOH
MSOH MSOH MSOH
MS : Multiplex Section
RFCOH : Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RSOH : Regenerator Section Overhead of STM-1
MSOH : Multiplex Section Overhead of STM-1
Figure 2-20 - SDH Radio Overhead Bit Access – MS mode
SRT 1F
SDH Radio System
Terminal Repeater Terminal
◎ ○ ○ ◎
Radio Frame Radio Frame
MS
● ●
RS RS
● ● ● ●
RFCOH RFCOH RFCOH

RSOH RSOH RSOH
MSOH MSOH
MS : Multiplex Section
RS : Regenerator Section
RFCOH : Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RSOH : Regenerator Section Overhead of STM-1
MSOH : Multiplex Section Overhead of STM-1
Figure 2-21 - SDH Radio Overhead Bit Access – RS mode
SRT 1F
2.1.6.1 MSOH and RSOH

The Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section
Overhead (RSOH) are compatible with SDH optical fibre systems in
accordance with ITU-T G. 707.
The MSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the multiplex
section.
The RSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the
multiplex/regenerator section.
Figure 2-22 shows the STM-1 frame format and overhead bit assignment.
Table 2.4 shows the function of MSOH, RSOH, Pointer and Path
Overhead (POH).
Figure 2-22 - STM-1 Frame Format Construction
SRT 1F
Table 2.4 - Main Function of Section Overhead (ITU-T G.707)

Byte
Overhead Usage Function
Abbr.
SOH A1, A2 Framing 6 bytes are used for STM-1 frame synchronization.
The pattern is A1A1A1A2A2A2 to each STM-1 frame,
A1 = 11110110, A2 = 00101000
D1 to Data Communication 12 bytes are used for Telecommunication Management
D12 Channels Network (TMN).
D1 to D3 are communication for Regenerator Section.
D4 to D12 are communication for Multiplex Section.
J0 Regenerator Section One byte is unique number assigned to an STM-1 signal for
Trace identification in aggregated STM-N level.
E1, E2 Orderwire Two bytes are used for voice frequency transmission as
engineering orderwire.
E1 are communication for Regenerator Section.
E2 are communication for Multiplex Section.
F1 User channel One byte is reserved for user purposes.
A User Channel (SOH) is to be transmitted.
B1 BIP-8 Bit Interleaved Parity 8
One byte is used to monitor the error performance of the
Regenerator Section.
B2 BIP-24 Bit Interleaved Parity 24
Three bytes are used to monitor the error performance of
the Multiplex Section.
K1, K2 APS channel Two bytes are allocated for Multiplex Section Protection
(MSP) switching control.
S1 Synchronous status One byte is used for quality control of the synchronous
clock signal.
M1 Far end block error One byte is allocated to transmit the block error information
to the far end.
Z1, Z2 Spare Four bytes are reserved as spare.
Pointer H1 to H3 Pointer bit Administration Unit (AU) pointer bits are used for Section
Adaptation (SA).
SS bit
Sending side
H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable
Y1 (H1#2) : same as H1
Y2 (H1#3) : same as H1
Receiving side
H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable
Y1 (H1#2) : XX (no use)
Y2 (H1#3) : XX (no use)
Note: H1 is set to the same value for both the sending and
receiving sides.
SRT 1F
2.1.6.2 RFCOH
The Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) transfers one
class of signals for internal use to monitor/control the SRT 1F system,
one class of signals for user’s utilization (WS RFCOH and optional RUC),
and a set of dummy bits.
The following table shows the composition of the RFCOH frame and the
contribution of SOH and RFCOH frames to total gross bit rate:
64 QAM 128 QAM

Bits Rate kbps Bits Rate kbps
FA 36 288 42 336
C1 1,184 9,472 1,004 8,032
C2 296 2,368 251 2,008
BSCS 32 256 32 256
RID 4 32 4 32
ATPC 6 48 6 48
1BE/x1BE 2 16 2 16
FMS/xFMS 2 16 2 16
OOS/xOOS 2 16 2 16
WS RFCOH 264 2,112 264 2,112
RUC 76 608 76 608
Dummy Bits 40 320 43 344
Total RFCOH 1,944 15,552 1,728 13,824
Total SOH 19,440 155,520 19,440 155,520
Gross Bit Rate 21,384 171,072 21,168 169,344
• FA: Frame Alignment bit to maintain the frame synchronization of

radio frame.
• C1: Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM)
level 1.
• C2: Redundancy bit for the MLCM Level 2.
• BSCS: Baseband Switch Control Signal to control the Radio
Protection System(RPS).
• RID: Route Identifier for radio section.
• ATPC: Automatic Transmit Power Control signal
• 1BE/x1BE: Transfer bit for 1 Bit Error
• FMS/xFMS: Transfer bit for Frequency Measurement
• OOS/xOOS: Transfer bit for Out of Service
• WS RFCOH: Wayside Traffic in RFCOH
• RUC: Optional Radio User Channel (up to 2x64kbps via proper
module on SV card)
SRT 1F
2.1.6.3 Radio Frame Structure

The SRT 1F organizes the Radio Frame for the transmission between two
Main Signal Transmit Units (MSTU) across a radio section. The Radio
Frame is composed of the STM-1 signal and Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead (RFCOH).
The Radio Frame has two types of configuration based on the modulation
system, 64 QAM and 128 QAM.
• 64 QAM : 6 streams at 28.512 Mb/s
• 128 QAM : 7 streams at 24.192 Mb/s
Figure 2-23 shows the Radio Frame structure for 64QAM system.
Figure 2-24 shows the relevant word structure for 64QAM system.
Figure 2-25 shows the Radio Frame structure for 128QAM system.
Figure 2-26 shows the relevant word structure for 128QAM system.
SRT 1F
Figure 2-23 - Radio Frame Structure of 64 QAM modulation
SRT 1F
Bit Arrangement from 1st to 82th word
0 6 12 17 23 29 34 40 46 50 56 62
1 7 13 18 24 30 35 41 47 51 57 63
2 8 14 19 25 31 36 42 48 52 58 64
3 9 15 20 26 32 37 43 49 53 59 65
4 10 16 21 27 33 38 44 b 54 60 C2
5 11 C1 22 28 C1 39 45 C1 55 61 C1
STM-1 data bits: 66 bits

RFCOH bit (a,b): 1 bit 72 bits
C1 redundancy bit: 4 bits
Bit Arrangement from 83st to 148th word
0 6 12 17 23 29 33 39 45 49 55 61
1 7 13 18 24 30 34 40 46 50 56 62
2 8 14 19 25 31 35 41 47 51 57 63
3 9 15 20 26 32 36 42 48 52 58 64
4 10 16 21 27 a 37 43 b 53 59 C2
5 11 C1 22 28 C1 38 44 C1 54 60 C1

RFCOH bit (a,b): 2 bits 72 bits
Figure 2-24 - Word Structure of 64QAM System
SRT 1F
Figure 2-25 - Radio Frame Structure of 128 QAM modulation
SRT 1F
Bit Arrangement from 1st to 36th word (1st sub frame)

Bit Arrangement from 1st to 35th word (2nd sub frame)
0 7 14 20 27 34 40 47 54 59 66 73
1 8 15 21 28 35 41 48 55 60 67 74
2 9 16 22 29 36 42 49 56 61 68 75
3 10 17 23 30 37 43 50 57 62 69 76
4 11 18 24 31 38 44 51 58 63 70 77
5 12 19 25 32 39 45 52 b 64 71 C2
6 13 C1 26 33 C1 46 53 C1 65 72 C1

RFCOH bit (a,b): 1 bit 84 bits
Bit Arrangement from 37st to 126th word (1st sub fram

Bit Arrangement from 36st to125th word (2nd sub fram
0 7 14 20 27 34 39 46 53 58 65 72
1 8 15 21 28 35 40 47 54 59 66 73
2 9 16 22 29 36 41 48 55 60 67 74
3 10 17 23 30 37 42 49 56 61 68 75
4 11 18 24 31 38 43 50 57 62 69 76
5 12 19 25 32 a 44 51 b 63 70 C2
6 13 C1 26 33 C1 45 52 C1 64 71 C1

RFCOH bit (a,b): 2 bits 84 bits
Figure 2-26 - Word Structure of 128QAM System
SRT 1F
2.1.7 Radio Protection Switch System
The SRT 1F is equipped with the Radio Protection Switch system (RPS)
to improve signal transmission reliability. Automatic protection switch acts
in case of equipment failure and degradation of the propagation
conditions. Manual switching is implemented for testing and maintenance
operation purposes.
2.1.7.1 Outline of Radio Protection Switching

One protection channel is provided for each switching group.
• N+1 operation: One switching group (RPS1 = Group 1) having 1:7
protection.
• 2x(N+1) operation: Two independent switching groups (RPS1 =
Group 1 and RPS2 = Group 2) having 1:7 protection each.
Maximum number of main channels is limited by the frequency band
being utilized (maximum 7 main channels per group).
Switching Stages
The Radio Protection System has two switching stages, bipolar switch
(BSW) stage and unipolar switch (USW) stage.
Figure 2-27 shows the block diagram of the Radio Protection System.
Prot MSTU MSTU Prot

(USW) (USW)
Main 1 Main 1
BB BSW MSTU MSTU BSW BB
INTF (USW) (USW) INTF
Main 2 Main 2
Main 3 Main 3
To/from Main N To/from Main N

Unipolar Unipolar
To/from Main N To/from Main N

STM-1 CMI signal STM-1 CMI signal
: Bipolar signal (CMI) line

: Unipolar signal (19.44 Mb/s X 8) line
BB : Optional BB INTF unit (OPT INTF) in case of
INTF MSP protection via BBIU shelf
Figure 2-27 - Radio Protection System
SRT 1F
Switching Section
The switching section of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) System is
activated on one hop basis. Therefore protection switching is activated
between SRT1F stations despite the type of station among terminal
station, repeater station and back-to-back terminal station. Figure 2-28
shows the RPS switching section.
Terminal A Back to back Terminal B Terminal C

MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU
USW USW USW USW
BB BSW MSTU MSTU BSW BSW MSTU MSTU BSW BB

INTF INTF
USW USW USW USW
BB BSW MSTU MSTU BSW BSW MSTU MSTU BSW BB

INTF INTF
USW USW USW USW
Unipolar Unipolar Unipolar Unipolar

CMI CMI CMI CMI
To/from Main N To/from Main N To/from Main N
Switching section A to B Switching section B to C
Figure 2-28 - Switching Section
EOW/UC/WS Signal
The Radio Protection Switching of Orderwire, User Channel by SOH and
Wayside traffic by SOH/RFCOH is activated in accordance with the
operation of STM-1 main signal.
Co-channel Operation
In case of 2x(N+1) Co-channel operation, two independent Radio
Protection Switching groups (RPS1 and RPS2) are configured according
to the system requirement.
RPS1 and RPS2 operate independently, and there is no mutual
protection switching between two groups.
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

The switching status and manual switch operation are supervised through
the local terminal, LCT. There is no display/control panel equipped on the
SRT 1F.
The LCT can supervise/control all SRT 1F equipment (NE = Network
Element) within a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) group
connecting the local terminal.
SRT 1F
2.1.7.2 USW and BSW

The Radio Protection System has two switch, bipolar switch (BSW) and
unipolar switch (USW) stages.
USW (Unipolar Switch)

The USW is part of the digital transmit/receive processor (TDP/RDP) of
MSTU. This switch is supported by manual/automatic DADEing
(Differential Automatic time Delay Equalization) function between
protection and any of main channels and performs the hitless (errorless)
switching against propagation fading.
Detailed USW information is as follows:
• Signal level: 8 streams of 19.44 Mbps rate, unipolar stage

• Direction: Uni-directional
Auto revertive
• Initiator: Loss of frame alignment (F LOSS)
Signal degrade (BER ALM)
BSW (Bipolar Switch)

One BSW unit per main channel is mounted in the SCSU (Supervisory
Control & Switching Unit) section. This switch is not hitless and is
dedicated to protect the system against equipment failure. Manual
protection switching is also not hitless but can safely isolate a specific
main channel from traffic transmission, for testing and troubleshooting
purposes.
Detailed BSW information is as follows:
• Signal level: STM-1 CMI, bipolar stage

• Direction: Bi-directional
Auto revertive
• Initiator: MSTU equipment alarm
MSTU line failure alarm
MSTU power supply failure
Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30 shows the function of USW and BSW.
SRT 1F
Terminal A Repeater B Terminal C
USW TX RX USW USW TX RX USW
BB BSW USW TX RX USW BSW BSW USW TX RX USW BSW BB

INTF INTF
USW RX TX USW USW RX TX USW
BB BSW USW RX TX USW BSW BSW USW RX TX USW BSW BB

INTF INTF
Propagation fading
When propagation fading of Main 1 from Repeater B to Terminal A occurs,

USWs (shaded) of one direction from B to A of Main 1 are activated as shown above.
Other switches are not affected at all.
Figure 2-29 - Automatic Operation of USW
Terminal A Repeater B Terminal C
USW TX RX USW USW TX RX USW
BB BSW USW TX RX USW BSW BSW USW TX RX USW BSW BB

INTF INTF
USW RX TX USW USW RX TX USW
BB BSW USW RX TX USW BSW BSW USW RX TX USW BSW BB

INTF INTF
Equipment Failure
When equipment failure of Main 1 Terminal A (MSTU receiver) occurs,

BSWs (shaded) of both directions B and A of Main 1 are activated as shown above.
Figure 2-30 - Automatic Operation of BSW
SRT 1F
2.1.7.3 Switching Priority

Priority order of Radio Protection Switching operational modes is reported
in the following tables.
Table 2.5 - Priority Order of RPS Operational Modes
Priority Switching mode Description
st
1 LOCKOUT Inhibits any type of RPS operation
nd
2 FORCED Switch over to Prot CH unless the specified Main CH or
Prot CH is locked out. (Not effective in case of Prot CH
error)
3rd AUTOMATIC The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH
is free and normal. The priority order of AUTOMATIC
switching mode is listed in Table 2.6
4th MANUAL The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH by the
command through LCT, if Prot CH is free and normal.
5th OCC Occasional traffic transmission (option): The lowest
priority traffic is allowed to be transferred by Prot CH
when Prot CH is free and normal.
Table 2.6 - Priority Order of AUTOMATIC Switching Mode

Priority Switching operation
Highest BSW operation of Priority CH (default = Main 1)
BSW operation of the first incoming channel
BSW operation of the second incoming channel
USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of Priority CH (default = Main
1)
USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the first incoming channel
USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the second incoming
channel
USW operation by BER ALM of Priority CH (default = Main 1)
USW operation by BER ALM of the first incoming channel
Lowest USW operation by BER ALM of the second incoming channel
SRT 1F
2.1.7.4 Switching Initiator and Operation Time

Automatic protection of RPS is initiated by;-
• Signal Failure : Frame alignment loss (F LOSS) of the Radio Frame
• Signal Degrade: Bit Error Ratio Alarm (BER ALM) of radio parity
before forward error correction.
Signal Failure (F LOSS alarm)

F LOSS alarm is initiated within 3 msec after frame synchronization loss
and recovered within 3 msec after establishing synchronization.
Signal Degrade
The threshold level of BER ALM can be set through the LCT. Table 2.7
shows the setting position and time to initiate/recover of BER ALM.
Default setting is “ 2 “.
Table 2.7 - BER ALM Initiation Setting and Time to Initiate/Restore
ALM
BER ALM BER after Time to Restoration Time to
Setting Initiation before Error Initiate before Restore
Error correction correction (maximum) Error (average)
correction
2 1 X 10 –3 5 X 10 -7 0.25 ms 6 X 10 -5 4 ms
–4 -8 -5
3 5 X 10 6 X 10 0.5 ms 3 X 10 8 ms
4 1 X 10 –4 3 X 10 -10 2.5 ms 6 X 10 -6 40 ms
–5 -11 -6
5 5 X 10 4 X 10 5.0 ms 3 X 10 80 ms
6 1 X 10 –5 1 X 10 -12 less 25.0 ms 6 X 10 -7 400 ms
–6 -12 -7
7 5 X 10 1 X 10 less 50.0 ms 3 X 10 800 ms
–6 -12 -8
8 1 X 10 1 X 10 less 250.0 ms 6 X 10 4000 ms
Switching Time
Without occasional traffic: Less than 5 msec plus BER ALM detecting
time and control signal propagation time.
With occasional traffic: Less than 9.5 msec plus BER ALM detecting time
and control signal propagation time.
DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer)

Automatic DADE (± 3 bits) functions to automatically synchronize two
baseband signals transmitted by a Main CH and Prot CH when carrying
out protection switching.
Manual DADE (± 16 bits): compensates the baseband signal path
difference between each Main CH and Prot CH.
SRT 1F
Wait to Restore (WTR, option setting)

Delay time from the detection of BER ALM restoration up to releasing
protection switching is available to eliminate unnecessary RPS operation
when the propagation condition is unstable.
If other channels fail during the WTR period, the WTR will be cancelled
immediately and Prot CH is taken over by the newly failed channel.
2.1.7.5 Occasional Traffic (option)

The lowest priority traffic can be transmitted by Prot CH when all
channels are normal. If a channel fails, the occasional traffic will be
immediately disconnected to remove traffic from the main failed channel.
Optional OCC card for electrical or optical interface shall be equipped in
the first available BSW slot on the right side.
If all the BSW slots are equipped (7+1) the dedicated OCC card slot shall
be used.
SRT 1F
2.1.8 Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU)
The SRT 1F equipment is equipped with a Supervisory, Control &

Switching Unit (SCSU) for each switching group.
The main function of SCSU is:
• Interfacing the STM-1, Orderwire, User Channel, Wayside and Digital
Communication Channel.
• Interfacing the Local Terminal and Network Management System.
• Interfacing the External Timing Clock Source.
• Perform Radio Protection Switching (RPS) at bipolar (CMI) level.
• Retrieve/register alarm/status data for protection control and
indication.
• Retrieve/register Performance Monitoring data.
• Control the Radio Protection Switching System at bipolar and unipolar
signal level.
• Control the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP for STM-1 MS optical
interface only).
• Provide Orderwire functions.
• Administrate the Timing Clock Synchronization.
• Relay Housekeeping (External) supervisory/control signal.
• Register the NE setting (provisioning) data.
The SCSU is composed of following units:
BSW E : Bipolar Switch unit Electrical for each main channel
BSW O : Bipolar Switch unit Optical for each main channel
SV RPS1 : Supervisory unit for single RPS (TL1/OSI or SNMP/IP)
SV RPS1/RPS2 : Supervisory unit for double RPS (TL1/OSI or SNMP/IP)
TCU (1) : Timing Control Unit for MST mode
(2)
HK : Housekeeping unit
(3)
ECU : Embedded Communication Unit
(4)
OCC E : Occasional Traffic Electrical Interface unit
(4)
OCC O : Occasional Traffic Optical Interface unit
(5)
BSW INTF : Baseband Switch Interface for RPS2 in case of double RPS
Note: (1) : Card protection (X and Y) is available as option.
(2) : Option, maximum 2 units can be installed.
(3) : Option, maximum 2 units can be installed. Not applicable for SNMP/IP.
(4) : Option, one unit will be installed for occasional traffic use. The unit shall be
put in the slot next to the BSW of the last working channel.
(5) : Option, one unit will be installed for RPS2 (Group 2) control in case of
single network element with double RPS (e.g. co-channel terminal).
Figure 2-31 shows the functional block diagram of SCSU.
SRT 1F
Figure 2-31 - Block Diagram of SCSU Function
SRT 1F
2.1.8.1 Signal Interface

STM-1 Electrical/Optical Interface and Wayside traffic 75 ohms
unbalanced connectors are located on the front panel of the BSW
Electrical /Optical unit. 120 ohms balanced connectors for Wayside traffic
and other auxiliary signals are located in the connection area of SCSU.
Interface connector pin assignment is shown in par. “3. Installation” of
this manual.
2.1.8.2 Bipolar Switch for Electrical Interface (BSW Electrical) unit

A Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit is provided for each main channel. The STM-
1 Electrical (CMI) signals to/from other equipment are interfaced through
this BSW unit. In case of Optical interface with MSP protection by means
of BBIU, the signals converted to STM-1 CMI signal by the BBIU
(Baseband Interface Unit, optional) interface this BSW unit. The BSW unit
simultaneously switches the following signals:
• An STM-1 CMI signal
• Wayside Traffic (SOH and RFCOH) and User Channel (SOH)
The bipolar switch operation is not hitless and causes some data loss,
however, it safely isolates the channel.
2.1.8.3 Bipolar Switch for Optical Interface (BSW Optical) unit

A Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit is provided for each main channel. The STM-
1 Optical signals to/from other equipment are interfaced through this BSW
unit. S-1.1 or L-1.1 SFP modules can be equipped on BSW Optical. The
BSW unit simultaneously switches the following signals:
• An STM-1 CMI signal after O-E conversion and before E-O
conversion
• Wayside Traffic (SOH and RFCOH) and User Channel (SOH)
The bipolar switch operation is not hitless and causes some data loss,
however, it safely isolates the channel.
Controls and alarms for BSW Optical are managed via connection to
SRT1F housekeeping facility. 4 DI plus 2 DO of housekeeping facility are
needed per each BSW Optical card.
In case no more than two BSW Optical cards per terminal are equipped,
the standard SRT1F housekeeping facility (providing 8 DI plus 4 DO) is
enough to manage BSW Optical cards. In this case, connector CN19 (see
Figure 2-32) of BSW Optical shall be connected to housekeeping port.
In case more than two BSW Optical cards per terminal are equipped,
optional HK card (up to two) can be equipped to increase housekeeping
functionalities. In this case, the connection to HK ports is made via
backplane.
SRT 1F
Pin Assignment
1 ALM1 CN19
2 ALM2 8
3 ALM3 7
4 PS ALM .
5 ALM common .
6 CONT1 2
7 CONT2 1
8 SG (for CONT)
Figure 2-32 - Pin Assignment of CN19
Control Function
Table 2.8 shows the control command which can be operated via house
keeping output ports on SRT1F system. A user can choose maximum two
control items through hardware switch setting on the BSW Optical card.
The control items can be set per card individually.
Table 2.8 - BSW Optical Control Function
Item Description Note
RCI Remote Card Identifier Blink CARD LED
OPTLB Optical port Loop Back Loop back the tributary.
TR Test Restart Turn on the laser output in 90s.
MR Manual Restart Turn on the laser output in 2s.
LSO Laser Shutout Force turning off the laser output.
SRT 1F
Alarm Function
Table 2.9 shows alarm and condition items which can be monitored via
house keeping input ports on SRT1F system. A user can choose
maximum three items through hardware switch setting on the BSW
Optical card. The monitor items can be set per card individually.
Table 2.9 - BSW Optical Alarm Function
Item Description
CARD FAIL Card Fail
PSFAIL PS Fail
LINE FAIL Transmission Signal Fail
RX LOS RX Loss of Signal
TX FAIL TX Fail
CMI LOS CMI Los of Signal
CMI OUT DN CMI Output Down
TX HI ALM * Optical Output High Alarm
(OPOR : Optical Power Transmitted Out of Range)
TX LO ALM * Optical Output Low Alarm
(OPD : Optical Power Transmitted Degrade)
BIAS HI ALM * Laser Bias High Alarm
(LBOL : Laser Bias Out of Limits)
BIAS LO ALM * Laser Bias Low Alarm
ACT ALS ALS in Active condition
SUBUNIT-FAIL Optical Module Removed
* : SFP module with Diagnostic Monitor option is required.
Table 2.10 shows initiators of alarms.

Table 2.10 - BSW Optical Alarm Initiator
Alarm Initiator
S-1.1 L-1.1
RX LOS -30.5 - -45.0 dBm -34.5 - -45.0 dBm
TX FAIL Logical OR of TX HI ALM, TX LO ALM, BIAS HI ALM and BIAS LO ALM
CMI LOS ≤ 18 dBm
CMI OUT DN
TX HI ALM ≤ -5 dBm ≤ 3 dBm
TX LO ALM ≥ -18 dBm ≥ -7.5 dBm
BIAS HI ALM 70 mA
BIAS LO ALM 0 mA
TX HI WN ≤ -7 dBm ≤ 1 dBm
TX LO WN ≥ -16 dBm ≥ -5.5 dBm
BIAS HI WN 60 mA
BIAS LO WN 0 mA
SRT 1F
Hardware Switches
Figure 2-33 shows the hardware switches available on the BSW Optical
for user’s setting. Figure 2-34 shows the setting options for ALS mode.
Figure 2-35 shows the setting options for control function. Figure 2-36
shows the setting options for alarm function.
Item Switch Setting Position

SW26 (RFCOH) 75 Ohm unbalanced 75 (default)
WS output
SW29 (SOH) 120 Ohm balanced 120
SW28 (RFCOH) 75 Ohm 75 (default)
WS input
SW2A (SOH) 120 Ohm balanced 120
SW28 (RFCOH) Balanced BAL (default)
WS input for 75 Ohm
SW2B (SOH) Unbalanced UNBAL
ALM1 output SW33 ALM1 0 (default)
ALM2 output SW25 ALM2 1 (default)
ALM3 output SW24 ALM3 8 (deafault)
CONT1/2 input SW23 CONT1 / CONT2 6 (default)
ALS mode SW22 ALS mode 0 (default)
Non diagnostic mon. SW32-1 Mask fake alarm Mask (default)
SW32-2, 3, 4
Miscellaneous Factory use OFF (default)
SW55
Figure 2-33 - Hardware Switches on BSW Optical
SRT 1F
Figure 2-34 - ALS Mode Switch SW22 Setting
Figure 2-35 - Control Switch SW23 Setting
Figure 2-36 - Alarm Switches SW24, SW25, SW33 Setting
SRT 1F
2.1.8.4 Supervisory (SV) unit

An SV unit is provided for each SRT 1F network element as
MCF/Controller unit to supervise/control the Radio Protection system.
SV card is available as TL1/OSI protocol stack type or SNMP/IP protocol
stack type.
SV card can be provided as single RPS type (RPS1) or double RPS type
(RPS1/RPS2). In this second case, the RPS2 control is demanded to a
dedicated RPS2 sub-unit inside the SV card.
SV card TL1/OSI type supports MST operational mode only (RST mode
is not supported by TL1/OSI SV), so that timing control unit (TCU) shall
be equipped as mandatory item. SV card SNMP/IP type supports both
RST and MST modes, so that TCU is optional item, required only if MST
mode is required.
The main function of SV unit is:
• Terminate Orderwires, User Channels and DCCs.
• Provide F-Interface for Local Craft Terminal and Q-Interface for
Network Management System.
• Retrieve/register alarm/status data for protection control and
indication.
• Retrieve/register Performance Monitoring data.
• Control the RPS at bipolar and unipolar signal level.
• Control the MSP (for STM-1 MS optical interface only).
• Provide Orderwire functions.
• Register the NE setting (provisioning) data.
• Relay Housekeeping (8DI item input and 4DO item output)
Figure 2-37 shows the front view of SV unit type TL1/OSI. The front view
is the same for both cards SV RPS1 and SV RPS1/RPS2.
Figure 2-38 shows the front view of SV unit type SNMP/IP. The front view
of the SV RPS1/RPS2 has got one connector more than SV RPS1, used
for providing synchronization to second RPS group in RST mode.
SRT 1F
SV
UNIT
LINE
MISC
ACS/SWDL
BACKUP
NORM
CR/MJ/RCI
MN/WR
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
LAN
FLEXER
2W E1
2W E2
LED TEST
ACO SW
X25/BTB
Figure 2-37 - Front View of SV unit type TL1/OSI
SRT 1F
SV
UNIT
LINE
MISC
ACS/SWDL
NORM
NE ALM/RCI
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
DEBUG
LAN 1
LAN 2
SINT2 CLK connector is
present in SV RPS1/RPS2 only.
SINT2 It is not present in SV RPS1.
CLK
2W E1
2W E2
LED TEST
ACO
BZ EN
Figure 2-38 - Front View of SV unit type SNMP/IP
SRT 1F
LED Indication
The SV unit displays a summary of the alarms/status conditions on the
SRT 1F equipment (NE).
Table 2.11 - LED indication of SV unit
LED Indication
Group LED Color Status Description
Indication UNIT/RCI Red Steady on Unit failure of SV unit
for
SV unit Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of SV unit
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of SV unit
LINE Red Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure
Green (Y) Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal
MISC Red Steady on Housekeeping alarm (DI) on
ACS/SWDL Green (Y) Steady on NE is logged on by user
Red Steady on Mismatch of software version
Yellow (G) Blinking Software download on progress (TL1 only)
Green (Y) Blinking Software download on progress (SNMP only)
BACK UP Yellow (G) Steady on Back up of setting data is on progress
(TL1 only)
Indication NORM Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of NE
for
NE CR/MJ/RCI Red Steady on CR/MJ alarm of any unit in NE
(TL1 only)
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in
NE
MN/WR Red Steady on MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
(TL1 only)
NE ALM/RCI Red Steady on CR/MJ/MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
(SNMP only)
NE
MAINT Yellow (G) Steady on Maintenance condition of NE
CARD OUT Red Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than
WR
Yellow (G) Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious
than WR
ACO Yellow (G) Steady on Alarm cut off of NE
Orderwire CALL E1 Green (Y) Blinking E1 orderwire is being called
CALL E2 Green (Y) Blinking E2 orderwire is being called
Note : Green (Y) = Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1.
Yellow (G) = Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.
SRT 1F
Table 2.12 - Switches and Connectors of SV unit

Switch Control
Switch Type Description
ACO SW Push Alarm cut off
LED TEST Push LED test
BZ EN Dip Open: EOW Buzzer OFF
Close: EOW Buzzer ON
ATT A, B, C, D (SNMP only) Dip Input/output attenuation setting for E1 and E2
Others --- Factory use
Connector Function
Connector Type Description
E1-2W RJ-11 E1 orderwire 2-wire telephone
E2-2W RJ-11 E2 orderwire 2-wire telephone
LCT (TL1 only) D-sub 9-pin F-interface for LCT (Local Terminal)
LAN (TL1 only) RJ-45 Q-interface for NMS
LAN1 (SNMP only) RJ-45 F-interface / Q-interface
LAN2 (SNMP only) RJ-45 F-interface / Q-interface
SINT2 CLK (SNMP only) Multi-pin Clock supply for RPS2 in RST mode
Others --- Factory use
Data Back-up
TL1/OSI type of MCF/Controller card is supplied with a proper EEPROM
for back-up of SV data.
In SNMP/IP type of MCF/Controller card no EEPROM back-up is
provided, but full configuration data can be stored on laptop by proper
HOTTOOL software tool.
Orderwire Function
Two fully independent EOW channels, E1 and E2, are provided.
To use an orderwire, connect an ordinary 2-wire telephone set to E1-2W
or E2-2W modular jack. The station is selectively called through the
telephone key-pad by DTMF method.
Four calling digits are used as follows:
• Two (2) digits for group number (G1, G2)
• Two (2) digits for station number (G3, G4)
When calling, (#,G1,G2,G3,G4) is dialled by push-phone TEL.
Two types of dialling method are available.
• Selective station calling: (#,G1,G2,G3,G4)
• Omnibus broadcast calling: (#,G1,G2, * , * )
4-wire VF in/out ports are available on the SCSU backplane for the
connection to/from other equipment of E1 and E2 EOW.
SRT 1F
Housekeeping (HK)
8 items of HK alarm input (DI, Digital Input)) and 4 items of HK control
output (DO, Digital Output) are available as standard supply. HK
capabilities can be improved by equipping optional HK units in SCSU.
Digital Communication Channel (DCC)

In TL1/OSI type MCF/Controller, a DCCR line is transmitted by the Main 1
channel and Protection channel for parallel path duplication RPS. DCC
capabilities of TL1/OSI type SV can be improved by equipping optional
embedded communications units (ECU) for DCCM management in
SCSU.
In SNMP/IP type MCF/Controller, a DCCR or DCCM line (DCCM line
option is available if TCU is equipped and MST mode is selected) is
transmitted by the Main 1 channel and Protection channel for parallel path
duplication RPS. Please refer to the following schemes for both single
RPS and double RPS versions.
SV
LAN
Controller
LAN
GP1-W1-RS-LINE GP1-W1-RS-RADIO
HUB
GP1-W1-MS-LINE GP1-W1-MS-RADIO
Figure 2-39 - Schematic DCC termination by SNMP SV for GP1
SV
LAN
Controller
LAN
HUB
HUB
Figure 2-40 - Schematic DCC termination by SNMP SV for GP1+GP2
SRT 1F
2.1.8.5 Timing Control Unit (TCU) for MST mode (optional card)
When working in MST mode, the SRT 1F system shall be synchronized to
the reference clock source of the network. In this case, one Timing
Control Unit (TCU) shall be equipped to supply the required clock signal
to the SRT 1F terminal, which acts as an SDH synchronization source.
When working in RST mode, instead, the clock signal is directly extracted
in the SCSU by the incoming STM-1 signal for internal use, so that TCU
card is not required and the SRT1F does not act as an SDH
synchronization source.
In case of MST mode, the SCSU provides an extra slot and
automatic/manual switching facilities for TCU unit redundancy (X and Y)
as option.
It shall be noted that in case of TL1/OSI type MCF/Controller, MST mode
is supported only, so that TCU shall be intended as mandatory item for
TL1/OSI system. In case of SNMP/IP, instead, the operational mode can
be chosen as MST or RST, so that TCU card is an optional item, not
required in case of RST mode.
The TCU accepts the synchronization timing clock signal from three (3)
STM-1 lines and/or two (2) external clock inputs (2.048 MHz or 2.048
Mb/s), then regenerates the clock signal to supply to the NE and external
clock output port. Summarizing:
Incoming STM-1 Signal (LINE) to TCU, maximum 3 inputs

• From STM-1 tributary input (Tributary side)
• From MSTU receiver output (Radio side)
External Clock Input (EXT) to TCU, maximum 2 inputs

• 2.048 MHz or
• 2.048 Mb/s
It is not possible to set the STM-1 signal coming from protection MSTU
receiver output (Radio side) as synchronization timing clock source. It is
not possible to set STM-1 signal coming from occasional traffic card line
input (Tributary side) as synchronization timing clock source.
Input connectors for external clock are located in the connection area of
the SCSU.
In case of signal source input loss the TCU generates the clock signal
internally:
• Holdover mode, the system maintains clock accuracy of +/- 0.37
ppm for 24 hours. After 24 hours, the clock accuracy is +/- 4.6 ppm.
• Internal free-running mode, +/- 4.6 ppm G.813.
SRT 1F
2.1.8.5.1 Synchronization Mode

SRT1F TCU has got two synchronization modes. In the following
description, Synchronous Source Unit (SSU) is defined as high quality
reference clock source equipment to generate and regenerate the
primary/secondary clock signal of the network in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. G.813.
In the MODE 1, the system receives the reference clock source from
other equipment through the STM-1 signal input (LINE) or EXT CLK input
connectors (EXT), and there is not any reference signal output to SSU.
EXT CLK (X)

(Y) EC Selection (Max. 3) EC Output to other
Equipment (T0)
LINE CLK PRI 1 PLL
PRI 2 according to Quality
2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
PRI 3 (SSMB) & Priority
INT CLK TCU
EC supply to SRT 1F
Figure 2-41 – Block Diagram of Synchronization MODE 1
In the MODE 2, the clock selection is made in two separate steps, and
involves regeneration of the synchronization signal through the SSU (T4).
EC Output to
LC Selection (Max. 3) the SSU (T4)
LINE CLK PRI 1
PRI 2 according to Quality 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
(SSMB) & Priority
PRI 3
SSU
EXT CLK (X) EC Selection (Max. 2) EC Output to other

Equipment (T0)
(Y) according to Quality PLL
(SSMB) & Priority 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
INT CLK
S1 byte: “111111” DNU
TCU
EC supply to SRT 1F
Figure 2-42 – Block Diagram of Synchronization MODE 2
SRT 1F
2.1.8.5.2 Clock Mode

Two clock modes are available for TCU setting, the TCU mode and the
THROUGH mode.
TCU mode
On the down stream (from the primary station to the end station), the
equipment clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary
station. On the up stream (from the end station to the primary station), the
clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary station on the
down stream.
THROUGH mode
On the down stream, the equipment clock synchronizes to the signal
incoming from primary station. On the up stream, the clock synchronizes
to the signal incoming from the end station.
TCU mode THROUGH mode
SRT 1F SRT 1F
TCU TCU
Down stream
Primary End
station station
Up stream
Figure 2-43 - Clock Mode of TCU
SRT 1F
2.1.8.5.3 Quality Level (S1 byte)

The quality level of the synchronization source is defined by the S1 byte
of RSOH. The TCU selects best quality source as reference.
Table 2.13 - S1 byte code and Quality level
Quality S1 byte
Quality description
Level bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8
2 0 0 1 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 811 (Best quality)
3 0 1 0 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 transit
4 1 0 0 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 local
5 1 0 1 1 TCU internal clock
6 0 0 0 0 Quality unknown
6 1 1 1 1 Do not use for synchronization
2.1.8.5.4 Line Clock Priority

Generally, the SRT 1F receives the reference clock from the incoming
STM-1 signal. The SRT 1F facing the end station accepts the source from
the Line side (Access ID = GP1-<W1-W7>-L), input to BSW unit. The
SRT 1F facing the master station accepts the source from the Radio side
(Access ID = GP1-<W1-W7>-R), the output of MSTU receiver.
Master MUX SRT 1F SRT 1F MUX SRT 1F SRT 1F MUX End

station station
Line side Radio side Line side Radio side

GP1-Wn-L GP1-Wn-R GP1-Wn-L GP1-Wn-R
Note: n = Main channel number

Normally, Main 1 (n = 1) shall be selected as Priority 1 (PRI 1)
Figure 2-44 - Example of Line Clock Selection
SRT 1F
2.1.8.6 Housekeeping (HK) unit (optional card)

of station devices (housekeeping function).

6.4 kΩ L ● ●

coupler
● ●
L ● ●
Max. I = 100 mA
Relay →
Max. V = DC 110 V
L ● ●
SRT 1F
2.1.8.7 Embedded Communication Unit (ECU) (optional card, TL1/OSI only)

In TL1/OSI type MCF/Controller, a DCCR line can be transmitted by the
Main 1 channel and Protection channel. DCC capabilities of TL1/OSI type
SV can be improved by equipping optional embedded communications
units (ECU) for DCCM management in SCSU.
To increase the number of DCC lines, a maximum of two ECU units can
be installed as option, the ECU 1 for RPS group 1 and the ECU 2 for
group 2 (the second ECU is applicable only in case of SV with double
RPS RPS1/RPS2).
An ECU terminates maximum 8 DCC lines. ECU card is not applicable
with SNMP/IP SV.
RSDCC (Radio)
MSTU Prot
SV unit (RPS 1 - M1)
RSDCC (Line)
MSDCC (Line)
M2
RSDCC (Line) Max. 6 M3
MSTU M4
ECU 1 M5
unit (RPS 1 - M2) M6
M7
RSDCC (Radio)
GP1 - M n (“n” is selectable)
RSDCC (Line) Max. 7 M1

M2
ECU 2 MSTU M3
M4
unit (RPS 2 - M1) M5
M6
M7
Figure 2-46 - Configuration of DCC Lines with ECU for TL1/OSI System
SRT 1F
2.1.8.8 Occasional Interface Electrical (OCC E) unit (optional card)

An OCC Electrical unit will be installed for optional occasional traffic
transmission with electrical STM-1 CMI interface through the protection
channel.
The OCC Electrical unit shall be inserted in the slot next to the BSW of
the last working channel. For example, in the system type 3+1 the OCC
card should be equipped in the slot W4-BSW. The OCC INTF slot will be
used in the fully equipped system type (7+1) only.
The OCC Interface unit does not provide wayside channels and user
channel.
2.1.8.9 Occasional Interface Optical (OCC O) unit (optional card)

An OCC Optical unit will be installed for optional occasional traffic
transmission with optical STM-1 interface through the protection channel.
The optical transceiver is equipped via proper interchangeable SFP
module (S-1.1 or L-1.1).
The OCC Optical unit shall be inserted in the slot next to the BSW of the
last working channel. For example, in the system type 3+1 the OCC card
should be equipped in the slot W4-BSW. The OCC INTF slot will be used
in the fully equipped system type (7+1) only.
The OCC Interface unit does not provide wayside channels and user
channel.
2.1.8.10 Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit

The BSW INTF unit shall be equipped in SRT 1F in 2x(N+1) CC
configuration, in order to control the BSW units of the RPS2 group.
The BSW INTF relays control command and response signals between
the SV unit (RPS1/RPS2 type) and the BSW units of the RPS2 group.
SRT 1F
2.1.9 Baseband Interface Unit (BBIU) (optional for OPT MSP)
The BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit) is optionally available in case of

need of optical interface with MSP protection.
The main function of the BBIU is to:
• Provide STM-1 Optical baseband interfacing.
• Perform the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) for OPT INTF (MS).
The BBIU is composed of following units:

OPT INTF 1 : Optical Interface 1 for 0 to 15 Km
OPT INTF 2 : Optical Interface 2 for 15 to 40 Km
MSPSW : Multiplex Section Protection Switch for OPT INTF
BBC : BBIU Controller
Note: An applicable baseband unit should be selected for
each channel. Type of OPT INTF must be selected
according to fibre optic length.
2.1.9.1 Optical Interface (OPT INTF) unit for BBIU shelf

The main function of OPT INTF is to:
• Convert the STM-1 signal from optical to electrical (CMI) and electrical
to optical.
• Drop/insert Orderwires, a User Channel and Digital Communication
Channels.
• Drop/insert Section Overhead (SOH); B1,B2, J0, K1, K2, S1 and
SSMB.
• AU-4 pointer processing for radio section.
• Check Frame alignment of the STM-1 signal.
• Descramble/scramble the STM-1 signal.
• Recover/retime clock synchronization.
• Provide baseband loop back on the line and radio sides.
Two types of OPT INTF are provided according to fiber optic length.
Table 2.15 shows the characteristics of each OPT INTF unit.
SRT 1F
Table 2.15 - Characteristics of OPT INTF for BBIU shelf

Unit OPT INTF 1 OPT INTF 2
Application code (ITU-T G.957) S-1.1 L-1.1
Typical hop 0 - 15 Km 15 - 40 Km
Operation wavelength range (nm) 1260 - 1360 1280 - 1335
Transmitter at reference point S
Source type MLM MLM
Special characteristics
- Maximum RMS width (nm) 7.7 4.0
Mean launched power
- Maximum (dBm) -8 0
- Minimum (dBm) -15 -5
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10
Optical path between S and R
Attenuation range (dB) 0 -12 10 – 28
Maximum dispersion (ps/nm) 96 246
Minimum optical return loss of cable point at S, including NA NA
connectors (dB)
Maximum discrete reflectance between S & R (dB) NA NA
Receiving at reference point R
Minimum sensitivity (dBm) -28 -34
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -10
Maximum optical path penalty including chirp and 1 1
dispersion (dB)
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R (dB) NA NA
Connector SC type or FC type
Bit rate STM-1 : 155.520 Mb/s +/-20 ppm
ITU-T Recommendation Reference ITU-T G.957 Table 1,2 and G.703
SRT 1F
The baseband signal converted to STM-1 CMI is applied to the Bipolar

Switch (BSW) Electrical unit of SCSU via the MSPSW unit. In order to
provide the MSP protection, two OPT INTF cards per each STM-1 shall
be equipped in the BBIU shelf. Figure 2-2 shows the relevant block
diagram. It is also possible to equip the BBIU partly in such a way to have
a system without MSP, but ready for upgrade to MSP protection. The
relevant block diagram is reported in Figure 2-3.
Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)

Figure 2-47 shows the functional diagram of MSP protection.
SDH Optical Terminal SRT 1F Radio Terminal (OPT INTF MSP)

STM-1
Optical line MSPSW
DSTR INTF OPT INTF (X) BSW MSTU
SEL
STM-1 CMI
Line X input
SEL INTF OPT INTF (Y)

DSTR
STM-1 CMI
Line Y output
Figure 2-47 - Function of Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)
Features of MSP operation are as follows:

Protection ratio : 1+1
Signal level : STM-1 Electrical unipolar by IC gate
Operation mode : Bi-directional/uni-directional (selectable)
Non revertive
Initiator : Signal Fail (SF)
- Loss of STM-1 frame synchronization
- Loss of optical signal input
- Multiplex section AIS
Signal Degrade (SD)
- BER : 10-3 (SF or SD), 10-5 to 10-9
- PM : STEP (SD or SF)
FESP, TESP, FSEP, TSEP
K1 control signal from the far end station
Switching time : Less than 50 ms plus alarm detection time
Priority order : Lockout > Forced > Auto (SF) > Auto (SD) > Manual
Lock-in parameter : Switching count, Monitor time, Hold time
SRT 1F
Note:
BER : Bit Error Ratio
PM : Performance Monitor
- STEP : Short Term Performance
Continuing period of Loss of frame or Severely
errored second
- FESP : 15 minutes Errored Second Performance
- TESP : 24 hours Errored Second Performance
- FSEP : 15 minutes Severely Errored Second
Performance
- TSEP : 24 hours Severely Errored Second Performance
Switching count : The number of MSP operation to start Lock-in
during the “Monitor time”.
Monitor time : The period to monitor “Switching count” to start
Lock-in.
Hold time : The duration from start to end of Lock-in
condition.
2.1.9.2 MSP SW and BBC for BBIU shelf
MSP SW
A Multiplex Section Protection Switch (MSPSW) unit is to be provided for
each main channel.
The MSPSW unit is a protection switching device for the OPT INTF (with
MSP) terminal. The MSPSW unit functions as interface of the STM-1
electrical (CMI) signal between a BB INTF (OPT INTF with/without MSP)
and a Bipolar Switch (BSW) Electrical of SCSU.
BBC
One BBIU Controller (BBC) unit is equipped on each BBIU. The BBC
controls the MSPSW units following the control command from the
Supervisory (SV) unit of the SCSU.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Preparations for Installation

This Part describes the procedure for preparing the SRT 1F rack for
installation. It covers:
• Storage
• Preparations for unpacking
• Unpacking procedures
IMPORTANT
THE SRT 1F EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED BY SUITABLY

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
THE SRT 1F EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A

RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION ONLY.
FOR THE EXECUTION OF FIELD ACTIVITIES MORE DOCUMENTS

ARE AVAILABLE TO SUPPORT THE FIELD OPERATOR.
1. INSTALLATION INFORMATION
2. FIELD TEST PROTOCOLS
3. FIELD TEST PROCEDURE
PLEASE CONTACT NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS

REPRESENTATIVES TO REQUEST SUCH DOCUMENTATION.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.1.1.1 Storage, Unpacking and Inspection

This procedure describes the unpacking and inspection of the SRT 1F
equipment. It assumes that all equipment has been received and that all
data forms and job engineering drawings have been completed and are
available.
3.1.1.2 Storage
When the equipment is to be kept in storage, leave the equipment in the
shipping containers. Store slide-in units in the special bags and the units
were originally shipped in.
The bags are coated with a conductive material and will protect the slide-
in units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Figure 3-1 shows
examples of ESD warning labels.
Figure 3-1 - Electrostatic Discharge Warning Labels
After unloading the containers, check the contents against the invoice
sheet. Check containers for external damage, quantity and contents.
If any defects or errors are found, immediately contact the person in
charge for proper remedy.
Do not leave the containers outdoors. Store the containers in a place
provided with adequate roof cover which will protect the containers from
rain and dust. Keep the containers in a dry place.
3.1.1.3 Preparation
The unpacking site shall be protected from rain, water, dust etc.
Prepare sufficient space for the unpacking site.
Prepare the tools for the unpacking of the containers.
The quantity of the equipment and installation materials should be
checked while unpacking.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.1.1.4 Unpacking and Inspection

Before unpacking the equipment, inspect the containers for any signs of
damage that may have occurred during shipment. File any claims for
shipping damage with the transportation company according to their
published procedure.
When unpacking the equipment, use the packing list that accompanies
each shipment to determine that all items are present before continuing
with the installation.
Notify the nearest Nokia Siemens Networks representative if there is a
shortage of any kind.
3.1.1.5 General Unpacking Method

1. Cut the straps that hold the cover on the container.
2. Open the cover and pull out the sealed polythene bag.
3. Cut immediately under the seal with scissors or a knife.
4. Remove the equipment from the pack by gripping the protectors
attached to the equipment.
5. Immediately check the contents, according to the invoice sheets.
6. Check if the component and parts have been damaged.
7. Notify the nearest Nokia Siemens Networks representative if there is
damage of any kind.
2
Open th e cover (1), a n d r em ove
t h e shock a bsorbin g m a ter ia l(2).
Ta ke ou t t h e r a ck(3), wr a pped
3 wit h polyt h en e sh eet , fr om t h e
pa ckin g box(4).
Figure 3-2 - Extracting the Rack from the Packing Box
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Open th e pa ckin g box(3), a n d r em ove

1 t h e shock a bsor bin g m a ter ia l(1).
Take ou t t h e MSTU u n it (2), wr a pped
wit h polyt h en e sh eet (t wo pieces), fr om
t h e pa ckin g box(3).
2
Figure 3-3 - Extracting the Unit from the Packing Box
3.1.2 Storage of Spare Units
Spare units are separately packed from other main frame units. These
units should be kept in clean places avoiding high temperature and high
humidity.
These units are stored in the special bags which are coated with a
conductive material and will protect spare units from damage by
electrostatic discharge (ESD). See Figure 3-1, for indication markings.
3.1.3 Accessories
There are two kinds of accessories.

• Installation, such as connector plugs or connector assembly,
• Maintenance, according to the routine maintenance plan,
maintenance accessories should be stored in the maintenance area.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.2 Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers
3.2.1 Warning and General Handling
This procedure lists precautionary measures which must be followed

when dealing with optical fibers and optical fiber components.
3.2.1.1 Tools Required

No tools are required for this procedure.
3.2.1.2 Warning Messages

The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using
or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety
of all personnel and the protection of equipment.
WARNING
Never look into the end of an optical cable or fibre pigtail.
PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser

radiation is present.
Never handle exposed fibre with bare hands or permit contact with
the body. Fibre fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and
remove.
Figure 3-4 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting
and receiving units:
Figure 3-4 - Laser Warning Labels
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.2.1.3 Storage
1. Protective caps are provided with the optical connectors of the optical
cable (see Figure 3-5).
2. Do not expose the optical cables to direct sunlight. The recommended
storage temperature is –10° to 60°C (14° to 140°F), and the maximum
recommended relative humidity is 90%.
Figure 3-5 - Protective Cap (SC/PC Connector)
3.2.1.4 Handling
1. Do not pull the optical cable when the connector is attached to the
optical unit (see Figure 3-6).
Figure 3-6 - Optical Cable Pulling

2. Take care not to bend or obstruct the optical cable (see Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7 - Optical Cable Bending and Obstruction Limits
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3. Do not bend the optical cable at a radius of less than 50 mm (see

Figure 3-8).
Figure 3-8 - Optical Cable Minimum Bending Radius

4. Do not twist the optical cable more than 360° per meter of length (see
Figure 3-9).
Figure 3-9 - Optical Cable Twist Limits

5. Do not drop or step on the optical cable and do not subject it to
excessive vibration (see Figure 3-10).
Figure 3-10 - Optical Cable Vibration and Shock Damage
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.2.2 Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables
This procedure details the precautions which must be taken to preserve

the integrity of optical connectors and cables during connection and
disconnection.

No tools are required for this procedure.
3.2.2.2 Preparation
1. Verify that there are no serious defects in the optical cables and
connectors.
2. Clean the optical fibre end surface with a cotton swab soaked in
alcohol.
3.2.2.3 Connection Procedure

1. While holding the connector body, insert the connector. Ensure the
connector key engages.
3.2.2.4 Disconnection Procedure

1. Gently pull the connector body away from the optical coupling
interface. Be careful not to pull or bend the optical cable.
2. Place a protective cap over the optical cable connector
3.2.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors
This section provides procedures for the cleaning of optical fibre cables
and connectors.

The tools required are:
• Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit (CLETOP Reel Type A)
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available use:
• Pure alcohol
• Mediswabs
• Lens Cleaning Paper
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.2.3.2 Procedure
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is available:
1. Insert the connector into the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit.
2. Twist the connector back and forth.
3. Slide the connector down the slot in the cleaning kit.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 in the other slot of the cleaning kit.
5. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in par. 0.
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available:
1. Use a Mediswab dampened with alcohol to clean the end of the fibre
connector.
2. Allow the connector to air dry.
3. Wipe the end of the connector with lens cleaning paper.
4. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in the
following point, Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.2.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors
3.2.4.1 Connector End-face Definitions

The condition of the connector end-face is a significant factor for the long-
term operation of the network. This procedure defines the requirements
for the inspection of terminated optical fibres.
3.2.4.2 End-face Zone Definitions

The connector end-face is divided into the following regions:
• core
• cladding
For inspection purposes the cladding region is divided into internal and
external areas. See Figure 3-11.
Internal Cladding area

Φ =62.5μ m
External Cladding area

Φ =125 μ m
Adhesive Bond
Ferrule Area
Figure 3-11 - Connector End-face
3.2.4.3 Defect Definitions

The following definitions apply:
• a scratch defect is a linear extended surface mark
• a pit defect is a localised surface mark
• a crack defect is a stress fracture either wholly within the fibre or
intersecting the fibre surface
• a chip defect has material broken away from the fibre following the
generation of crack defects
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.2.4.4 Scratch and Pit Defects

The core region must be free from blemishes.
3.2.4.5 Chip Defects

The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects,
either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface.
The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for
more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the
fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Figure 3-12 for acceptance
criteria.
Acceptable:
Chip in outer cladding
area only
Internal cladding area
Unacceptable:
Chip extends into
External cladding area
inner cladding area
Acceptable:
Chip in outer cladding
area only
Figure 3-12 - Chip Defects
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.2.4.6 Crack Defects

The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects,
either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. The
outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for more
than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the fibre or
cracks intersecting the surface.
See Figure 3-13 for acceptance criteria.
Unacceptable:
Crack extends
for more than 25% of
cladding circumference
Internal cladding area
Unacceptable:
Crack extends into
External cladding area inner cladding area
Acceptable:
Crack in outer
cladding
area only
Figure 3-13 - Crack Defects
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

• Fiberscope
3.2.4.8 Procedure
To view the optical fiber connector:
1. Insert the connector into the Fiberscope, using the adapter if required.
2. Depress the trigger to turn the Fiberscope on.
3. Adjust the Fiberscope, if necessary, to position the image in the
center of the viewing area, and focus.
4. Clean the connector face in accordance with par. 3.2.3 Cleaning of
Optical Cables and Connectors, if required.
5. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria due to damage, the
cable must be replaced.
6. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria after cleaning, and
further cleaning is not effective, the cable must be replaced.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.3 Rack Installation

This Part describes the precautions and the procedure required for the
installation of the SRT 1F rack.
3.3.1 Precautions
As a general precaution, installing sites should be selected as follows:
3.3.1.1 Suitable Places for Equipment Installation

• Do not install in places subject to vibration.
• Do not install in dusty places.
• Avoid places which becomes high in temperature. (recommended
range 20°C to 40°C).
• Install on a flat and level floor.
• Do not eat or drink in the vicinity of the equipment.
• Keep away from strong electromagnetic fields.
• When cleaning equipment, use a soft bristled brush and a vacuum
cleaner with plastic nozzle or low pressure dry air.
3.3.2 Safety Measures for Equipment Handling.
Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during

installation, removal, storage, or shipment. Such units are stamped with
anti-electrostatic marks and require special care in handling and storage.
When handling slide-in units for installation, removal or option setting,
always wear a wrist strap which is connected to safety ground.
Hold only the edge of slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on
the units. Transport and store slide-in units in the special bags in which
the units were originally shipped. Always fold the open end of the bag
over and close it securely with tape. When returning units to Nokia
Siemens Networks use these special bags. Use the original shipping
containers whenever possible.
During installation or replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with
a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into slots.
Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimize power
surges during installation. Slow insertion will ensure that the slide-in units
are not damaged.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.3.3 Tools Required
Standard hand tools and socket wrench set are required.
Wrist strap - to be worn at all times when handling circuit cards.
3.3.4 Preparation
• Use working gloves while installing and securing the equipment

• According to the local plans and procedures, the main structure must
already be installed before installation of the equipment begins.
• Check and ensure that all civil works necessary for the installation of
the equipment have been completed.
• Ensure that these checks are made before the start of the installation
work. If anything is wrong or incomplete, take corrective steps before
starting the installation work.
3.3.4.1 Rack Mounting

• When mounting the equipment rack, pay attention to other nearby
equipment and keep enough space to erect the equipment rack.
• Before mounting the rack, heavy units such as MSTU must be taken
off (originally, these are separately packed from the equipment rack,
for safe transportation).
• Ensure that each unit is properly inserted and secured, otherwise the
units will drop out of the shelf when mounting the bay upright.
• To avoid unexpected material from dropping off, remove in advance
the material which easily mounts into the equipment rack.
3.3.4.2 Rack Securing

• Temporarily remove the expansion K-shelf from the bottom of the rack
(if equipped).
• Stand the rack in the vertical position at the designated bay layout.
First securing the top of the rack, then the base.
• Use the ratchet wrench and suitable length extension bar to tighten
the bolts for fixing.
• Mount again the expansion K-shelf previously removed at the bottom
of the rack (if equipped).
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Securing the top of the rack means:

Fix the metal fitting (2) with bolts (1) (M8 x 2).
Fix the metal fitting (2) with bolts (3) (M8 x 2).
Attach FG (Frame Ground) cable with a screw (5) (M6 x 1).
Note: 1. Bolts (1),(3) (M8 x 2) represents two hex head bolts of 8 mm diameter
with two set of plain washers and spring lock washers.
2. Screw (5) (M6 x 1) represents one cross-recessed pan head screw of 6
mm diameter.
2
1
4
5 3
2
1
Figure 3-14 - Securing the top of the Rack
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Securing the base of the rack means:

Fix the rack base with the anchor bolts (6) (M8 x 4).
Note: 1. All dimensions are in mm.

2. Bolts (6) (M8 x 4) represents four hex head bolts of 8 mm diameter.
545
246
Figure 3-15 - Securing the base of the Rack
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.3.5 Rack Configuration
Figure 3-16 shows the dimensions of the standard rack.
Figure 3-16 - Dimension of standard ETSI Rack
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4 SRT 1F Multi-shelf installation
3.4.1 N+1 Terminal equipment layout
Figure 3-17 shows overview of SRT 1F Multi-shelf radio equipment rack.
O N ON O N ON O N ON O N ON
O FF O FF O FF OFF O FF O FF O FF O FF
MSTU
SCSU
BBIU
Figure 3-17 - Overview of SRT 1F Multi-shelf up to 7+1 or 2x(7+1) terminal equipment rack
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.2 2x(N+1) E/W Double Terminal single-rack equipment layout
Figure 3-18 shows overview of SRT 1F Multi-shelf radio equipment rack.
MSTU
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF
SCSU
Figure 3-18 - Overview of SRT 1F Multi-shelf up to 2x(3+1) E/W double terminal single-rack
configuration equipment rack
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3 SRT 1F Multi-shelf equipment installation
3.4.3.1 Shelves layout

Figure 3-20 shows the layout of the MSTU shelf. MSTU units are made to
slide into the MSTU shelf via the slide-in rail to the plug-in adapter. DC
power supply and RF signals connection between unit and shelf are
plugged in via the plug-in adapter. Other signal connections such as
baseband signals, supervision and control signals are also plugged in via
the multi-pin connector mounted on the BWB of the SCSU shelf.
MSTU shelf
MSTU Adapter
MSTU unit
Figure 3-19 - MSTU shelf and MSTU unit
MSTU Adapter
Slide in
Figure 3-20 - MSTU Adapter and slide-in rail mounting in MSTU shelf
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-21 and Figure 3-22 show the overview of SCSU and BBIU shelf.
Connectors for MSTU
Figure 3-21 - Overview of SCSU shelf
Figure 3-22 - Overview of BBIU shelf
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.2 How to Install Shelves & Units
3.4.3.2.1 Preparation of shelves

SCSU shelf:
Remove connector covers of the channel to be installed (Figure 3-23).
Figure 3-23 - Remove connector covers
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
MSTU shelf:
Remove the MSTU Adapter from each MSTU (
Figure 3-24).
Remove two fittings from each MSTU Adapter (
Figure 3-25). These fittings are for transportation and unit testing only.
Install MSTU Adapters and Slide in Rails on to the shelf. (Figure 3-26)
Figure 3-24 – Remove MSTU Adapter
Figure 3-25 - Remove 2 Fittings
Figure 3-26 - Install MSTU Adapter and Slide in Rails
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.2.2 Mounting of Shelves

Shelves should be mounted on to the rack in the given order for SRT 1F
Multi-shelf equipment: BBIU (if applicable), SCSU, MSTU then BRU
(Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28).
Position
BRU
MSTU
SCSU
Install BBIU first, then SCSU, MSTU and

BRU.
If BBIU is not applicable, leave the
space for BBIU (498mm H) + cabling
space (approx. 70 mm), then start
mounting the SCSU, MSTU and BRU.
BBIU
Figure 3-27 – Mounting of shelves
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
4 x 3 X 6S
4 x 4 X 8S
2 x 3 X 6S
Figure 3-28 – Screw together the MSTU and SCSU
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.2.3 Mounting of Slide-In Units

Slide-in units are locked to the shelf through latches.
To remove a slide in unit (SIU), lift latching levers and pull out the slide in
unit.
To mount a SIU, lift latching levers first, then slide in the unit firmly and
close latching levers ascertaining that the levers engage into the shelf
securely.
Full size SIUs have 2 latches both at the top and at the bottom.
To mount an SIU, ascertain that 2 levers are engaging to the shelf evenly
when closing latching levers.
Installing an MSTU :
An MSTU is equipped with 2 mounting screws.
When installing an MSTU, remove the front cover first. Then turn 2
screws evenly by lightly pressing the middle of the MSTU.
Do not slam the unit.
Figure 3-29 – Full size unit mounting
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Do not slam the unit.
Figure 3-30 – Half size unit mounting
Half size SIUs have only one latch at the bottom.

To remove/mount an SIU, remove a guard rail from the shelf first as
shown at the top left.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Figure 3-31 to Figure 3-32 show typical cable laying for inter-shelf
connection.
DC power supply Cable
Figure 3-31 - Cable laying of MSTU shelf
External signal line Inter shelf connection cable

DC power supply cable
Figure 3-32 - Cable laying of SCSU shelf
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Optical fiber cable

DC power supply cable
Inter shelf connection
External signal lines
Figure 3-33 - Cable laying of BBIU shelf
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.3 Shelf Connections

This section provides information on the inter shelf connections and user
interface connections between SRT 1F Multi-shelf radio equipment and
external equipment.
Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing or
maintaining the waveguide. These precautions ensure the safety of all
personnel and the protection of equipment.
Figure 3-34 shows the warning labels that are attached on all emitting
Figure 3-34 - Warning Labels
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.3.3.1 Waveguide Connection

Figure 3-37 shows the location of antenna port of SRT 1F Multi-shelf
radio equipment, in the N+1/2x(N+1)/Double Terminal configurations
The word “Vertical” (or “Horizontal”) can be replaced with “Horizontal” (or
“Vertical”) each in the figure below.
Vertical Horizontal
CH 1,3, 5, 7 CH 2, 4, 6, 8
MAIN SD SD MAIN
(a) Alternated Operation
Vertical Horizontal
CH 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 CH 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
MAIN SD MAIN SD
(b) Co-channel Operation and independent use of rack by V / H polarization
Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal

CH 1,2, 3, 4 CH 1, 2, 3, 4 CH 5, 6, 7, 8 CH 5, 6, 7, 8
MAIN SD SD MAIN MAIN SD SD MAIN
(c) Co-channel Operation and com m on use of rack by V / H polarization
Figure 3-35 - Antenna port location on top of the rack N+1 / 2x(N+1) configuration
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Vertical Vertical Vertical Horizontal

CH 1,3, 5, 7 CH 1,3, 5, 7 CH 1,3, 5, 7 CH 1,3, 5, 7
MAIN SD MAIN SD or MAIN SD MAIN SD
Sys. A Sys. B Sys. A Sys. B
(a) Alternated Operation of Double Term inal

Note: The W G In/out point of Sys. B is different in arrangem ent order than style (a),
(b) and (c) above.
1 2 3 4 Top view of W aveguide Flange

<V> with SD
V (or H) H (or V)
MAIN SD MAIN SD
<H> with SD
1 2 3 4
NE-A NE-B
For East (NE-A) For W est (NE-
(b) Co-channel Operation of Double Term inal
Due to TX-RX interference reason, both NE (NE-A and NE-B) accommodated in a

rack must use a same RF half-band, i.e. either Lower half-band or Upper half-band.
Figure 3-36 - Antenna port location on top of the rack Double Terminal Configuration
TOP of E TSI
st a n da r d r a ck TOP of
19 in ch r a ck
72.3 TOP of Wa vegu ides 59.4

2200.0
2190.7
BRU
Figure 3-37 - Antenna port location on top of the rack (dim. in mm)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-38 shows the waveguide connections to the equipment antenna

port.
WAVEGUIDE CONNECTOR
WAVEGUIDE
FLEXIBLE SECTION
GAS BARRIER
TWIST
Figure 3-38 - An example of Feeder Connection for Alternated Operation
Tools Required
• Standard hand tools
• Step ladder for connecting wave guide
• Ratchet type set of socket wrenches
• Waveguide Allen keys
• Torque wrench for waveguide Allen keys
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Preparation
Do not connect feeder to the equipment until all the twists in the feeder
have been corrected. See Figure 3-39
A person experienced in waveguide connections should carry out the
installation of the feeder to the equipment.
Refer to the wave guide installation manual.
Figure 3-39 - Twisting Wave guides
Precautions
When the wave guides are connected to the radio equipment, pay
attention not to apply a forced twisting torque to the radio equipment side.
3.4.3.3.2 Connection of Primary Power Lead

This section provides procedures for installing DC power and ground
cables in the SRT 1F Multi-shelf equipment rack and it shows the office
power input terminal identification.
There are two methods for DC power cable installation.
As shown in Figure 3-40, one is that the DC power distribution board and
the DC power connector of each unit and shelf is directly connected.
As shown in Figure 3-41, the other is that the DC power from DC power
distribution board is received by the optionally supplied PDU (Power
Distribution Unit) then distributed to each unit and shelf.
Tools Required
• DMM (Digital Multi-Meter)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Cr im pin g t er m in a l -48V DC P ower

for MSTU, SCSU, BBIU
fr om Office P ower Su pply
BRU
P ower ca ble
DC power for SCSU

- V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
AMP Con n ect or - V1 - V2

IN IN
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
CN 41
CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43
CN 44
OCC INTF
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33
CN 34
DC power for BBIU
CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
SCSU
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
- V1 - V2
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN
CN 73
CN 74
CN75 CN 72 CN76
BBIU
CN78 CN 79 CN77
BBC
BB INTF P
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
[M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
Not e : SCSU of 2n d RP S does n ot r equ ir e power su pply.
Figure 3-40 - DC power connection to the rack
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
DC Pow er Distribution Board of O ffice Pow er Supply
C r im p in g T e r m in a l
PDU (O PTIO N)
AM P Connector
CN 10
CN 12
CN 11
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
CN 1
CN 2
CN 3
CN 4
CN 5
AM P C on n e ct or
MSTU 8
MSTU 5
MSTU 7
MSTU 6
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
AM P C on n e ct or
[P ] [M 1 ] [M 2 ] [M 3 ] [M 4 ] [M 5 ] [M 6 ] [M 7 ]
- V1 - V2
IN IN
P ower ca ble
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
CN 41
CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43
CN 44
OCC INTF
CN 45
HK 1
HK 2
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33
CN 34
CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
SCSU
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
- V1 - V2
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN CN 73
CN 74
CN75 CN 72 CN76
BBIU CN78 CN 79 CN77
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BBC
BB INTF P
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
AM P C on n e ct or
[M 1 ] [M 2 ] [M 3 ] [M 4 ] [M 5 ] [M 6 ] [M 7 ]
Figure 3-41 - DC power connection to the rack with PDU
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Cr im pin g t er m in a l -48V DC P ower

for MSTU, SCSU, BBIU
fr om Office P ower Su pply
BRU
P ower ca ble
DC power for SCSU

MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[ A-P ] [A-M1] [A-M2] [A-M3] [ B-P ] [B-M1] [B-M2] [B-M3]
AMP Con n ect or - V1 - V2

IN IN
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
SCSU
SV
SV
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 207
TCU
TCU
CN 208
HK
HK
CN 200
CN 101 CN 107 CN 104 CN 201 CN 204

CN 102 CN 108 CN 105 CN 202 CN 205
CN 103 CN 100 CN 106 CN 203 CN 206
Figure 3-42 - DC power connection to the rack of Double Terminal.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
DC Pow er Distribution Board of O ffice Pow er Supply
C r im p in g T e r m in a l
PDU (O PTIO N)
AM P Connector
CN 10
CN 12
CN 11
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
CN 1
CN 2
CN 3
CN 4
CN 5
AM P C on n e ct or
P ower ca ble
MSTU 8
MSTU 5
MSTU 7
MSTU 4
MSTU 6
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
AM P C on n e ct or
[ A -P ] [A -M 1 ] [A -M 2 ] [A -M 3 ] [ B -P ] [B -M 1 ] [B -M 2 ] [B -M 3 ]
- V1 - V2
IN IN
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
AM P C on n e ct or
SCSU
SV
SV
CN 207
CN 208
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 200
TCU
TCU
HK
HK
CN 101 CN 107 CN 104 CN 201 CN 204

CN 102 CN 108 CN 105 CN 202 CN 205
CN 103 CN 100 CN 106 CN 203 CN 206
Figure 3-43 - DC power connection to the rack with PDU of Double Terminal
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Procedure
Prepare power lead and crimping terminal as specified on the local plan.
Main DC power distribution board side
• Removing of cable sheath (see Figure 3-44 for details)
• Crimp terminal by using die.
• Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the
equipment cable inlet through the cable rack.
Equipment side
• Assemble the AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory.
Figure 3-44 shows the cable sheath and terminal connection.
Figure 3-44 - Cable Sheath

1. Disconnect office power or remove fuses from bay fuse panel and use
a voltmeter to ensure that the supply rail is at zero volts (with
reference to the earth ground).
2. Connect the red (0 V) lead to the battery return terminal of the power
distribution board.
3. Connect the blue (–48 V) lead to the –48V terminal.
4. Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the
equipment cable inlet through the cable rack.
5. Structure AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory.
6. Connect the AMP connector to the DC power connector of the
unit/shelf.
7. Reconnect office power or re-install fuses.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment

The crimping method (Solderless) shall be applied to the power wiring
connecting terminal and to the indoor connection branching only.
Annealed copper only is used for this method.
Crimping Method
1. Choose the die fit for the cross-section area of the terminal to use.
2. Insert the terminal into the die section of the instrument and press the
terminal till it does not slip off. Then set the soldering portion of the
terminal body opposite to the male die while inserting the terminal
body to the centre of the die. Take care not to deform the terminal
when compressing it.
3. Start crimping the terminal after having ascertained that vary the
relative position of terminal and die
4. Insulating treatment at the compressed portion. This treatment shall
be performed as follows:
• More than 1 mm in width on the insulated sheath will be sealed. Wind
PVC tape with a half tape width pitch as required.
Figure 3-45 shows the method for crimping the terminal and the cable
conductor.
Figure 3-45 - Method of Crimping
Precautions
1. This equipment has the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Frame Ground
(FG) terminal. Therefore, if your station has an ESD Ground terminal,
connect to them. If not possible, connect to the FG of each equipment
to keep the same voltage level as FG.
2. While connecting the power lead, do not drop in any cable sheathing
or cable fragments. It may cause short circuits or faulty units.
3. Ensure that the cable is connected before turning on the main
breaker.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.3.3.3 AMP hand Crimping Tool

This section provides application procedures for AMP hand crimping
tools.
Figure 3-46 shows over view of AMP hand crimping Tool 23470-1, which
crimps the AMP Dynamic D-5 loose-piece tab and receptacle contacts
listed in Figure 3-47. The front of the tool, into which the wire is inserted,
is AMP marked. Wire Size Marking and the Contact Series marking on it.
The contact is inserted into the Back of the tool.
The tool features two fixed dies (crimper), two movable dies (anvils), a
locator/insulation stop, and a CERTI-CRIMP ratchet.
The locator/insulation stop has two functions:
first, it positions the contact between the crimper and anvil before
crimping; and second, it limits insertion distance of the stripped wire into
the contact. In use, it rests in the locator slot of the contact. The CERTI-
CRIMP ratchet assures full crimping of the contact. Once engaged the
ratchet will not release until the handles have been fully closed.
FRONT OF TOOL
Contact series name
CRIMPER
Wire Size
ANVIL
Tool No.
CIRTI-CRIMP RATCHET
Figure 3-46 - AMP hand Crimping Tool
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
WIRE STRIP LENGTH
4.5 ~ 5.0
CONTACT Series: D-5(S)

CONTACT NO.: 316041-3
WIRE SIZE
AWG: 16-14
Sq.(mm2): 1.23-2.27
Front of Tool(Wire Size)
Locator / Insulation stop

Contact Series Name
Contact
Wire Slot in Locator
Contact series Name
Wire Size
Wire Barrel
Stripped Wire
Locator slot (in contact)
Insulation Barrel
Tool No.
Figure 3-47 - AMP hand Crimping Method
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
CRIMPING PROCEDURES
1. Hold the tool so FRONT is facing you.
2. Make sure ratchet is released by squeezing the tool handles and
allowing them to open Fully.
3. Holding contact by its mating portion and looking straight into front of
the crimp section, insert contact from the back into die set. Position
contact between crimpers so locator mates the locator slot.
4. Holding contact in this position, squeeze tool handles together until
insulation barrel anvil starts entry into insulation crimper. DO NOT
deform insulation barrel or wire barrel.
5. Insert a properly stripped wire through the wire slot in locator and into
wire barrel of contact until insulation butts against the
locator/insulation stop.
6. Holding wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet
releases. Use both hands after the wire is fixed.
7. Allow tool handles to open fully. Remove ped contact from tool.
CAUTION: Care shall be taken to ensure that the contact is set at the
right position (shown in Figure 3-48) so as to properly crimp the contact.
CRIMPER
LOCATOR
ANVIL
(a) Right Position (b) Wrong Position
Figure 3-48 - Right position for satisfactory crimping
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Assembling of AMP Connector

After crimping the AMP contacts, assemble the Rese-housing of the AMP
connectors. Refer to Figure 3-49.
Insertion
AMP crimping contact
AMP rese-housing
Type: 1-1-179958-2
Figure 3-49 - Assembling of AMP connector
Office Power Supply Check

This procedure verifies the office power for the SRT 1F Multi-shelf radio
equipment.
Tools Required
• Digital Multi Meter (DMM)
Procedure
1. Remove the PWR connector from the station interface area (SIA).
2. Set the DMM scale to the 200 VDC range.
3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to Pin 1 of the connector and
the negative lead to Pin 2 of the connector.
4. Verify that the voltage is between –38.4V DC and –57.6V DC for –
48V DC system. If it is not, contact the installation team.
5. Disconnect the DMM leads and connect the PWR connector to the SIA.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.3.3.4 Frame Grounding

Connect the Frame Ground (FG) to the Station Ground bus with a bolt
M6. The FG is situated on the ceiling pane of the SRT 1F Multi-shelf
Rack. The FG point of Rack is shown in the following figure for Nokia
Siemens Networks ETSI rack.
Bolt, washers and crimp terminal for rack frame grounding are attached
as a assembling kit when equipment shipped out.
M6 Scr ew bolt
F 6-SW2NA-6x12S-M-Ni1A
M6 Spr in g lock wa sher
M6 P la in
Cr im p t erm in a l
F 7-ACTRA-8-6
Bolt a n d Wa sh er s a ssemblin g
N ot e:
A Cable for Fram e Grou n d
is n ot in clu ded in Fu jit su ’s
assem blin g k it .
E TSI Ra ck
Figure 3-50 - Frame Ground of the Equipment Rack
When the Rack is supplied by Nokia Siemens Networks, the contact

portion of Rack and shelves attached is kept in conductive condition so
that the linkage connection between shelves for grounding is not
necessary.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
In the case of using Rack prepared by customer themselves (Nokia

Siemens Networks not recommended) it is necessary to have
connections between shelves as illustrated in the Figure 3-51 and
connect them to the station ground bus from the adequate point in the
equipment user decided.
Ground interconnection points between shelves and example case of
connection point to the Station Bus is shown in Figure 3-51 for Standard
equipment and Figure 3-52 for Double Terminal equipment.
In the Figure, Example point set at the right top corner of SCSU shelf
is shown.
Note: A cable for connection between shelves and frame ground are not
included in Nokia Siemens Networks’s assembling kit.
BRU
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
-V -V
IN IN
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
Frame Ground
CN 41
Connection to
CN 42 Station Bus
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43
CN 44
OCC INTF
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33
CN 34
CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
-V -V
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN
CN 73
CN 74
CN 75 CN 72 CN 76
CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
BBC
BB INTF P
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
[M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
Figure 3-51 - Frame Ground of the Equipment Rack (Terminal)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-52 shows the Frame Ground connection of the rack for SRT 1F
Multi-shelf Double Terminal radio equipment as a example.
Note: A cable for connection between shelves and frame ground are not
included in Nokia Siemens Networks’s assembling kit.
BRU
- V IN MSTU 1 - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
-V -V
IN IN
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
Frame Ground
Connection to
Station Bus
SV
SV
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 31
TCU
TCU
CN 32
HK
HK
CN 33
CN 11 CN 31 CN 34 CN 11 CN 34
CN 12 CN 32 CN 21 CN 12 CN 21
CN 13 CN 33 CN 22 CN 13 CN 22
Figure 3-52 - Frame Ground of the Rack (Double Terminal)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.3.5 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms

The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F Multi-
shelf installation.
Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn Up
procedures.
3.4.3.3.6 Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors

The SMA semi rigid coaxial connectors are pre-formed to exact lengths to
establish connection between the branch filter and the MSTU plug-in
Adapter. The transmitter output and receiver input are connected to the
branching network through the MSTU plug-in Adapter shown in Figure
3-53.
Pay attention when fitting or removing the semi rigid coaxial connectors.
Use the torque wrench with a 21/Ncm setting.
Unscrew each end before trying to remove the connector.
MSTU plug-in Adapter
SMA Connector
MN RX IN SD RX IN
TX OUT
Top view of MSTU plug-in Adapter
MSTU
Figure 3-53 - MSTU plug-in Adapter and semi rigid coaxial cable connector
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
MAIN (V) SD (V)
BRU
CH 1’
CH 5’
CH 1’
CH 5’
CH 1
CH 5
RX BPF
RX BPF
RX BPF
RX BPF
TX BPF
TX BPF
CH 3’
CH 7’
CH 3’
CH 7’
CH 3
CH 7
RX
RX
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-2 RX
MAIN-3 RX
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-2 RX
MAIN-3 RX
MAIN-1 TX
MAIN-2 TX
MAIN-3 TX
TX
PROT
PROT
PROT
MNRX SDRX MNRX SDRX MNRX SDRX MNRX SDRX
TX TX TX TX
PROT MAIN-1 MAIN-2 MAIN-3
MSTU
Figure 3-54 - Semi-rigid Cable connection between BRU and MSTU

(Example for 3+1, Alternated Operation on Terminal equipment)
SRT 1F
UMN
MNRX
PROT TX
SRT 1F
TX
PROT
MAIN-1 TX
SDRX
CH 3 TX BPF CH 1
MAIN-2 TX
MAIN-3 TX
MNRX
CH 5 TX BPF CH 7
TX
MAIN (V)
MAIN-1
PROT RX
SDRX
MAIN-1 RX
CH 3’ RX BPF CH 1’
MAIN-2 RX
MNRX
MAIN-3 RX
System A
TX
System A
MAIN-2
SDRX
PROT RX
MAIN-1 RX
MNRX
MAIN-2 RX
TX
MAIN-3 RX
MAIN-3

SDRX
SD (V)
BRU
MSTU
MNRX
PROT TX
TX
PROT
MAIN-1 TX
SDRX
CH 3 TX BPF CH 1
MAIN-2 TX
MAIN-3 TX
MNRX
CH 5 TX BPF CH 7
TX
MAIN (V)
MAIN-1
PROT RX
SDRX MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-2 RX
MNRX
MAIN-3 RX
System B
TX
System B
(Alternated Operation on Double Terminal equipment)

MAIN-2
SDRX
PROT RX
MAIN-1 RX
MNRX
MAIN-2 RX
TX
Figure 3-55 - Semi-rigid Cable connection between BRU and MSTU for 3+1,
MAIN-3 RX
MAIN-3
SDRX
SD (V)
3-51
3. INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.3.3.7 Inter shelf Connection for RPS, SV, and DCC for 2x(N+1) CC
Inter shelf connection shown in Figure 3-56 is necessary for 2x(N+1) CC
radio protection switching (RPS), supervision (SV), and digital
communication channel (DCC).
PDU(OPTION) PDU(OPTION)
CN 12
CN 10
CN 11
CN 12
CN 10
CN 11
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
CN 1
CN 2
CN 3
CN 4
CN 5
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
CN 1
CN 2
CN 3
CN 4
CN 5
BRU BRU
- V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN
MSTU 16
MSTU 15
MSTU 13
MSTU 14
MSTU 12
MSTU 11
MSTU 10
MSTU 9
MSTU 8
MSTU 7
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 4
MSTU 3
MSTU 2
MSTU 1
[P ] [M1 ] [M2] [M3 ] [M4 ] [M5] [M6 ] [M7] [P ] [M1 ] [M2 ] [M3] [M4 ] [M5] [M6 ] [M7 ]
- V1 - V2 - V1 - V2
IN IN IN IN
ECU 1
ECU 2
BSW 8
BSW 9
BSW 10
BSW 11
BSW 12
BSW 13
BSW 14
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40 CN 40
CN 41 CN 41
CN 53
CN 53
CN 42 CN 42
SV
CN 43 CN 43
CN 44
BSW INTF
CN 44 OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 45 CN 45
HK 1
HK 2
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33 CN 33
CN 34 CN 34
CN 35 CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32 CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
SCSU SCSU
CN 11 CN 11
- V1 - V2
IN IN CN 73 CN 73
CD308 CD308
CN 74 CN 74
CN 75 CN 72 CN 76 CN 75 CN 72 CN 76
BBIU CD304 BBIU CD304
CN 78 CN 79 CN 77 CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
OPT INTF 27 or PE INTF 15
OPT INTF 28
OPT INTF 30

OPT INTF 24
OPT INTF 26
OPT INTF 18
OPT INTF 20
OPT INTF 22

OPT INTF 11
OPT INTF 13
OPT INTF 15
OPT INTF 7
OPT INTF 9
OPT INTF 3
OPT INTF 5
BBC
BBC
[M1 ] [M2] [M3 ] [M4 ] [M5 ] [M6 ] [M7] [M1 ] [M2 ] [M3] [M4 ] [M5] [M6 ] [M7]
To operate 2nd RPS, remove the cables CD304 and CD 308 to the 2nd RPS rack.
Figure 3-56 - Inter shelf Connection for Radio Protection Switching, Supervision, and Digital
Communication Channel (DCC) in case of 2x(N+1) CC
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.3.8 STM-1 electrical signal Interface

Figure 3-57 shows the STM-1 electrical interface baseband signal
connection done on BSW (Baseband Switch) Electrical unit front panel in
SRT 1F Multi-shelf.
Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are microsiemens (1.0/2.3) and line
impedance is 75 ohms and unbalanced.
BRU
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]

IN
WS-S
- V1 - V2
IN IN
OUT
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
CN 41 Wayside Signal IN/OUT

CN 42 IN
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43
CN 44
WS-R
OCC INTF
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33 OUT
CN 34
CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
SCSU
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
Front View of BSW unit

BBIU
Figure 3-57 - STM-1 electrical signal interface baseband connection (N+1 Terminal)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

connection that is done at the front panel of the BSW (Baseband Switch)
Electrical unit in the SRT 1F Multi-shelf Double Terminal equipment.
impedance are 75 ohms and unbalanced.
BRU
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
IN
WS-S
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
OUT
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
Wayside Signal IN/OUT

IN
SV
SV
CN 31
CN 32
WS-R
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 33
OUT
TCU
TCU
HK
HK
CN 101 CN 107 CN 104 CN 201 CN 204

CN 102 CN 108 CN 105 CN 202 CN 205
CN 103 CN 100 CN 106 CN 203 CN 206 SCSU
Figure 3-58 - STM-1 electrical signal interface baseband connection (Double Terminal)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.3.9 STM-1 optical signal Interface without MSP

Figure 3-58a shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between SRT 1F
Multi-shelf equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment that is
done on the PCB of the BSW (Bipolar Switch) Optical Interface unit.
Optical Fiber connector type are LC duplex type and they are accessible
from front of the equipment rack.
Optical coaxial cables of STM-1 signal are located along the SCSU shelf
front structure to the right side cable inlet.
BRU
To/from Optical Fiber Transmission Equipment
- V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN STM-1 optical cable run to cable inlet

MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]

STM-1 Output
- V1
IN
- V2
IN STM-1 Input
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
CN 41
CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
Optical cable
SV
CN 43
CN 44
Connector
OCC INTF
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33
CN 34
CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
SCSU
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
Side View of OPT BSW unit

CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
BBIU
Figure 3-58a - STM-1 Optical signal interface baseband connection (N+1 Terminal)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-58b shows the STM-1 optical interface baseband signal

connection that is done at the front panel of the BSW (Baseband Switch)
Optical unit in the SRT 1F Multi-shelf Double Terminal equipment.
Optical coaxial cables of STM-1 signal are located along the SCSU shelf
BRU
- V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN STM-1 optical cable run to cable inlet

MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8

STM-1 Output
- V1
IN
- V2
IN STM-1 Input
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
Optical cable
SV
SV
CN 31
CN 32
Connector
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 33
TCU
TCU
HK
HK
CN 101 CN 107 CN 104 CN 201 CN 204

CN 102 CN 108 CN 105 CN 202 CN 205
CN 103 CN 100 CN 106 CN 203 CN 206
Figure 3-58b - STM-1 optical signal interface baseband connection (Double Terminal)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.3.10 STM-1 optical signal Interface with MSP (BBIU)

Figure 3-59 shows inter shelf connection between SRT 1F Multi-shelf and
BBIU shelf for OPT MSP function and Figure 3-60 shows the STM-1
optical signal connection between BBIU shelf and Optical Fiber
Transmission equipment that is done on the PCB of the OPT INTF
(Optical signal Interface) unit. Optical Fiber connector type are SC or FC
type and they are accessible from front of the equipment rack.
BRU BSW 1 BSW 2 BSW3 BSW 7
CMI IN
CMI OUT
STM-1
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
STM-1
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
CMI IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
CMI OUT
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
CN 41
CN 42
OCC INTF
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43
CN 44
OCC INTF
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33
CN 34
CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
SCSU
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
- V1 - V2
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN
CN 73
CN 74
OCC OUT
CN 75 CN 72 CN 76
BBIU
CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
BBC
OPT INTF P
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OCC IN
[M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
MSP SW: 1 2 3 7
Figure 3-59 - STM-1 Inter shelf connection with BBIU in case of MSP
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
BRU
STM-1 STM-1
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
- V1 - V2
IN IN
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
CN 41
CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43
CN 44
OCC INTF
CN 45
HK 1
HK 2
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33
CN 34 Optical cable
Connector
CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
SCSU
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
- V1 - V2
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN
CN 73
CN 74
OUT
IN
CN 75 CN 72 CN 76
BBIU
CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
BBC
OPT INTF P
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
[M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
To/from Unit
Front View of Side View of OPT INTF unit

OPT INTF unit
Figure 3-60 - STM-1 connection between SRT 1F radio equipment and Optical Fiber
Transmission equipment
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.3.11 Wayside Signal Cable Connection

Figure 3-61 shows the 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection that is done at
the front panel of the BSW (Baseband Switch) Electrical or Optical unit in
SRT 1F Multi-shelf equipment.
BRU
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
IN
[P ] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
WS-S
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
OUT
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
CN 41
IN
CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43 WS-R
CN 44
OCC INTF
OUT
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33
CN 34
CN 35
Wa yside Sign a l IN/OUT
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
(H DB3, 75 oh m s, u n ba la n ce)
SCSU
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
Wa yside Sign a l IN/OUT (H DB3, 120 oh m s, ba la n ce)

BBIU
See Ch a pt er 5, sect ion 5.1.11, P IN a ssign m en t
Figure 3-61 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection (Terminal)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-62 shows the 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection that is done at
the front panel of the BSW (Baseband Switch) Electrical or Optical unit in
SRT 1F Multi-shelf Double Terminal equipment.
BRU
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
IN
[ A-P ] [A-M1] [A-M2] [A-M3] [ B-P] [B-M1] [B-M2] [B-M3]
WS-S
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
OUT
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
SCSU
IN
SV
SV
CN 107 WS-R
CN 108
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 100
OUT
TCU
TCU
HK
HK
Wa yside Sign a l IN/OUT

CN 101 CN 107 CN 104 CN 201 CN 204
(H DB3, 75 oh m s, u n ba la n ce)
CN 102 CN 108 CN 105 CN 202 CN 205
CN 103 CN 100 CN 106 CN 203 CN 206
Wa yside Sign a l IN/OUT (H DB3, 120 oh m s, ba la n ce)

See Ch a pt er 5, sect ion 5.2.8, P IN a ssign m en t
Figure 3-62 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection (Double Terminal)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.3.12 Inter shelf connection for Co-Channel Dual Polarization operation
Terminal
For co-channel operation in SRT 1F Multi-shelf equipment, inter shelf
connections are necessary for XPIC operation. Figure 3-64 is applied in
case that V/H equipment is installed in separate racks and Figure 3-66 is
applied in case that V/H equipment is installed in the same rack.
REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
MSTU 9
MSTU 10
MSTU 11
MSTU 12
MSTU 13
MSTU 14
MSTU 15
MSTU 16
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN
Figure 3-63 - Inter MSTU connection for Co-channel Dual Polarization operation
(V / H equipment installed in separate rack)
BRU BRU
MSTU 13
MSTU 15
MSTU 16
MSTU 9
MSTU 10
MSTU 11
MSTU 12
MSTU 14
MSTU 5
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 6
[P ] [M1 ] [M 2 ] [M 3 ] [M4 ] [M 5 ] [M6 ] [M 7 ] [P ] [M 1 ] [M2 ] [M 3 ] [M 4 ] [M5 ] [M 6 ] [M7 ]

No power supply
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN is required for
SCSU of 2nd
BSW 8
BSW 9
BSW 10
BSW 11
BSW 12
BSW 13
BSW 14
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40 CN 40
CN 41 CN 41
CN 42 CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43 CN 43
CN 44 CN 44
OCC INTF
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
CN 45 CN 45
HK 1
HK 2
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33 CN 33
CN 34 CN 34
CN 35 CN 35
SCSU SCSU
CN 11 CN 11
BBIU BBIU
Figure 3-64 – Power supply connection for Co-channel Dual Polarization operation
(V / H equipment installed in separate rack)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF REF
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
MSTU 9
MSTU 16
MSTU 15
MSTU 14
MSTU 13
MSTU 12
MSTU 11
MSTU 10
MSTU 1
MSTU 8
MSTU 7
MSTU 6
MSTU 5
MSTU 4
MSTU 3
MSTU 2
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN
Figure 3-65 - Inter MSTU connection for Co-channel Dual Polarization operation
(V / H equipment installed in the same rack)
BRU BRU
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
MSTU 9
MSTU 10
MSTU 11
MSTU 12
MSTU 13
MSTU 14
MSTU 15
MSTU 16
[P ] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7] [P ] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
- V1
IN
- V2
IN
- V1
IN
- V2
IN No power supply is
required for
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
BSW 8
BSW 9
BSW 10
BSW 11
BSW 12
BSW 13
BSW 14
CN 40 CN 40
CN 41 CN 41 SCSU of 2nd RPS

CN 42 CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43 CN 43
CN 44 CN 44
OCC INTF
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45 CN 45
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33 CN 33
CN 34 CN 34
CN 35 CN 35
SCSU SCSU
CN 11 CN 11
BBIU BBIU
Figure 3-66 - Inter shelf connection for Co-channel Dual Polarization operation
(V / H equipment installed in the same rack)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Double Terminal
For co-channel operation by means of SRT 1F Multi-shelf DT, inter shelf
connections shown in Figure 3-67 are necessary for XPIC operation.
P M1 M2 M3 P M1 M2 M3
R EF R EF
ON O N ON ON ON ON ON ON
O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF
IN IN
OUT OUT
Figure 3-67 - Inter shelf connection for Co-channel operation (Double Terminal equipment)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.3.3.13 Inter connection for DCC line through LAN

The DCC line connection between SRT 1F Multi-shelf terminals is
possible through LAN. The simplest way to connect DCC line by LAN is to
have a link with LAN cable between LAN ports on SV unit of Terminal
equipment as illustrated in the figure below.
BRU BRU
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[ P ] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7] [ P ] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
- V1 - V2 - V1 - V2
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40 CN 40
CN 41 CN 41
LAN con n ect ion wit h
ECU 1 CN 42
ECU 2
CN 42 cr oss ca ble for DCC lin e
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
SV
CN 43 CN 43
CN 44 CN 44
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
TCU X
TCU Y
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 45
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45
HK 1
HK 2
CN 33 CN 33
LAN CN 34 LAN CN 34
CN 35 CN 35
SCSU CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
SCSU CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11 CN 11
BBIU BBIU
Figure 3-68 - DCC line connection through LAN (Terminal)
This kind of need take place in the terminal station where no STM-1
signal line connection is there between terminal equipment.
The SRT 1F Multi-shelf Double Terminal equipment case for connection
of LAN is shown in the Figure 3-69.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
BRU
System A System B
MSTU1
MSTU2
MSTU3
MSTU4
MSTU5
MSTU6
MSTU7
MSTU8
[ P ] [M1] [M2] [M3] [ P ] [M1] [M2] [M3]
LAN con n ect ion wit h
cr oss ca ble for DCC lin e
SV
SV
BSW1
BSW2
BSW3
BSW3
BSW2
BSW1
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
TCU
TCU
HK
HK
LAN LAN
LAN access LAN access

point of point of
system A system B
Figure 3-69 - DCC line connection through LAN (Double Terminal)
In the case of direct connection between two terminal equipment, use the
cross type cable here. In the case of need of HUB for the connection
between co-located terminals, necessary cable is straight type cable.
The details of the wire connection of cable for straight type and cross type
is described in the following figure.
Check a cable connection inside between LAN connectors is
recommended using a circuit tester referring to the Figure 3-70 for
straight type and cross type.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
St r a igh t ca ble Cr oss ca ble
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
St r a igh t con nect ion det a il Cr oss con n ect ion det a il
Figure 3-70 - Details of LAN cable connection
3.4.3.4 Connector and Connector Pin Assignment

This Part provides information on the connector and connector pin
assignments for both type of equipment: SRT 1F Multi-shelf Standard
type and SRT 1F Multi-shelf Double Terminal type.
3.4.3.4.1 Multi-shelf N+1 Terminal Type

The Connector and Connector Pin Assignment of the Standard
equipment type are described in the section.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Connectors Layout on Back Wired Board (BWB)

Figure 3-71 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (7+1) SRT
1F radio equipment rack.
PDU(OPTION)
CN 10
CN 11
CN 12
CN 1
CN 2
CN 3
CN 4
CN 5
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
BRU
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
- V1 - V2
IN IN
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40
CN 41
Detail CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43
CN 1 CN 3 CN 4 CN 44
OCC INTF
HK 1
HK 2
CN 45
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33
CN 34
CN 2 CN 4 CN 5 CN 35
CN 12 CN 15 CN 31 CN 32
SCSU
CN 13 CN 16 CN 21 CN 23
CN 11
CN 11 CN 14 CN 17 CN 22 CN 24
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
- V1 - V2
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN
CN 73
CN80 CN 74
BBIU
CN 75 CN 72 CN 76
CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
CN81
BBC
BB INTF P
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
[M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]

Detail
Figure 3-71 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-72 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of 2×(7+1)

SRT 1F radio equipment rack.
PDU(OPTION) PDU(OPTION)
CN 10
CN 12
CN 11
CN 10
CN 12
CN 11
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
CN 1
CN 2
CN 3
CN 4
CN 5
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
CN 1
CN 2
CN 3
CN 4
CN 5
BRU BRU
MSTU 13
MSTU 15
MSTU 16
MSTU 14
MSTU 11
MSTU 12
MSTU 9
MSTU 10
MSTU 5
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
MSTU 6
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
[P ] [M1 ] [M2 ] [M3 ] [M4 ] [M5 ] [M6 ] [M7 ] [P ] [M1 ] [M2 ] [M3 ] [M4 ] [M5 ] [M6 ] [M7 ]
- V1 - V2 - V1 - V2
IN IN IN IN
BSW 8
BSW 9
BSW 10
BSW 11
BSW 12
BSW 13
BSW 14
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 4
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40 CN 40
CN 41 CN 41
CN 42 CN 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43 CN 43
CN 44 CN 44
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 45 CN 45
HK 1
HK 2
TCU X
TCU Y
CN 33 CN 33
CN 34 CN 34
CN 35 CN 35
SCSU SCSU
CN 11 CN 11
MSPSW 8
MSPSW 9
MSPSW 10
MSPSW 11
MSPSW 12
MSPSW 13
MSPSW 15
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
- V1 - V2 - V1 -V2
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN IN IN
CN 73 CN 73
CN 74 CN 74
CN 75 CN 72 CN 76 CN 75 CN 72 CN 76
BBIU CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
BBIU CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
BB INTF X
BBC
BB INTF P
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF Y
BB INTF Y
BB INTF Y
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BBC
BB INTF P
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF X
[M1 ] [M2 ] [M3 ] [M4 ] [M5 ] [M6 ] [M7 ] [M1 ] [M2 ] [M3 ] [M4 ] [M5 ] [M6 ] [M7 ]
Figure 3-72 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of 2×(7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Connectors on the BWB of SCSU

Table 3.1 lists all the connectors on the BWB of SCSU.
Table 3.1 - Connectors on the BWB of SCSU of Multi-shelf
CN No. Description Remarks Connector Type
CN 1 EXT SX Synchronization signal (Square/HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 2 EXT SY Synchronization signal (Square/HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 3 T4 SX Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 4 T4 SY Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 6 T0 SY Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 11 WS/UC 1 Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 21 HK 2 Housekeeping (DI/DO) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 31 RAB Rack Alarm BUS Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 32 EOW Engineering Order Wire Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 33 RUC Radio User Channel Dsub 25 multi-pin
CN 35 OSSI Operation Support System Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 40 S-INTF 1 Serial Interface 1 DHA80 multi-pin
CN 41 S-INTF 2 Serial Interface 2 DHA80 multi-pin
CN 42 SSMB 1 Synchronous State Message Byte BUS DHA40 multi-pin
CN 43 SSMB 2 Synchronous State Message Byte BUS DHA40 multi-pin
CN 44 CM-BUS Channel Management BUS DHA68 multi-pin
CN 45 EOW Engineering Order Wire DHA68 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Connectors on the BWB of BBIU

Table 3.2 lists all the connectors on the BWB of BBIU are listed up.
Table 3.2 - Connectors on the BWB of BBIU shelf
CN 65 UC 1, 2 User Channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 68 UC 7 User Channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 72 EOW IN Engineering Order Wire Input DHA68 multi-pin
CN 73 EOW OUT Engineering Order Wire Output DHA68 multi-pin
CN 74 EOW TERM DHA68 multi-pin
CN 75 CMB IN Channel Management BUS IN DHA68 multi-pin
CN 76 CMB OUT Channel Management BUS OUT DHA68 multi-pin
CN 77 CMB TERM DHA68 multi-pin
CN 78 SSMB Synchronous Status Management Byte BUS DHA40 multi-pin
CN 79 DCC Data Communication Channel DHA80 multi-pin
CN 80 OCC OUT Occasional signal Output 27CP coaxial
CN 81 OCC IN Occasional signal Input 27CP coaxial
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Multi-shelf Connector PIN assignment for OSSI

Table 3.3 shows the Connector PIN assignment for OSSI.
Use Access Name Connector No. on BWB Type of Connector
OSSI SCSU-CN35 Dsub 37
Table 3.3 - Connector PIN assignment for OSSI

PIN Description Remarks PIN Description Remarks
No. No.
19 SG Signal Ground
37 SG Signal Ground 18
36 17 OSSTC1 A(O) B-B element timing (A)
35 OSSTC1 B(O) B-B element timing (B) 16
34 15
33 14
32 13 OSSDCD A( I ) Carrier Detected (A)
31 OSSDCD B(I) R Carrier Detected (B) 12 OSSDTR A(O) Data Term. Ready (A)
30 OSSDTR B(O) Data Term. Ready (B) 11 OSSDSR A( I ) Data Set Ready (A)
29 OSSDSR B(I) Data Set Ready (B) 10
28 9 OSSCTS A( I ) Clear to SEND (A)
27 OSSCTS B(I) Clear to SEND (B) 8 OSSRXC A( I ) R element timing (A)
26 OSSRXC B(I) R element timing (B) 7 OSSRTS A(O) Request to SEND (A)
25 OSSRTS B(O) Request to SEND (B) 6 OSSRXD A( I ) RX DATA (A)
24 OSSRXD B(I) RX DATA (B) 5 OSSTC2 A( I ) T element timing (A)
23 OSSTC2 B(I) T element timing (B) 4 OSSTXD A(O) TX DATA (A)
22 OSSTXD B(O) TX DATA (B) 3
21 2
20 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
(Front view of BWB side)
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Multi-shelf Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1

Table 3.4 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK1.
HK1 SCSU-CN34 Dsub 37
Table 3.4 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1

No. No.
19 Reserved Leave OPEN
37 Reserved Leave OPEN 18 Reserved Leave OPEN
33 Reserved Leave OPEN 14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C
32 DO-4N Housekeeping OUT-4N 13 DO-3C Housekeeping OUT-3C
29 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N 10 HK-Common HK Common Ground
28 HK-Common HK Common Ground 9 SDA SG Signal Ground for Monitor
27 Reserved Leave OPEN 8 SD AGC SD AGC monitor (W1)
26 Reserved Leave OPEN 7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
25 Reserved Leave OPEN 6 AGC MON AGC monitor (W1)
24 Reserved Leave OPEN 5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7
23 DI-8 Housekeeping IN-8 4 DI-5 Housekeeping IN-5
20 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION


No. No.
19
37 18 HK1 DO-8C Housekeeping OUT-8C
36 HK1 DO-8N Housekeeping OUT-8N 17 HK1 DO-7C Housekeeping OUT-7C
29 HK1 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N 10 HK-Common HK Common Ground
28 HK-Common HK Common Ground 9 HK1 DI-15 Housekeeping IN-15
27 HK1 DI-16 Housekeeping IN-16 8 HK1 DI-13 Housekeeping IN-13
20 HK1 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN


No. No.
19
21 HK1DI-20 Housekeeping IN-20 2 HK1 DI-17 Housekeeping IN-17
20 HK1DI-18 Housekeeping IN-18 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION


PIN Description Remarks PIN Descriptio Remarks
No. No. n
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN


PIN Description Remarks PIN Descriptio Remarks
No. No. n
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Multi-shelf Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel

Table 3.9 shows the Connector PIN assignment for RUC.
RUC SCSU-CN33 Dsub 25
Table 3.9 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC

No. No.
13 SG Signal Ground
25 SG Signal Ground 12 U1R CKN (O) CH1 R CLK N (OUT)
24 U2R CKN (O) CH2 R CLK N (OUT) 11 U1R CKP (O) CH1 R CLK P (OUT)
23 U2R CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) 10 SG Signal Ground
22 SG Signal Ground 9 U1R DN ( I ) CH1 R DATA N (IN) 4WR
21 U2R DN ( I ) CH2 T DATA N (IN) 4WR 8 U1R DP ( I ) CH1 R DATA P (IN) 4WR
20 U2R DP ( I ) CH2 T DATA P (IN) 4WR 7 SG Signal Ground
19 SG Signal Ground 6 U1T CKN (O) CH1 T CLK N (OUT)
18 U2T CKN (O) CH2 T CLK N (OUT) 5 U1T CKP (O) CH1 T CLK P (OUT)
17 U2T CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) 4 SG Signal Ground
16 SG Signal Ground 3 U1T DN (O) CH1 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS
15 U2T DN (O) CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 2 U1T DP (O) CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS
4WS
14 U2T DP (O) CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 1 FG Frame Ground
4WS
13
25
14 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Multi-shelf Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS

Table 3.10 shows the Connector PIN assignment for RAB.
RAB SCSU-CN31 Dsub 15
Table 3.10 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB

No. No.
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7 VIS MN Visible Miner alarm
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6 AUD MN Audible Miner alarm
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 5 VIS MJ Visible Major alarm
12 NE ALM-C NE alarm © 4 AUD MJ Audible Major alarm
11 RAB-MNT Maintenance 3 VIS CR Visible Critical alarm
10 VIS WR Visible Warning 2 AUD CR Audible Critical alarm
9 AUD WR Audible Warning 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Multi-shelf Connector PIN assignment for EOW

Table 3.11 shows the Connector PIN assignment for EOW.
EOW SCSU-CN32 Dsub 15
Table 3.11 - Connector PIN assignment for EOW

No. No.
8 E2 IN T (IN) 4WR E2ch T
15 E2 IN R(IN) 4WR E2ch R 7 E2-OUT T (OUT) 4WS E2ch T
14 E2-OUT R(OUT) 4WS E2ch R 6 CALL2-C Calling E2 common
13 CALL2-N Calling E2-N-line 5 SG Signal Ground
12 SG Signal Ground 4 CALL1-C Calling E1 common
11 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line 3 E1-IN T(IN) 4WR E1ch T
10 E1-IN R(IN) 4WR E1ch R 2 E1-OUT T (O) 4WS E1ch T
9 E1-OUT R(O) 4WS E1ch R 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Multi-shelf Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

Table 3.12 shows the Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC.
WS/UC 1 SCSU-CN11 Dsub 37
Table 3.12 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

No. No.
19 SG Signal Ground
37 SG Signal Ground 18 SG Signal Ground
36 SG Signal Ground 17 SUC LRCN (O) LINE side RCLK (N)
35 SUC RTCN (O) RADIO side TCLK (N) 16 SUC LRCP (O) LINE side RCLK (P)
34 SUC RTCP (O) RADIO side TCLK (P) 15 SUC LRDN ( I ) LINE side RDATA(N)
33 SUC RTDN (O) RADIO side TDATA(N) 14 SUC LRDP ( I ) LINE side RDATA(P)
32 SUC RTDP (O) RADIO side TDATA(P) 13 SG Signal Ground
30 SG Signal Ground 11 WSR OUT N (O) RFCOH WS OUT (N)
29 SUC RRCN (O) RADIO side RCLK (N) 10 WSR OUT P (O) RFCOH WS OUT (P)
28 SUC RRCP (O) RADIO side RCLK (P) 9 WSR IN N ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (N)
27 SUC RRDN ( I ) RADIO side RDATA(N) 8 WSR IN P ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (P)
26 SUC RRDP ( I ) RADIO side RDATA(P) 7 SG Signal Ground
24 SG Signal Ground 5 WSS OUT N (O) SOH WS OUT (N)
23 SUC LTCN (O) LINE side TCLK (N) 4 WSS OUT P (O) SOH WS OUT (P)
22 SUC LTCP (O) LINE side TCLK (P) 3 WSS IN N ( I ) SOH WS IN (N)
21 SUC LTDN (O) LINE side TDATA (N) 2 WSS IN P ( I ) SOH WS IN (P)
20 SUC LTDP (O) LINE side TDATA (P) 1 SG Signal Ground
19
37
20
1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Multi-shelf Connector PIN assignment for User Channel with BBIU

Table 3.13 shows the Connector PIN assignment for UC with BBIU.
UC 1, 2 BBIU-CN65 Dsub 37
UC 7 BBIU-CN68 Dsub 37
Table 3.13 - Connector PIN assignment for UC with BBIU

No. No.
19 SG Signal Ground
36 LRXUCDT N2 LINE RX DATA (N) 2 17 LRXUCDT N1 LINE RX DATA (N) 1
35 LRXUCDT P2 LINE RX DATA (P) 2 16 LRXUCDT P1 LINE RX DATA (P) 1
34 LRXUCCLK N2 LINE RX CLK (N) 2 15 LRXUCCLK N1 LINE RX CLK (N) 1
33 LRXUCCLK P2 LINE RX CLK (P) 2 14 LRXUCCLK P1 LINE RX CLK (P) 1
32 LTXUCDT N2 LINE TX DATA (N) 2 13 LTXUCDT N1 LINE TX DATA (N) 1
31 LTXUCDT P2 LINE TX DATA (P) 2 12 LTXUCDT P1 LINE TX DATA (P) 1
30 LTXUCCLK N2 LINE TX CLK (N) 2 11 LTXUCCLK N1 LINE TX CLK (N) 1
29 LTXUCCLK P2 LINE TX CLK (P) 2 10 LTXUCCLK P1 LINE TX CLK (P) 1
28 RRXUCDT N2 RADIO RX DATA (N) 2 9 RRXUCDT N1 RADIO RX DATA (N) 1
27 RRXUCDT P2 RADIO RX DATA (P) 2 8 RRXUCDT P1 RADIO RX DATA (P) 1
26 RRXUCCLK N2 RADIO RX CLK (N) 2 7 RRXUCCLK N1 RADIO RX CLK (N) 1
25 RRXUCCLK P2 RADIO RX CLK (P) 2 6 RRXUCCLK P1 RADIO RX CLK (P) 1
24 RTXUCDT N2 RADIO TX DATA (N) 2 5 RTXUCDT N1 RADIO TX DATA (N) 1
23 RTXUCDT P2 RADIO TX DATA (P) 2 4 RTXUCDT P1 RADIO TX DATA (P) 1
22 RTXUCCLK N2 RADIO TX CLK (N) 2 3 RTXUCCLK N1 RADIO TX CLK (N) 1
21 RTXUCCLK P2 RADIO TX CLK (P) 2 2 RTXUCCLK P1 RADIO TX CLK (P) 1
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Multi-shelf Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock

Coaxial Connectors, CN 1 to CN 6, located on BWB of the SCSU are
used for IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz
square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be selected by
FLEXR and hardware switch on TCU.
Table 3.14 - Coaxial Connectors for External Synchronization Signal
CN No. Description Remarks
CN 1 EXT SX Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
2.048 MHz square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system
CN 2 EXT SY Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
2.048 MHz square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system
CN 3 T4 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 4 T4 SY Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 5 T0 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment,
CN 6 T0 SY Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment,
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3.4.2 Multi-shelf Double Terminal Type

The Connector and Connector Pin Assignment are described in the
section.
Double Terminal Connectors Layout on Back Wired Board (BWB)

Figure 3-73 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (3+1) SRT
1F radio equipment rack.
PDU(OPTION)
CN 10
CN 11
CN 12
CN 1
CN 2
CN 3
CN 4
CN 5
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
BRU
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[ A-P ] [A-M1] [A-M2] [A-M3] [B-P] [B-M1] [B-M2] [B-M3]
- V1 - V2
IN IN
BSW 1
BSW 2
BSW 3
BSW 5
BSW 6
BSW 7
detail SCSU
CN1 CN2
SV
SV
CN 207 detail
CN 208
CN4 CN5 CN6

OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CN 200
TCU
TCU
HK
HK
CN3
CN 101 CN 107 CN 104 CN 101 CN 104

CN 102 CN 108 CN 105 CN 102 CN 105
CN 103 CN 100 CN 106 CN 103 CN 106
BBIU
Figure 3-73 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of SRT 1F Multi-shelf Double Terminal
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Multi-shelf Double Terminal Connectors on the BWB of SCSU

On Table 3.15, all connectors on the BWB of SCSU in Double Terminal
are listed up.
Table 3.15 - Connectors on the BWB of SCSU in Multi-shelf Double Terminal

CN 1 A T4 SX Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 2 A T0 SX Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 3 A EXT SX Synchronization signal (Square/HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 4 B T4 SX Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 5 B T0 SX Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 6 B EXT SX Synchronization signal (Square/HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 100 A RUC Radio User Channel Dsub 25 multi-pin
CN 101 A WS/UC 1 Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 104 A HK 1 Housekeeping (DI/DO) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 107 A RAB Rack Alarm BUS Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 108 A EOW Engineering Order Wire Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 200 B RUC Radio User Channel Dsub 25 multi-pin
CN 201 B WS/UC 1 Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 204 B HK 1 Housekeeping (DI/DO) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 207 B RAB Rack Alarm BUS Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 208 B EOW Engineering Order Wire Dsub 15 multi-pin
Note: The arrangement order of clock synchronization source is different

from Standard type. Pay attention to the connection of CN1 - CN3 and
CN4 - CN6.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Multi-shelf Double Terminal Connector PIN assignment for

Housekeeping Port1
A HK1 SCSU-CN104 Dsub 37
B HK1 SCSU-CN204 Dsub 37

No. No.
19 Reserved Leave OPEN
33 Reserved Leave OPEN 14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C
27 Reserved Leave OPEN 8 SD AGC SD AGC monitor (W1)
26 Reserved Leave OPEN 7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
25 Reserved Leave OPEN 6 AGC MON AGC monitor (W1)
24 Reserved Leave OPEN 5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping Port2

No. No.
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping Port3

No. No.
19
21 HK1DI-20 Housekeeping IN-20 2 HK1 DI-17 Housekeeping IN-17
20 HK1DI-18 Housekeeping IN-18 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Multi-shelf Double Terminal Connector PIN assignment for Radio

User Channel
A RUC SCSU-CN100 Dsub 25
B RUC SCSU-CN200 Dsub 25

No. No.
13 SG Signal Ground
15 U2T DN (O) CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS 2 U1T DP (O) CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS
14 U2T DP (O) CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS 1 FG Frame Ground
13
25
14 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Multi-shelf Double Terminal Connector PIN assignment for Rack

Alarm BUS
A RAB SCSU-CN107 Dsub 15
B RAB SCSU-CN207 Dsub 15

No. No.
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7 VIS MN Visible Miner alarm
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6 AUD MN Audible Miner alarm
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 5 VIS MJ Visible Major alarm
12 NE ALM-C NE alarm (C) 4 AUD MJ Audible Major alarm
11 RAB-MNT Maintenance 3 VIS CR Visible Critical alarm
10 VIS WR Visible Warning 2 AUD CR Audible Critical alarm
9 AUD WR Audible Warning 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Multi-shelf Double Terminal Connector PIN assignment for EOW

A EOW SCSU-CN108 Dsub 15
B EOW SCSU-CN208 Dsub 15

No. No.
11 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line 3 E1-IN T(IN) 4WR E1ch T
10 E1-IN R(IN) 4WR E1ch R 2 E1-OUT T (OUT) 4WS E1ch T
9 E1-OUT R(OUT) 4WS E1ch R 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Multi-shelf Double Terminal Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

A WS/UC 1 SCSU-CN101 Dsub 37
B WS/UC 1 SCSU-CN201 Dsub 37

No. No.
19 SG Signal Ground
21 SUC LTDN (O) LINE side TDATA (N) 2 WSS IN P ( I ) SOH WS IN (P)
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Multi-shelf Double Terminal Coaxial Connector assignment for

External Clock
Coaxial Connectors, CN 1 to CN 6, located on BWB of the SCSU are
used for IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz
square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can select by FLEXR
and hardware switch on TCU.
CN No. Description Remarks
CN 1 A T4 SX Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
CN 2 A T0 SX Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
CN 3 A EXT SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 4 B T4 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 5 B T0 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment,
CN 6 B EXT SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment,
Note: The arrangement order of clock synchronization source is different

from Standard type. Pay attention to the connection of CN1 - CN3 and
CN4 - CN6.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5 SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) installation
3.5.1 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) rack layout
Figure 3-74 shows overview of SRT 1F N.E. model radio equipment rack.
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E.
Figure 3-74 - Overview of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. configuration equipment rack
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) equipment installation
3.5.2.1 RF Port Arrangement
MAIN
SD
MAIN SD
Single Polarization with SD Dual Polarization with SD
MAIN(V)
MAIN(H)
TOP VIEW
MAIN(V) MAIN(H)
Dual Polarization without SD
Figure 3-75 – RF Port Arrangement of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2 Shelf Dimensions
INTERFACE ADAP KIT (OPON)
LEFT SIDE FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE
(85)
588
(503)
(294) (298)
359
Figure 3-76 – Equipment Dimensions of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3 Antenna Port Position
29 240 66.5 165

160 110
(36.5)
80 55
10
12
107
73
(294)
359
Figure 3-77 – Antenna Port Position of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.4 Rack Mount Material
298
248
45
111
120.5 120.5
280
M4 x 12 (mm)
Figure 3-78 - Rack Mount Kit of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.5 Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack
3.5.2.5.1 Solution with one system
8.4
242
113
(337.5) min
(74.5) min
M6 x 12 (mm)
(600)
(mm)
Figure 3-79 - Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack (solution with one system)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.5.2 Solution with two systems and W/G H-BEND
496.5
326.5
(337.5) min
216.5
101.5
(754.5) min
103
(924.5) min
176
(1187.5) min
85 85 57.5 57.5
85
85
(mm)
Figure 3-80 - Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack (solution with two systems and
W/G H-BEND)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.5.3 Solution with two systems and W/G Z-BEND

124.5
60
387.5
859.5
999.5
1262.5
496.5
326.5
216.5
101.5
103
176
(mm)
Figure 3-81 - Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack (solution with two systems and
W/G Z-BEND)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.6 Connection of Primary Power Lead

Figure 3-82 shows the DC power connector of the shelf
Refer to par. 3.4.3.3.2 the procedures to install the DC power.
AMP
Figure 3-82 - DC power connection to the rack of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.7 Baseband Signal Cable Connection

connection done on BSW (Baseband Switch) unit front panel for SRT 1F
1+1 N.E.
impedance is 75 ohms and unbalanced.
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
M M
S S
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
T T T
C
U U U IN
S WS-S
P W OUT
V
B Wayside Signal IN/OUT

S IN
W
WS-R
OUT
Figure 3-83 - STM-1 electrical signal interface of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.7.2 STM-1 optical signal Interface

Figure 3-84 shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between SRT 1F
1+1 N.E. radio equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment that
is done on the PCB of the OPT INTF (Optical signal Interface) unit.
Optical Fiber connector type are FC type and they are accessible from
front of the equipment rack.
STM-1 STM-1
M M
S S Optical cable
T T T Connector
C
U U U
S
P W
V
OUT
IN
B O
S P
W T
To/from Unit

OPT INTF unit
Figure 3-84 - STM-1 optical signal interface of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.8 Interconnection for Co-Channel operation
For co-channel operation, interconnection between MSTUs as shown in

Figure 3-85 is necessary for XPIC operation.
M M
S S
T T T
C
U U U
S ON ON
P W V OFF OFF
POWER POWER
ON/OFF ON/OFF
B O
S P
W T
TX F MON TX F MON
Figure 3-85 - MSTU Inter connection for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model Co-channel operation
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.9 Connectors and Connector Pin Assignment

This section provides information on the connector and pin assignments
for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E.
CN1 (EXT SX)
CN2 (T4 SX)
CN3 (T0 SX)
V (-48Vdc)
CN4 (HK)
CN5
(RAB &EOW)
CN6 (WS/UC)
CN7 (RUC)
Figure 3-86 - Connectors layout on the shelf of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
Table 3.24 - Connectors on the shelf

CN Description Remarks Connector Type
No.
CN 1 EXT SX Synchronization signal (Square/HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 3 T0SX Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 4 HK Housekeeping (DI/DO) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 5 RAB &EOW Rack Alarm BUS and EOW Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 6 WS/UC Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock

CN Description Remarks
No.
CN 1 EXT SX Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz

square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3.
CN 2 T4 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz
square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3.
CN 3 T0 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment,
2.048 MHz square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port

Table 3.26 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK.
Use Access Name Connector No. Type of Connector

HK CN4 Dsub 37
Table 3.26 - Connector PIN assignment for HK

PIN PIN
No. Description Remarks No. Description Remarks
1 FG Frame Ground 20 DI-4 Housekeeping IN-4
4 DI-5 Housekeeping IN-5 23 LSO1-N OPT ALS status out (N)
5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7 24 LSO1-C OPT ALS status out (C)
6 AGC MON AGC monitor (W1) 25 LINE1ALM-N OPT LINE ALM (N)
7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor 26 LINE1ALM-C OPT LINE ALM out (C)
8 SD AGC SD AGC monitor (W1) 27 HK-Common HK Common Ground
9 SDA SG Signal Ground for Monitor 28 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N
10 HK-Common HK Common Ground 29 DO-2N Housekeeping OUT-2N
11 DO-1C Housekeeping OUT-1C 30 DO-3N Housekeeping OUT-3N
12 DO-2C Housekeeping OUT-2C 31 DO-4N Housekeeping OUT-4N
13 DO-3C Housekeeping OUT-3C 32 LSO2-N OPT OCC ALS status out (N)
14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C 33 LSO2-C OPT OCC ALS status out (C)
15 OPT1-ALM-N OPT CARD FAIL out (N) 34 LINE2ALM-N OPT OCC LINE ALM out (N)
16 OPT1-ALM-C OPT CARD FAIL out(C) 35 LINE2ALM-C OPT OCC LINE ALM out (C)
OPT OCC CARD FAIL out
17 OPT2-ALM-N
(N) 36 NC
OPT OCC CARD FAIL out
18 OPT2-ALM-C
(C) 37 NC
19 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-2
1 20
(Front view of the connector)
19 37
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Connector PIN assignment for RAB and EOW
Table 3.27 shows the Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm Bus and
EOW.

RAB & EOW CN5 Dsub 37
Table 3.27 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB and EOW

PIN PIN
1 FG Frame Ground 20 FG Frame Ground
2 AUD CR Audible Critical alarm 21 E1-OUT T (OUT) 4W Send E1ch Tip
3 VIS CR Visible Critical alarm 22 E1-IN T(IN) 4W Rec E1ch Tip
4 AUD MJ Audible Major alarm 23 CALL1-C Calling E1 common
5 VIS MJ Visible Major alarm 24 SG Signal Ground
6 AUD MN Audible Miner alarm 25 CALL2-C Calling E2 common
7 VIS MN Visible Miner alarm 26 E2-OUT T (OUT) 4W Send E2ch Tip
8 COMMON 27 E2 IN T (IN) 4W Rec E2ch Tip
9 AUD WR Audible Warning 28 E1-OUT R(OUT) 4W Send E1ch Ring
10 VIS WR Visible Warning 29 E1-IN R(IN) 4W Rec E1ch Ring
11 RAB-MNT Maintenance 30 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line
12 NE ALM-C NE alarm (C) 31 SG Signal Ground
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 32 CALL2-N Calling E2-N-line
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 33 E2-OUT R(OUT) 4W Send E2ch Ring
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 34 E2 IN R(IN) 4W Rec E2ch Ring
16 NC 35 NC
17 NC 36 NC
18 NC 37 NC
19 NC
1 20
19 37
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC


WS/UC CN6 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
1 FG Frame Ground 20 SUC LTDP (O) UC LINE side TDATA (P)
2 WSS IN P ( I ) SOH WS IN (P) 21 SUC LTDN (O) UC LINE side TDATA (N)
3 WSS IN N ( I ) SOH WS IN (N) 22 SUC LTCP (O) UC LINE side TCLK (P)
4 WSS OUT P (O) SOH WS OUT (P) 23 SUC LTCN (O) UC LINE side TCLK (N)
5 WSS OUT N (O) SOH WS OUT (N) 24 SG Signal Ground
7 SG Signal Ground 26 SUC RRDP ( I ) UC RADIO side RDATA(P)
8 WSR IN P ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (P) 27 SUC RRDN ( I ) UC RADIO side RDATA(N)
9 WSR IN N ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (N) 28 SUC RRCP (O) UC RADIO side RCLK (P)
10 WSR OUT P (O) RFCOH WS OUT (P) 29 SUC RRCN (O) UC RADIO side RCLK (N)
11 WSR OUT N (O) RFCOH WS OUT (N) 30 SG Signal Ground
13 SG Signal Ground 32 SUC RTDP (O) UC RADIO side TDATA(P)
14 SUC LRDP ( I ) UC LINE side RDATA(P) 33 SUC RTDN (O) UC RADIO side TDATA(N)
15 SUC LRDN ( I ) UC LINE side RDATA(N) 34 SUC RTCP (O) UC RADIO side TCLK (P)
16 SUC LRCP (O) UC LINE side RCLK (P) 35 SUC RTCN (O) UC RADIO side TCLK (N)
17 SUC LRCN (O) UC LINE side RCLK (N) 36 SG Signal Ground
19 SG Signal Ground
1 20
19 37
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Connector PIN assignment Radio User Channel


RUC CN7 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
1 FG Frame Ground 20 U2R DP ( I ) CH2 T DATA P (IN) 4WR
2 U1T DP (O) CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS 21 U2R DN ( I ) CH2 T DATA N (IN) 4WR
3 U1T DN (O) CH1 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS 22 SG Signal Ground
4 SG Signal Ground 23 U2R CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT)
5 U1T CKP (O) CH1 T CLK P (OUT) 24 U2R CKN (O) CH2 R CLK N (OUT)
6 U1T CKN (O) CH1 T CLK N (OUT) 25 SG Signal Ground
7 SG Signal Ground 26 NC
8 U1R DP ( I ) CH1 R DATA P (IN) 4WR 27 NC
9 U1R DN ( I ) CH1 R DATA N (IN) 4WR 28 NC
11 U1R CKP (O) CH1 R CLK P (OUT) 30 NC
12 U1R CKN (O) CH1 R CLK N (OUT) 31 NC
14 U2T DP (O) CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS 33 NC
15 U2T DN (O) CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS 34 NC
17 U2T CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) 36 NC
18 U2T CKN (O) CH2 T CLK N (OUT) 37 NC
19 SG Signal Ground
1 20
19 37
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6 SRT 1F K-shelf Installation
3.6.1 K-shelf rack layout
Figure 3-87 shows overview of SRT 1F K-shelf radio equipment rack.
Figure 3-87 - K-shelf rack layout
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2 SRT 1F K-shelf equipment installation
3.6.2.1 Shelf layout

Figure 3-88 shows K-shelf configuration. MSTU units are slide into the
MSTU block via plug-in adapter and other units are plug-in’ed directly to
the shelf.
For MSTU, DC power supply and RF signals connection between unit
and shelf are plugged in via plug-in adapter. User interface signal
connection such as baseband signals, supervision and control signals
also plugged in via multi-pin connector mounted on the BWB of the SCSU
and UIA blocks.
Figure 3-88- K-shelf and MSTU Unit
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2 How to Install Shelves & Units
3.6.2.2.1 Mounting of Shelves

Shelves should be mounted on to the rack in order. Install K-shelf first,
then expansion K-shelf, if any.
Figure 3-89 - Mounting of shelves
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.2 Mounting of Slide In Units

Slide-in-units (SIU) are locked to the shelf by card puller with latching
lever and also protected not to remove fixing screws or metal plate for
strong vibration, especially earthquake.
To mount a SIU, lift latching lever first, then slide in the SIU firmly and
close latching levers confirming that levers are engaging with the shelf
securely.
To remove a SIU, lift latching levers and pull out the SIU.
MSTU is mounted to the K-shelf by means of MSTU adaptor as shown in
Figure 3-90. MSTU adaptor is fixed by screws to the K-shelf on MSTU
basis. MSTU has only one (1) latch at the bottom and two (2) mounting
screws at the top and bottom each.
Half-size SIU cards (BSW, OCC, HK, TCU, BSW INTF) have only one
latch at the bottom each, as shown in Figure 3-91. After mounting SIUs,
all SCSU cards are locked by pull-out protection metal plates, as shown
in Figure 3-92. SV and other full-size SIU cards have two latches at the
left and right each, s shown in Figure 3-91.
Figure 3-90 – Installing MSTU
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Half-size SIU
Full-size SIU
Figure 3-91 – Half size and full size SIUs
Mis-removal protection metal plate should be

installed to the upper side of SCSU unit shelf
by two fixing bolts.
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Figure 3-92 – Mis-removal protection for slide-in units on SCSU section
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.3 General BRU Installation Information
WARNING
BRU installation for RF CH expansion must be

carried out by suitably qualified service personnel.
Special care must be taken for BRU installation
because of some traffic interruption
3.6.2.2.3.1 Necessary Tool for BRU Installation
Necessary tools for BRU installation are listed in Table 3.30.
Table 3.30 - Necessary Tools for BRU Installation
Item Tool Name Remarks
1 Screw Driver 300 mm length
2 Torque Wrench
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.3.2 DUP/ADPT Installation

Duplexer/Adapter installation of U6G, 2+1 alternated operation using
CH1-CH3 and CH5-CH7 with SD is shown in Figure 3-93 as an example.
Transmit-Receive Duplexer (DUP) for

transmit and main receiver port to/from Adapter (ADPT) for space diversity (SD)
antenna system of H (V) polarization for reception port from antenna system of H (V)
future RF CH expansion. polarization for future RF CH expansion.
Semi-rigid cables to/from BRU block are Semi-rigid cable to BRU block is wired back
wired back side of K-shelf. side of K-shelf.
DUP/cables will be installed on site at the ADPT/cable will be installed on site at the
time of RF CH expansion. time of RF CH expansion.
Semi-rigid Cables
TAB0001-L448 TAB0001-L449
Semi-rigid Cable
TAB0001-L448
Metal Plate (Cover)

TA35002-3953
Shelf Front
Transmit-Receive Duplexer (DUP) for Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity (SD)
transmit and receiver port to/from antenna reception port from antenna system of V (H)
system of V (H) polarization. polarization.
Semi-rigid cables to/from BRU block are Semi-rigid cable to BRU block is wired back
wired back side of K-shelf. side of K-shelf.
DUP/cables are installed at factory. ADPT/cable is installed at factory.
Figure 3-93 – Top view of DUP/ADPT Installation
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Plug-in coaxial connectors of three (3) semi-rigid cables for TX, RX and SD RX sides
are fixed to the BRU block structure separately by two fixing bolts.
For the initial stage of U6G, 2+1 alternated operation, this plug-in connector fixing to
the BRU block structure are made at factory, however when the RF CH expansion of
more than 4+1 is planned in a future, the additional DUP/ADPT fixing will be made on
site at the time of RF CH expansion.
Plug-in coaxial connectors of

SD RX and RX sides
Plug-in coaxial connector

of TX side
Figure 3-94 – Front view of DUP/ADPT Installation
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
There are no DUP/ADPT on the top of Semi-rigid Cable

the expansion K-shelf
(TAB0001-L447)
Semi-rigid Cable
(TAB0001-L448)
Filter trays for TX/RX/SD RX

are plug-in’ed to the BRU
block connectors of K-shelf
independently by using slide
gauge and fixed by two (2)
fixing bolts.
Figure 3-95 – Side View of DUP/ADPT Installation
RF CH branching filter assembly on

filter tray for TX/RX/SD RX is plug-
in’ed to the BRU block connectors of
K-shelf by using slide gauge
independently and fixed by two (2)
fixing bolts.
On filter tray, maximum two RF filter
modules are mounted.
(Two (2) CH filters per module and
two (2) filter modules per tray).
WARNING
Filter tray fixing to the BRU block
structure for K-shelf shall be made
mandatorily with TX, RX and SD RX
trays from bottom up.
structure for expansion K-shelf shall
be made mandatorily with SD RX, RX
and TX trays from bottom up.
Figure 3-96 – Plug-in filter tray mounting into the BRU Block Structure
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.3.3 FIL TRAY Installation

RF CH filter module installation on filter tray for U6G, 2+1 alternated
operation using CH1-CH3 and CH5-CH7 with SD is shown in Figure 3-97
as an example.
RF plug-in coaxial connector for the Fixing bolt to the BRU block structure
BRU block structure to DUP
Semi-rigid cable
Semi-rigid cable
RF dummy load
Label (TX)
Drawing No.
Fixing bolt for RF

CH filter module
on filter tray
Equivalent BRU circuit of loss equalized TX BPF
Figure 3-97 – Filter Tray Installation of TX CH Filter
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Fixing bolt to the BRU block structure RF plug-in coaxial connector for the
BRU block structure from DUP
Semi-rigid cable
Semi-rigid cable
Dummy load Label (RX)
Drawing No.
Fixing bolt for RF

CH filter module
on filter tray
Equivalent BRU circuit of loss equalized RX BPF
Figure 3-98 – Filter Tray Installation of RX CH Filter
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Fixing bolt to the BRU block structure RF plug-in coaxial connector for the
BRU block structure from ADPT
Semi-rigid cable
Semi-rigid cable
Dummy load
Label (RX)
Drawing No.
Fixing bolt for RF

CH filter module
on filter tray
Equivalent BRU circuit of loss equalized SD RX BPF
Figure 3-99 – Filter Tray Installation of SD RX CH Filter
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.3.4 Semi-flexible Cable Connection between MSTU and BRU

RF coaxial cable connection between MSTU and BRU for K-shelf are
made by semi-flexible coaxial cable shown in Figure 3-100.
K-shelf FIL CN No.

REF FIL No.
BRU BEF BLOCK
F13 25 26 F15 29 30 BEF for

F14 27 28 F16 31 32 innermost CH
FIL CN No.
RF FIL No.
BRU BPF BLOCK
17 F9 18 19 F10 20 21 F11 22 23 F12 24 SDRX
9 F5 10 11 F6 12 13 F7 14 15 F8 16 RX
1 F1 2 3 F2 4 5 F3 6 7 F4 8 TX
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD
ADPT CN No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
MSTU ADPT No.
SCSU BLOCK
(1) Connections to/from MSTU are carried out by coaxial connectors on top of
MSTU adapter (TX, RX and SD).
(2) Detailed semi-flexible cable connection between BRU connector and MSTU
are shown in Figure 3-102.
(3) Abbreviation: CD: Cable number, CN: Connector Number
(4) BEFs are mounted only when innermost RF CH pair is allocated.
(for example, in case of U6 GHz band, CH8-CH1’ is innermost CH pair)
Figure 3-100 – Coaxial Connector Arrangement between MSTU and BRU (K-shelf)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Expansion K-shelf FIL CN No.

REF FIL No.
BRU BEF BLOCK
F13 25 26 F15 29 30 BEF for

F14 27 28 F16 31 32 innermost CH
FIL CN No.
RF FIL No.
BRU BPF BLOCK
17 F9 18 19 F10 20 21 F11 22 23 F12 24 TX
9 F5 10 11 F6 12 13 F7 14 15 F8 16 RX
1 F1 2 3 F2 4 5 F3 6 7 F4 8
SDRX
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD
ADPT CN No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
MSTU ADPT No.
SCSU BLOCK
(5) Connections to/from MSTU are carried out by coaxial connectors on top of
MSTU adapter (TX, RX and SD).
(6) Detailed semi-flexible cable connection between BRU connector and MSTU
are shown in Figure 3-102.
(7) Abbreviation: CD: Cable number, CN: Connector Number
(8) BEFs are mounted only when innermost RF CH pair is allocated.
(for example, in case of U6 GHz band, CH8-CH1’ is innermost CH pair).
WARNING
Please note that location of TX, RX and SD RX filter tray is different in K-

shelf and expansion K-shelf, that is, TX/RX/SD RX for K-shelf and SD
RX/RX/TX for expansion K-shelf from the bottom up.
Figure 3-101 – Coaxial Connector Arrangement between MSTU and BRU (Expansion K-shelf)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Cable Connection Between FIL CN and MSTU ADPT CN

(U6G, TX-CH=CH1-3, CH5-7, CH2-4 and CH6-8 with SD)
FIL Cord No Q'ty MSTU ADPT
CN No or DL ADPT No. CN No.
1 CD1 1 (1) CN1
2 CD2 1 (2) CN1
3 CD3 1 (3) CN1
4 CD4 1 (4) CN1
TX
5 CD5 1 (5) CN1
6 CD6 1 (6) CN1
7 CD7 1 (7) CN1
8 CD8 0 (8) CN1
9 CD9 0 (1) CN2
10 CD10 1 (2) CN2
11 CD11 1 (3) CN2
12 CD12 1 (4) CN2
13 CD13 1 (5) CN2 RX
14 CD14 1 (6) CN2
15 CD15 1 (7) CN2
16 CD16 1 (8) CN2
17 CD17 0 (1) CN3
18 CD18 1 (2) CN3
19 CD19 1 (3) CN3
20 CD20 1 (4) CN3 SD RX
21 CD21 1 (5) CN3
22 CD22 1 (6) CN3
23 CD23 1 (7) CN3
24 CD24 1 (8) CN3
Cable Connection between BEF and FIL

(U6G, TX-CH=CH1-3, CH5-7, CH2-4 and CH6-8 with SD)
BEF Cord or Q'ty A B Note
CN No DL
25 CD25 1 FIL13-25 ADPT-(1)-3 BEF-RXSD
26 CD26 1 FIL13-26 FIL9-17 FIL-BEF
27 CD27 1 FIL14-27 ADPT-(1)-2 BEF-RX
28 CD28 1 FIL14-28 FIL5-9 FIL-BEF
29 CD29 1 FIL15-29 ADPT-(8)-1 TX-BEF
30 CD30
1 FIL15-30 FIL16-31 BEF-BEF
31 CD31
32 CD32 1 FIL16-32 FIL4-8 BEF-FIL
Figure 3-102 – Typical Cable Connection between MSTU ADPT and BRU Block (As an
example of U6G, 7+1 Alternated Operation, K-shelf)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.4 BRU Expansion Component and Expansion Type

RF branching network installation for future RF CH expansion will be
made on site after purchasing necessary BRU expansion kit.
Table 3.31 - BRU Expansion Component and Expansion Type
Expansion DUP/ ADPT Kit BRU Filter Kit Type

Traffic
DUP ADPT Cables FIL FIL TRAY Cables Interruption
<N+1 Single pol.>
1+0 to 1+1 - - - - - 1set A No
1+1 to 2+1 - - - 2 or 3 - 1set B Yes-1
2+1 to 3+1 - - - - - 1set A No
3+1 to 4+1 - - - 2 or 3 2 or 3 1set C Yes-1
4+1 to 5+1 - - - - - 1set A No
5+1 to 6+1 - - - 2 or 3 - 1set B Yes-1
6+1 to 7+1 - - - - - 1set A No
<N+1 doble pol.>

1+0 to 1+1 - - - - - 1set A No
1+1 to 2+1 - - - 2 or 3 - 1set B Yes-1
2+1 to 3+1 - - - - - 1set A No
3+1 to 4+1 1 1 or 0 1set 2 or 3 2 or 3 1set D No
4+1 to 5+1 - - - - - 1set A No
5+1 to 6+1 - - - 2 or 3 - 1set B Yes-1
6+1 to 7+1 - - - - - 1set A No
<2x(N+1)>
2x(1+0) to 2x(1+1) - - - - - 2sets A No
2x(1+1) to 2x(2+1) - - - 4 or 6 - 2sets B Yes-1
2x(2+1) to 2x(3+1) - - - - - 2sets A No
2x(3+1) to 2x(4+1) - - - - - - E Yes-2
2x(4+1) to 2x(5+1) - - - - - 2sets A No
2x(5+1) to 2x(6+1) - - - 4 or 6 - 2sets B Yes-1
2x(6+1) to 2x(7+1) - - - - - 2sets A No
<Upgrade of SD>
w/o SD to w/t SD - 1 1set n 1 or 2 n-set F No
<Addition of BEF> - - - max. 3 - 1-set G Yes-3
Note: Traffic interruption time apportionment is as follows:

Yes-1: Cable connection removal on BRU + Removal of filter tray +
Expansion filter module mounting on filter tray + Plug-in of filter tray +
Cable connection on BRU
Yes-2: Cable connection removal on BRU + Plug-in of filter tray +
Cable wiring change of initial BRU + Inter-shelf cable connection
Yes-3: Cable removal/connection on BRU + Cable connection with BEF
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.5 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-A)

In this case the RF CH filter is already present inside the branching.
All you have to do is:
(1) Removal of dummy load of the CH filter.
(2) Semi-flexible coaxial cable connection between BRU and MSTU
adaptor. In this case no removal/plug-in on filter trays are needed.
Same approach applis to TX, RX and SD RX sections.
Semi-rigid cable
Semi-rigid cable
Dummy load
Label (TX)
Drawing No.
(1) Remove the dummy load from TX CH filter

(2) Connects between TX CH filter input connector
and TX connector on top of expanding MSTU
adapter by semi-flexible cable.
(3) Same manner for RX and SD RX CH filters.
Figure 3-103 – One RF filter expansion without addition of filter (U6G, 2+1 to 3+1 TX CH
expansion as an example)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.6 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-B)

In this case all you have to do is:
(1) Disconnect all semi-flexible cable connectors on BRU.
(2) Remove all filter trays (TX, RX and SD RX).
(3) Mount RF CH filter on filter tray with new coaxial cables.
(4) Plug-in filter tray to the BRU block.
(5) Cable connection on BRU.
3.6.2.2.6.1 Removal/Plug-in of Filter Tray

After disconnection of all semi-flexible cables on BRU, all filter trays of
TX/RX/SD RX are removed. After completion of RF CH filter expansion
on filter tray, filter trays are plug-in’ed to the BRU block. After plug-in and
fixing by bolts, all semi-flexible cable connections on BRU will be carried
out.
RF CH filter assembly (BRU AS) on filter

tray for TX/RX/SD RX is removed from
the BRU block connectors of K-shelf
independently by two fixing bolts.
After completion of RF CH expansion on
filter tray, filter trays are plug-in’ed to the
BRU block by using sliding gauge.
All cable connection on BRU are made
tightly.
WARNING

structure for expansion K-shelf shall be
made mandatorily with SD RX, RX and
TX trays from bottom up.
Figure 3-104 – Removal/Plug-in of Filter Tray
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.6.2 RF CH Filter Installation with Cables on FIL TRAY

(1) Remove the dummy load (or coaxial cable) on filter tray.
(2) Connect the two RF CH filters with new coaxial cable.
(3) Connect dummy load (or coaxial cable) to the new filter module.
(4) Fix the RF CH filter module on filter tray by two fixing bolts.
(1) Remove dummy load

from CIR connector of
existing filter module
(2) Connect the two filter

modules by new coaxial
cable.
(3) Connect dummy load to

the CIR output of new
RF CH module.
(4) Fix the new RF CH filter

module by two fixing
bolts.
Figure 3-105 – One Example of RF CH Expansion of TX CH Filter
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
(1) Remove the coaxial

cable with plug-in connector
(2) Connect the two RF CH

filter modules by new
coaxial cable.
(3) Connect the new filter

module with filter tray input
by coaxial cable with plug-
in connector.
(4) Fix the new RF CH filter

module by two fixing bolts.
Figure 3-106 – One Example of RF CH Expansion of RX/SD RX Filter
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.7 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-C)

This procedure is only for N+1 single-pol operation.
All you have to do for TX section, after mounting the new TX filter on the
new filter tray, is:
(1) Removal of existing TX filter tray.
(2) Removal of dummy load from CIR.
(3) Connection of the two filter trays by joint metal plate.
(4) Cable connection between existing and new filter module CIR.
(5) Plug-in to the BRU block and fixing.
(1) Removal of existing TX filter tray

(2) Removal of dummy load from CIR
(4) Coaxial cable connection between

circulators (CIR)
(5) Jointed two filter trays are plug-in’ed
to the BRU block structure and fixed
(3) Connection of the two filter New TX filter module already

trays by joint metal plate mounted on new filter tray
Figure 3-107 – RF CH Expansion of TX Filter from 3+1 to 4+1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
All you have to do for RX and RX SD sections, after mouting the new RX /
RX SD filter on the new RX / SD RX filter tray, is:
(1) Removal of existing RX / SD RX filter tray.
(2) Removal of coaxial cable with plug-in connector.
(3) Connection of the two filter trays by joint metal plate.
(4) Cable connection between existing and new filter module CIR.
(5) Connection between CIR port and existing tray input port.
(6) Plug-in to the BRU block and fixing.
(1) Removal of existing RX / SD RX

filter tray
(2) Removal of cable connection
between filter tray input and CIR of
the existing filter module
(4) Coaxial cable connection between

circulators (CIR)
(5) Cable connection between CIR of new
filter module and existing filter tray
input
(6) Jointed two filter trays are plug-in’ed to
the BRU block structure and fixed
(3) Connection of the two filter New RX / SD RX filter module

trays by joint metal plate already mounted on new filter tray
Figure 3-108 – RF CH Expansion of RX and SD RX Filter from 3+1 to 4+1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.8 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-D)

This procedure is only for N+1 double-pol operation.
(1) Addition of DUP/ADPT and connection to/from BRU block.
(2) Mount the RF CH filter module on the filter tray.
(3) Plug-in filter tray to the BRU block.
(4) Connect all of semi-flexible cables between BRU and MSTU.
3.6.2.2.8.1 Installation of DUP and ADPT

Installation of transmit-receive duplexer (DUP) and adapter (ADPT) for
SD reception input port are made at the top of the K-shelf as shown in
Figure 3-109.
Transmit-Receive Duplexer (DUP) for

transmit and receiver port to/from
antenna system of H (V) polarization.
Semi-rigid cables to/from BRU block are
wired back side of K-shelf.
DUP/cables are installed after removal of
DUP cover.
Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity (SD)

reception port from antenna system of H
(V) polarization.
Semi-rigid cable to BRU block is wired
back side of K-shelf.
ADPT/cable is installed after removal of
ADPT cover.
Figure 3-109 – Location of DUP and ADPT
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
(1) Cables are wired back side

of BRU block structure.
(2) Maximu of three (3) coaxial
cables with plug-in
connector are fixed on the
BRU block structure
independently.
Figure 3-110 – Cable Wiring to/from BRU Block
RX SD RX
connector connector
TX
connector
DUP/ADPT/Cable Installation Procedure

(1) DUP/ADPT installation after removal of cover
(2) Cable installation between DUP and BRU block structure (TX and RX), and
ADPT and BRU block structure (SD RX).
(3) Connection of DUP and two coaxial cables and ADPT and one coaxial cable.
Figure 3-111 – Plug-in Connector Location on BRU block structure
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.8.2 RF Filter Module Installation on Filter Tray

Installation of new RF filter module on filter tray is shown in Figure 3-112.
(3) Plug-in connector of coaxial cable is fixed

to the filter tray.
(4) Connect coaxial cable connector with the
CIR of new filter module.
Mounting guide
(5) Fix the new filter module tightly by two

(1) New filter module is put on the filter tray
fixing bolts after completion of cable
by using mounting guide
connection.
(2) Fix new filter module loosely by two fixing
bolts.
Figure 3-112 – RF Filter Module Installation on Filter Tray (TX side)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

to the filter tray.
(1) New filter module is put on the filter tray (5) Fix the new filter module tightly by
by using mounting guide two fixing bolts.
(2) Mount new filter module loosely by two
fixing bolts.
Figure 3-113 – RF Filter Module Installation on Filter Tray (RX / SD RX side)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.8.3 Filter Tray Installation to the BRU Block

Installtion of new filter tray (TX/RX/SD RX) to the BRU block is shown in
Figure 3-114.
RF filter module and cables are

assembled on filter tray for TX/RX/SD
RX independently.
After completion of RF CH filter
assembly, filter trays are plug-in’ed to
the BRU block structures separately
by using sliding gauge.
WARNING
structure for expansion K-shelf shall
be made mandatorily with SD RX, RX
and TX trays from bottom up.
After completion of filter tray plug-in to the BRU block, connection between BRU filter connectors and
MSTU adapter connectors are made by semi-flexible coaxial cables.
Figure 3-114 – Filter Tray Installation into the BRU Block
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.9 8.7 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-E)

This procedure is only for RF CH expansion from 2x(3+1) to 2x(4+1), that
is, addition of expansion K-shelf to the initial 2x(3+1) K-shelf.
In this case all you have to do is as follows:
(1) Disconnection of all semi-flexible cables on BRU of initial K-shelf.
(2) Removal of all filter trays and wiring change of initial BRU.
(3) Plug-in all trays and connect all semi-flexible cabel on initial BRU.
(4) Connection between initial K-shelf and expansion K-shelf by coax
cables.
3.6.2.2.9.1 Cable Wiring Change on TX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf

After removal of TX filter trays of both V- and H-polarization system, BRU
wiring change will be carried out as shown in Figure 3-115.
V (H)-polarized system H (V)-polarized system
(1) Remove two (2) dummy loads
(2) Fix two (2) metal fitting plates after removal of knobs.
(3) Connect two (2) coaxial cables with plug-in connector.
“TX” : TX output signal input from “TX” of expansion BRU
Figure 3-115 – Cable Wiring Change on TX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.9.2 Cable Wiring Change on RX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf

After removal of RX filter trays of both V- and H-polarization system, BRU
wiring change will be carried out as shown in Figure 3-116.
(1) Remove two (2) cables with plug-in
(2) Fix two (2) metal fitting plates after removal of knobs
(3) Connect two (2) cables with plug-in connector one end
(4) Connect two (2) cables with plug-in connector both ends
“RX1”: RX signal output from DUP to “RX1” port of expansion BRU

“RX2”: RX signal input from “RX2” port of expansion BRU
Figure 3-116 – Cable Wiring Change on RX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.9.3 Cable Wiring Change on SD RX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf

After removal of SD RX filter trays of both V- and H-polarization system,
BRU wiring change will be carried out as shown in Figure 3-117.
(1) Remove two (2) cables with plug-in
(2) Fix two (2) metal fitting plates after removal of knobs.
(3) Connect two (2) cables with plug-in connector one end
(4) Connect two (2) cables with plug-in connector both ends
“SD1”: SDRX signal output form ADPT to “SD1” port of expansion

BRU
“SD2”: SDRX signal input from “SD2” port of expansion BRU
Figure 3-117 – Cable Wiring Change on SDRX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.9.4 Semi-Rigid Cable Connection Between Initial and Expansion K-

shelves
After completion of BRU wiring change of initial K-shelf, coaxial cable
connection between initial and expansion K-shelves are made both V-
polarization and H-polarization as shown in Figure 3-118. And also
schematic block diagram of RF branching network of TX/RX/SDRX are
shown.
TX OUT SD RX in
DUP ADP DUP ADP
BPF BPF BPF BPF SD AD

DP
BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
CIR CIR
CIR CIR
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
P M1 M2 M3
P M1 M2 M3
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
Initial K-shelf
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
Initial K-shelf
CIR CIR
CIR CIR
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
M4 M5 M6 M7
M4 M5 M6 M7
Expansion K-shelf
Expansion K-shelf
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
SW(M1)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
RX IN
DP
SV
CIR CIR Five (5) semi-rigid

NFB
coaxial cables are
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
connected both sides

between initial K-
Connectors TERM
P M1 M2 M3 shelf and expansion
Initial K-shelf K-shelf for V- and H-
polarization BRU
CIR CIR
Expansion K-shelf
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
M4 M5 M6 M7
Connectors TERM
Expansion K-shelf
Figure 3-118 – Cable Connection Between Initial and Expansion K-shelves
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.9.5 Detailed Cable Connection between Initial and Expansion K-shelves

Detailed semi-rigid cable connection between initial K-shelf and
expansion K-shelf are made both V-polarization and H-polarization as
shown in Figure 3-119.
Initial Shelf (Left Side) Initial Shelf (Right Side)
SD2 SD2
SD1 SD1
RX2 RX2
RX1 RX1
TX TX
Expansion Shelf (Left Side) Expansion Shelf (Right Side)
TX TX
RX2 RX2
RX1 RX1
SD2 SD2
SD1 SD1
Inter-shelf cables are tied to the Inter-shelf cables are connected

metal holding plate after between initial K-shelf and
completion of connection to the expansion K-shelf along with shelf
BRU side of TX-TX, RX1-RX1, RX2-RX2,
SD1-SD1 and SD2-SD2.
(1) Maximum five (5) inter-shelf cable connections are needed for TX, RX
and SDRX.
(2) One cable for TX, two (2) cables for RX and SD RX per polarization.
(3) Inter-shelf cable connection is carried out to BRU through above holes
of shelves.
(4) After completion of connection, cables are tied to the metal holding
plates.
Figure 3-119 – Detailed Semi-Rigid Cable Connection between Initial and Expansion K-
shelves
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Initial K-shelf for 2x(3+1)
Fitting metal plate for inter-shelf coax cables
Expansion K-shelf for 2x(4+0)
Fitting metal plate for inter-shelf coax cables

Metal holding plate
Figure 3-120 – Typical Cable Connection Between Initial and Expansion K-shelves (Without
SD reception as an example)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.10 SD Upgrade Procedure (Type-F)

This procedure is only for upgrade installation from without SD to with SD.
(1) Addition of ADPT and cable connection to BRU block structure.
(2) Assemble the RF CH filter module and cable on the filter tray.
(3) Plug-in filter tray to the BRU block structure and fix.
(4) Connect semi-flexible cables between BRU and MSTU for SD.
3.6.2.2.10.1 Installation of ADPT

Installation of adapter (ADPT) for SD reception input port is made at the
top of the K-shelf as shown in Figure 3-121.
Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity

(SD) reception port from antenna
system of V (H) - polarization.
back side of the K-shelf.
ADPT/cable is installed after removal
of ADPT cover.
Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity

(SD) reception port from antenna
system of H (V) - polarization.
back side of the K-shelf.
ADPT/cable is installed after removal
of ADPT cover.
Figure 3-121 – Location of ADPT
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Cables are wired back side

of BRU block.
One coaxial cable with
plug-in connector is fixed
on the BRU block structure
for SD RX
Figure 3-122 – Cable Wiring to BRU Block
SD (H(V))
SD (V(H)) connector
connector
ADPT/Cable Installation Procedure

(1) ADPT installation after removal of cover
(2) Plug-in cable connection installation to the BRU block structure (SD position).
(3) Cable connection to the ADPT
Figure 3-123 – Plug-in Connector Location on BRU Block structure
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.10.2 RF Filter Module Installation on FIL TRAY

Installation of new RF filter module on filter tray is shown in Figure 3-124.

to the filter tray.
(1) New filter module is put on the filter tray (5) Fix the new filter module tightly by two
by using mounting guide fixing bolts.
(2) Mount new filter module loosely by two
fixing bolts.
Figure 3-124 – RF Filter Module Installation on Filter Tray (SD RX) (As an example of 1+1 SD
RX expansion)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.10.3 FIL TRAY Installation to the BRU Block

Installation of new filter tray (SD RX) to the BRU block is shown in Figure
3-125.
RF filter module and cables are

assembled on SD RX filter tray.
After completion of RF CH filter
assembly, filter tray is plug-in’ed to
the BRU block structures by using
sliding gauge.
WARNING
mandatorily with TX, RX and SD
RX trays from bottom up.
structure for expansion K-shelf
shall be made mandatorily with SD
RX, RX and TX trays from bottom
up.
After completion of filter tray plug-in to the BRU block, connection between BRU filter connector and
MSTU adapter SD connector is made by semi-flexible coaxial cables.
Figure 3-125 – Filter Tray Installation to the BRU Block Structure
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.2.11 BEF Installation Procedure (Type-G)

This procedure is for BEF installation when innermost RF channel is
allocated in a future expansion. In this case all you have to do is:
(1) Fixing BEFs to the BRU block of K-shelf.
(2) Remove semi-rigid cables between MSTU adaptor and BRU filter of
already installed innermost RF channel for TX, RX and SDRX.
(3) Plug-in newly installing MSTU of innermost RF channel.
(4) Connect cables between MSTU adaptor and BRU, and BEF for
innermost RF channel both existing and newly installing channels.
3.6.2.2.11.1 TX Side BEF

TX side BEF is composed of two (2) BEFs tuned to FRi, coaxial cable
between BEFs, fixing metal plate to the K-shelf and semi-rigid cables.
Metal fixing plate to K-shelf Connection cable 2 BEFs tuned to FRi
Figure 3-126 – Typical L6 GHz band TX side BEF as an example
3.6.2.2.11.2 RX/SDRX Side BEF

RX/SDRX side BEF is composed of two (2) BEFs tuned to FTi for RX and
SDRX side each, fixing metal plate to the K- shelf and semi-rigid cables.
Metal fixing plate to K-shelf 2 BEFs tuned to FTi
Figure 3-127 – Typical L6 GHz band RX/SDRX side BEF as an example
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.2.11.3 BEF Installation Procedure to the K-shelf

BEF installation procedure is as follows:
(1) Fix TX side BEF and RX/SDRX side BEF to the K-shelf BRU block by
fixing bolts.
(2) Disconnect cables between BRU filter and MSTU adaptor for
innermost RF channels.
(3) Connect cables between MSTU adaptor TX and TX side BEF input,
and between TX side BEF output and BRU filter input.
(4) Connect cables between MSTU adaptor RX and RX side BEF output,
and between RX side BEF input and BRU RX filter output.
(5) Connect cables between MSTU adaptor SD and SD side BEF output,
and between SD side BEF input and BRU SD filter output.
BEF filter fixing by two fixing bolts
Cable connections to/from TX/RX/SDRX
Figure 3-128 – Typical L6 GHz band RX/SDRX side BEF as an example
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.3 Shelf Connections

This section provides information on the inter shelf connections and user
interface connections between SRT 1F K-shelf radio equipment and
external equipment.
Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing or
maintaining the waveguide. These precautions ensure the safety of all
personnel and the protection of equipment.
Figure 3-129 shows the warning labels that are attached to all emitting
Figure 3-129 - Warning Labels
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.3.1 Waveguide Connection

Figure 3-130 shows the location of antenna port of SRT 1F K-shelf radio
equipment.
V(H)
MAIN SD
N+1, Single-feed Operation
V(H) H(V)
MAIN SD MAIN SD
N+1, Dual-feed Operation
V(H) H(V)
MAIN SD MAIN SD
2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation
Figure 3-130 - Antenna port location on top of K-shelf
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Waveguide Flange
Top of Rack
Top of
Waveguide
Figure 3-131 - Antenna port location on top of SRT1F K-shelf
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Waveguide connection is generally done by means of flexible and

twistable waveguide. Figure 3-132 shows the waveguide connections to
the equipment antenna port in the particular case of use of connection by
means of feeder.
WAVEGUIDE CONNECTOR
WAVEGUIDE
FLEXIBLE SECTION
GAS BARRIER
TWIST
Figure 3-132 - An example of Feeder Connection for Alternated Operation
Tools Required
• Step ladder for connecting wave guide
• Ratchet type set of socket wrenches
• Waveguide Allen keys
• Torque wrench for waveguide Allen keys
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Preparation
Do not connect feeder to the equipment until all the twists in the feeder
have been corrected. See Figure 3-133.
A person experienced in waveguide connections should carry out the
installation of the feeder to the equipment.
Figure 3-133 - Twisting Wave guides
Precautions
When the wave guides are connected to the radio equipment, pay
attention not to apply a forced twisting torque to the radio equipment side.
3.6.2.3.2 Connection of Primary DC Power Lead

This section provides the procedure for installing DC power and ground
cables in the equipment shelf and it shows the office power input terminal
identification.
As shown in Figure 3-134, DC power from primary power system is
connected with DC power supply terminal on user interface area (UIA)
block of K-shelf directly.
For optional BBIU shelf for optical MSP interface protection function, DC
power from primary power system is connected with DC power supply
connectors on BBIU shelf by means of AMP PS connectors.
Dual-feed DC power supply system (system-X and system-Y redundancy)
is available.
Tools Required
• DMM (Digital Multi-Meter)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
-48V DC Power for UIA block

from Office Power Supply
W/ C W/ C W- C W/ C DUP

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
SV
NFB
UIA Connectors TERM

Dual-feed available
both system-X and
system-Y
Expansion K-Shelf
Dual-feed available
UIA Connectors TERM both system-X and
system-Y
Figure 3-134 - DC power connection for K-shelf by crimp terminal
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
-48V DC Power
from Office Power Supply
Dual-feed available
both system-X and
system-Y
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
- V1 - V2 MSPSW 7
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN
CN 73
CN 74
CN75 CN 72 CN76
BBIU
CN78 CN 79 CN77
BBC
BB INTF P
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
[W1] [W2] [W3] [W4] [W5] [W6] [W7]
Figure 3-135 - DC power connection for optional BBIU shelf by AMP PS connectors
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Procedure
Prepare power lead and crimping terminal as specified on the local plan.
Main DC power distribution board side:
K-shelf equipment side:
Optional BBIU equipment side:
• Crimp terminal by using AMP hand crimping tool.
• Assemble the AMP PS connector
Figure 3-136 shows the cable sheath and terminal connection.
Figure 3-136 - Cable Sheath
1. Disconnect office power and use a voltmeter to ensure that the supply
rail is at zero volts (with reference to the earth ground).
2. Connect the red (0 V) lead to the 0V terminal.
3. Connect the blue (-48 V) lead to the -48V terminal.
4. Reconnect office power.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.3.2.1 Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment

The crimping method (Solderless) shall be applied to the power wiring
connecting terminal and to the indoor connection branching only.
Annealed copper only is used for this method.
Crimping Method
1. Choose the die fit for the cross-section area of the terminal to use.
2. Insert the terminal into the die section of the instrument and press the
terminal till it does not slip off. Then set the soldering portion of the
terminal body opposite to the male die while inserting the terminal
body to the centre of the die. Take care not to deform the terminal
when compressing it.
3. Start crimping the terminal after having ascertained that vary the
relative position of terminal and die
4. Insulating treatment at the compressed portion. This treatment shall
be performed as follows:
• More than 1 mm in width on the insulated sheath will be sealed. Wind
PVC tape with a half tape width pitch as required.
Figure 3-137 shows the method for crimping the terminal and the cable
conductor.
Figure 3-137 - Method of Crimping
Precautions
1. This equipment has the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Frame Ground
(FG) terminal. Therefore, if your station has an ESD Ground terminal,
connect to them. If difficult, connect to the FG of each equipment to
keep the same voltage level as FG.
2. While connecting the power lead, do not drop in any cable sheath or
cable fragments. It may cause short circuits or faulty units.
3. Ensure the cable is connected before turning on the main breaker.
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.3.2.2 AMP hand Crimping Tool (for optional BBIU shelf only)
This section provides application procedures for AMP hand crimping
tools. Figure 3-138 shows over view of AMP hand crimping Tool 23470-1,
which crimps the AMP Dynamic D-5 loose-piece tab and receptacle
contacts listed in Figure 3-139. The front of tool, into which wire is
inserted, has AMP marking. Wire Size Marking and the Contact Series
marking on it. The contact is inserted into the Back of the tool.
The tool features two fixed dies (crimper), two movable dies (anvils), a
locator/insulation stop, and a CERTI-CRIMP ratchet.
The locator/insulation stop has two functions:
first, it positions the contact between the crimper and anvil before
crimping; and second, it limits insertion distance of the stripped wire into
the contact. In use, it rests in the locator slot of the contact. The CERTI-
CRIMP ratchet assures full crimping of the contact. Once engaged the
ratchet will not release until the handles have been fully closed.
FRONT OF TOOL
Contact series name
CRIMPER
Wire Size
ANVIL
Tool No.
CIRTI-CRIMP RATCHET
Figure 3-138 - AMP hand Crimping Tool
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
WIRE STRIP LENGTH

4.5 to 5.0 mm
CONTACT Series: D-5(S)

WIRE SIZE CONTACT NO.: 316041-3
AWG: 16-14
Sq.(mm2): 1.23-2.27
Front of Tool(Wire Size)
Locator/Insulation stop
Contact Series Name
Contact
Wire Slot in Locator
Contact series Name
Wire Size
Wire Barrel
Stripped Wire
Locator slot(in contact)
Insulation Barrel
Tool No.
Figure 3-139 - AMP hand Crimping Method
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Crimping Procedure
• Hold the tool so FRONT is facing you.
• Make sure ratchet is released by squeezing the tool handles and
allowing them to open Fully.
• Holding contact by its mating portion and looking straight into front of
the crimp section, insert contact from the back into die set. Position
contact between crimpers so locator enters locator slot in contact.
• Holding contact in this position, squeeze tool handles together until
insulation barrel anvil starts entry into insulation crimper. DO NOT
deform insulation barrel or wire barrel.
• Insert a properly stripped wire through the wire slot in locator and into
wire barrel of contact until insulation butts against the
locator/insulation stop.
• Holding wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet
releases. Use both hands after the wire is fixed.
• Allow tool handles to open fully. Remove ped contact from tool.
CAUTION: Care shall be taken to ensure that the contact is set at the
good position (shown in Figure 3-140) for getting the contact crimped
satisfactory.
CRIMPER
LOCATOR
ANVIL
(a) Good Position (b) Bad Position
Figure 3-140 - Good position for satisfactory crimping
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.3.2.3 Assembling for AMP PS Connector (for optional BBIU shelf only)
After crimping of AMP contacts, assemble the rese-housing of AMP
connectors. Refer to Figure 3-141.
Insertion
Minus
Plus
AMP crimping contact
AMP rese-housing
Type : 1-1-179958-2
Figure 3-141 - Assembling of AMP Connector
3.6.2.3.3 Office Power Supply Check

This procedure verifies the office power for the radio equipment.
Tools Required
• Digital Multi Meter (DMM)
Procedure
• Remove the DC power connectors from the DC power terminal on user
interface area (UIA).
• Set the DMM scale to the 200 VDC range.
• Connect the positive/negative leads of the DMM to the DC power
terminal.
• Verify that the DC voltage is within –48 V ± 5% for –48V DC system.
If it is not, contact the installation group.
• Disconnect the DMM leads and connect the DC power connectors to the
DC power terminal on user interface area (UIA).
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.3.4 Frame Grounding for SRT 1F K-shelf

Figure 3-142 shows the shelf Ground connection of the SRT 1F K-shelf
radio equipment.
The Frame Ground of the each K-shelf should be connected to the station
ground bus at the top of the shelf.
If SRT 1F K-shelf is supplied with ETSI standard rack, the Frame Ground
should be connected to the station ground bus at the top of the equipment
rack.
Frame Ground Connection
W/ C W/ C W/ C W/ C DUP

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
SV
NFB
UIA Connectors TERM
Frame Ground Connection
Expansion K-shelf
UIA Connectors TERM
Figure 3-142 - Frame Grounding of the Equipment Shelf
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.3.5 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms

The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F
installation.
Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn Up
procedures.
3.6.2.3.6 Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors

The SMA semi rigid coaxial connectors are pre formed to exact lengths
for connection from the branch filter to the MSTU plug-in Adapter. The
transmitter output and receiver input are connected to the branching
network through the MSTU plug-in Adapter shown in Figure 3-143.
Careful handling should be used when fitting or removing the semi rigid
coaxial connectors, using the torque wrench with a setting of 21/Ncm.
Each end should be unscrewed before trying to remove the connector.
MSTU plug-in Adapter
SMA Connector
SMA Coaxial Connector
MN RX IN SD RX IN
TX RX SD
TX output
TX port: Transmitter OUT
RX: port: Main RX input
SD port: SD RX input
Top view of MSTU plug-in Adapter
MSTU
Figure 3-143 - MSTU plug-in Adapter and semi rigid coaxial cable connector
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.3.7 RF Branching Network Filter Connection
Figure 3-144 - RF Branching Network Filter connection

RF Branching network (BRU) connection to the BRU block is made on
two channel filter basis, that is, one filter module is composed of two RF
channel filters. In case of 1+1 alternated operation, for example, three
filer modules are needed with SD reception, one filter module is for
transmitter side, one filter module for receiver side, one filter module for
SD reception.
Two filter modules (for four RF channels) are mounted on one metal plate
and filter-mounted metal plate is plug-in’d to the BRU block to connect to
the DUP.
BRU future expansion will be made on two-channels filter basis. If the
added two-channels filter is to be inserted in the same branching feed
than the existing one, the expansion is made with some traffic
interruption. If the insertion of new filter is made on opposite polarization
than the existing one, no traffic interruption is achieved. If the branching is
already conceived from the beginning with all the filters required for future
expansions, the expansion itself can be done without any traffic
interruption, despite the expansion is made at the same polarization or at
opposite polarization than the working channels.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

connection that is done at the front panel of the BSW unit in SRT 1F K-
shelf.
Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 1.0/2.3 type and line impedance
is 75 ohms and unbalanced.
Coaxial cables of STM-1 signal are layed along the SCSU section front
structure to the right side cable inlet. At the cable inlet EMC-control
measure for cables are carried out. For detailed coaxial cable assembly
and EMC-control measure par. 3.7 and 3.8.
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
IN
STM-1 cable run to the cable inlet WS-S
OUT
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
OCC INTF

TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
IN
WS-R
OUT
Figure 3-145 - STM-1 Electrical Interface Connection
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.3.9 STM-1 optical signal Interface without MSP

Figure 3-146 shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between SRT 1F
K-shelf radio equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment that is
done on the PCB of the OPT BSW (Bipolar Switch for Optical Interface)
unit.
Optical coaxial cables of STM-1 signal are layed along the SCSU section
STM-1 Output
STM-1 Input
STM-1 optical cable run to cable inlet Optical cable

Connector
OPT BSW(M1)
OPT BSW(M2)
OPT BSW(M3)
OPT BSW(M1)
OPT BSW(M2)
OPT BSW(M3)
BSW INTF
OPT OCC
OPT OCC
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
Figure 3-146 - STM-1 Optical Interface Connection
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.3.10 STM-1 optical signal Interface with MSP (BBIU)

Figure 3-147 and Figure 3-148 show inter shelf connection between SRT
1F K-shelf and BBIU shelf in case of OPT MSP function and Figure 3-149
shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between BBIU equipment and
Optical Fiber Transmission equipment that is done on the PCB of the
OPT INTF (Optical signal Interface) unit. Optical Fiber connector type are
SC or FC type and they are accessible from front of the equipment rack.
Use of BBIU shelf is applicable in conjunction with K-shelf up to 7+1
AP/CC only. Use of BBIU shelf is not applicable in conjunction with K-
shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC.
BSW 1 BSW 2 BSW3 BSW 7

BRU
CMI IN
CMI OUT
STM-1
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
STM-1
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
CMI IN
CMI OUT
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU Y
TCU X
HK 1
HK 2
NFB1 OCC INTF

SV
NFB2
NFB3
NFB4
Connectors TERM
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
- V1 - V2
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN
CN 73
CN 74
CN 75 CN 72 CN 76
BBIU
CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
OCC OUT
BBC
OPT INTF P
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OCC IN
[M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
MSP SW: 1 2 3 7
Figure 3-147 - STM-1 Inter shelf connection of baseband signal
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf
Cable K-shelf BBIU shelf Cable Connector

No. type used
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU X
TCU Y
HK1
HK2
1 BSW1 CMI IN MSPSW1 OUT 1.5C-2V 1.0/2.3 type
2 BSW1 CMI OUT MSPSW1 IN 1.5C-2V 1.0/2.3 type
15 OCC INTF CMI IN MSPSW OCC OUT 1.5C-2V 1.0/2.3 type
16 OCC INTF CMI OUT MSPSW OCC IN 1.5C-2V 1.0/2.3 type
Optional BBIUShelf
OCCOUT
MSPSW1
MSPSW2
MSPSW3
MSPSW4
MSPSW5
MSPSW6
MSPSW7
OCCIN
Coaxial cables are

connected between
units on K-shelf and
OPT INTF(M1-X)
OPT INTF(M2-X)
OPT INTF(M5-X)
OPT INTF(M6-X)
OPT INTF(M7-X)
OPT INTF(M1-Y)
OPT INTF(M2-Y)
OPT INTF(M5-Y)
OPT INTF(M6-Y)
OPT INTF(M7-Y)
OPT INTF(PRT)
optional BBIU shelf

BBC
Figure 3-148 - STM-1 Inter shelf connection run between K-shelf and BBIU shelf
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

BRU
STM-1 STM-1
MSTU 1
MSTU 2
MSTU 3
MSTU 4
MSTU 5
MSTU 6
MSTU 7
MSTU 8
[P] [M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]

BSW INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU Y
TCU X
HK 1
HK 2
NFB1
SV
NFB2
NFB3
NFB4
Optical cable
Connectors TERM Connector
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
- V1 - V2
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
IN IN
CN 73
CN 74
OUT
IN
CN 75 CN 72 CN 76
BBIU
CN 78 CN 79 CN 77
BBC
OPT INTF P
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
[M1] [M2] [M3] [M4] [M5] [M6] [M7]
To/from Unit

OPT INTF unit
Figure 3-149 - STM-1 connection between SRT 1F radio equipment and Optical Fiber
Transmission equipment
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.3.11 Wayside Signal Cable Connection

Figure 3-150 shows the 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection on the front
panel of the BSW/OPT BSW unit in SRT 1F K-shelf.
Coaxial connectors on the BSW/OPT BSW unit are 1.0/2.3 type and line
Coaxial cables of Wayside Traffic signal are located along the SCSU
section front structure to the right side cable inlet. At the cable inlet EMC-
control measure for cables are carried out. For detailed coaxial cable
assembly and EMC-control measure par. 3.7 and 3.8.
IN
2.048 Mbit/s HDB3 IN
WS-S
OUT
2.048 Mbit/s HDB3 OUT
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
OCC INTF
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
IN
WS-R
WS coaxial cable run to cable inlet OUT
(HDB3, 75 ohms, unbalance)
Wayside Signal IN/OUT (HDB3, 12 ohms, balance)

available on the backplane
Figure 3-150 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2.3.12 Auxiliary Signal Cable Connection

Figure 3-151 and Figure 3-152 show the auxiliary (AUX) signal cable run
that is done on the connectors on the SCSU and UIA blocks of K-shelf
and Expansion K-shelf.
Detailed wiring and assembly for multi-pin connectors are shown in par.
3.7.
SCSU
Block
UIA
Block
Cables with Multi-pin

connectors for AUX signal
on UIA block are laid
through the left cable inlet
or under the shelf
Figure 3-151 - Auxiliary signal cable run for K-shelf
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
CN-64
CN-67
CN-65
CN-68
SCSU
Block
G
CN-45
CN-46
CN-47
CN-48
CN-49
CN-50
CN-51
CN-52
UIA
Block
Cables with Multi-pin

connectors for AUX signal
on UIA block are laid
through the left cable inlet
or under the shelf.
Figure 3-152 - Auxiliary signal cable run for expansion K-shelf
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-153 shows inter-shelf connection for auxiliary signals such as

radio protection switching (RPS) and supervisory/Control (SV) between
K-shelf and BBIU shelf in case of OPT MSP function.
K-shelf
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU X
TCU Y
HK1
HK2
Multi-pin cables between
connectors on K-shelf
and optional BBIU shelf
Optional BBIU Shelf
OCC OUT
MSPSW1
MSPSW2
MSPSW3
MSPSW4
MSPSW5
MSPSW6
MSPSW7
OCC IN
OPT INTF(M1-X)
OPT INTF(M2-X)
OPT INTF(M5-X)
OPT INTF(M6-X)
OPT INTF(M7-X)
OPT INTF(M1-Y)
OPT INTF(M2-Y)
OPT INTF(M5-Y)
OPT INTF(M6-Y)
OPT INTF(M7-Y)
OPT INTF(PRT)
BBC
Cable No. K-shelf BBIU shelf Description Connector type

1 CN42 CN78 BBIU-SSMB DHA40 multi-pin
2 CN44 CN76 CM-BUS DHA68 multi-pin
3 CN45 CN72 BBIU/EOW DHA68 multi-pin
Note: CN73-CN74 and CN76-CN77 are through patched by CD308 and CD304.
Figure 3-153 - Auxiliary signal cable inter shelf connection between K-shelf and BBIU shelf
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.2.3.13 Signal Cable Connection between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf

Figure 3-154 shows the connection between K-shelf and expansion K-
shelf for 2x(N+1) co-channel operation.
Detailed wiring and assembly for multi-pin connectors are shown in par.
3.7.
K-shelf
W/ C W/ C W/ C W/ C DUP
BPF BPF BPF BPF SD

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF
MSTU(PRT, V-pol) BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
Five semi-rigid Five semi-rigid

coaxial cables are coaxial cables are
connected between connected between
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BRUs of top and BRUs of top and

TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
bottom shelves for bottom shelves for

H(V)-polarization V(H)-polarization
SV
NFB
Connectors TERM
Expansion K-shelf
Connectors TERM
Inter-shelf connection
cables are laid
through UIA blocks
between K-shelf and
expansion K-shelf
Figure 3-154 - Inter-shelf signal cable run between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.3 Connector, Pin Assignment and Cable Connection
This section provides information on the connectors available on SCSU

and UIA blocks, relevant connector pin assignments and cable
connection for SRT 1F K-shelf equipment.
3.6.3.1 K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC

Figure 3-155 shows the multi-pin connector layout on the BWB of SCSU and
UIA blocks of K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC.
CN-40
CN-41
CN-47
CN-42
CN-46
SCSU
Block
CN-43
CN-44
CN-45
CN-11
CN-12
CN-13
CN-14
CN-15
CN-16
CN-17
CN-34
CN-21
CN-22
CN-23
CN-24
UIA
CN-33
CN-32
CN-31
Block
CN-1 CN-2
CN-3 CN-4
CN-5 CN-6
Figure 3-155 - Multi-pin connectors layout on K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Table 3.32 summarizes all connectors on the BWB of SCSU and UIA of
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC.
Table 3.32 –Connectors on the BWB on SCSU and UIA block of K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
No.
CN 1 EXT SX-1 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 2 EXT SY-1 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 3 T4 SX-0 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 4 T4 SY-0 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 5 T0 SX-MON Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 6 T0 SY-MON Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 21 HK 2 Housekeeping (DI/DO) – 1st HK unit Dsub 37 multi-pin
st
CN 22 HK 3 Housekeeping (DI/DO) – 1 HK unit Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 23 HK 4 Housekeeping (DI/DO) – 2nd HK unit Dsub 37 multi-pin
nd
CN 40 S INT/SSMB-1 Serial Interface 1 for 2x(N+1) slave DHA 80 multi-pin
CN 41 S INT/SSMB-2 Serial Interface 2 for 2x(N+1) master DHA 80 multi-pin
CN 42 BBIU1-SSMB Synchronous State Message Byte DHA 40 multi-pin
BUS 1 (*1)
CN 43 BBIU2-SSMB Synchronous State Message Byte DHA 40 multi-pin
BUS 2 (*1)
CN 44 CM-BUS Channel management BUS (*1) DHA 68 multi-pin
CN 45 BBIU/EOW Engineering Orderwire (*1) DHA 68 multi-pin
CN 46 OPT-BB No use DHA 40 multi-pin
CN 47 S INT2 CLK Use with SNMP SV in RS mode DHA 26 multi-pin
Note-*1: When optional BBIU shelf is used, this connector is in use.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for

Housekeeping port 1

HK1 UIA-CN34 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19
37 18
36 17
35 16
34 15
33 14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C
27 8 SD AGC SD AGC monitor (W1)
26 7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
25 6 AGC MON AGC monitor (W1)
24 5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping port 2


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
The following table shows the housekeeping bits pre-assignment in the

case of BSW Optical cards equipped.
Table 3.35 - Connector PIN assignment for HK2 (BSW Optical equipped)
PIN HK item when BSW PIN HK item when BSW
No. HK item Optical is inserted in No. HK item Optical is inserted in
slot W#n slot W#n
19
37 18 HK1 DO-8C W4 CONT2-
36 HK1 DO-8N W4 CONT2+ 17 HK1 DO-7C W4 CONT1-
29 HK1 DO-1N W2 CONT1+ 10 HK-Common Common SG
28 HK-Common Common SG 9 HK1 DI-15 W4 ALM3
27 HK1 DI-16 W4 PSFAIL 8 HK1 DI-13 W4 ALM1
26 HK1 DI-14 W4 ALM2 7 HK1 DI-11 W3 ALM3
20 HK1 DI-2 W1 ALM2 1 FG FG
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping port 3


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

slot W#n slot W#n
19
37 18 HK1 DO-16C OCC CONT2-
36 HK1 DO-16N OCC CONT2+ 17 HK1 DO-15C OCC CONT1-
35 HK1 DO-15N OCC CONT1+ 16 HK1 DO-14C W7 CONT2-
29 HK1 DO-9N W5 CONT1+ 10 HK-Common Common SG
28 HK-Common Common SG 9 HK1 DI-31 OCC ALM3
27 HK1 DI-32 OCC PSFAIL 8 HK1 DI-29 OCC ALM1
26 HK1 DI-30 OCC ALM2 7 HK1 DI-27 W7 ALM3
20 HK1 DI-18 W5 ALM2 1 FG FG
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping port 4


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 5


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for Radio User

Channel

RUC UIA-CN33 Dsub 25

PIN PIN
13 SG Signal Ground
15 U2T DN (O) CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS 2 U1T DP (O) CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS
14 U2T DP (O) CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS 1 FG Frame Ground
13
25
14 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm

BUS

RAB UIA-CN31 Dsub 15

PIN PIN
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 5
12 NE ALM-C NE alarm (C) 4
11 3
10 2
9 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for EOW


EOW UIA-CN32 Dsub 15

PIN PIN

15 E2 IN R (IN) 4WR E2ch R 7 E2-OUT T (OUT) 4WS E2ch T
11 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line 3 E1-IN T (IN) 4WR E1ch T
10 E1-IN R (IN) 4WR E1ch R 2 E1-OUT T (O) 4WS E1ch T
9 E1-OUT R (O) 4WS E1ch R 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9
1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC


WS/UC 1 UIA-CN11 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19 SG Signal Ground
33 SUC RTDN (O) RADIO side TDATA (N) 14 SUC LRDP ( I ) LINE side RDATA(P)
32 SUC RTDP (O) RADIO side TDATA (P) 13 SG Signal Ground
21 SUC LTN (O) LINE side TDATA (N) 2 WSS IN P ( I ) SOH WS IN (P)
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Coaxial Connector assignment for External

Clock
Coaxial Connectors as per Table 3.44, located on UIA block, are used for
IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz sine wave or
2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be set by LCT.

No.
CN 1 EXT SX-1 Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,

2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system
CN 2 EXT SY-1 Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system
CN 3 T4 SX-0 Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 4 T4 SY-0 Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 5 T0 SX-MON Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for
X-system
CN 6 T0 SY-MON Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
Y-system
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector assignment for RS mode

One (1) coaxial cable with DHA-26pin straight and DHA-26pin right angle
connectors is needed between SNMP SV GP1/GP2 unit front connector
and SINTCLK connector (CN-47) on SCSU BWB when operation mode is
set to “RS”. The operation setting can be set by Web LCT. In case of
“MS” mode, no cable connection is needed.
Table 3.45 - Cable connection for Operation Mode “RS”

Connector on SV unit Connector on SCSU Connector Type
S INT2 CLK CN 47 (SINT2 CLK) DHA 26 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.3.2 Coaxial Cable connection for Optional BBIU

For STM-1 optical with MSP function, coaxial cable connections between
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC and optional BBIU shelf are required.
3.6.3.2.1 Multi-pin Connector Layout on the BWB of BBIU

Figure 3-156 shows the multi-pin connectors layout on BBIU shelf and
Table 3.46 shows the connectors on BBIU shelf.
MSPSW1
MSPSW2
MSPSW3
MSPSW4
MSPSW5
MSPSW6
MSPSW7
-V1 -V2
CN65
CN66
CN67
CN68
CN76
CN76
CN80 CN75 CN72 CN76
CN81 CN78 CN79 CN77

OPT INTF Y (M1)
OPT INTF X (M2)
OPT INTF Y (M2)
OPT INTF X (M3)
OPT INTF Y (M3)
OPT INTF X (M4)
OPT INTF Y (M4)
OPT INTF X (M5)
OPT INTF Y (M5)
OPT INTF X (M6)
OPT INTF Y (M6)
OPT INTF X (M7)
OPT INTF Y (M7)

OPT INTF X(M1)
OPT INTF P
BBC
Figure 3-156 - Multi-pin Connectors Layout on BBIU Shelf
Table 3.46 - Connectors List on BBIU shelf

CN No Description Remark Connector Type
CN 65 UC 1, 2 User Channel (F1 byte) D-sub 37 ulti-pin
CN 66 UC 3, 4 User Channel (F1 byte) D-sub 37 multi-pin
CN 67 UC 5, 6 User Channel (F1 byte) D-sub 37 multi-pin
CN 68 UC 7 User Channel (F1 byte) D-sub 37 multi-pin
CN 72 EOW IN Engineering Order Wire Input DHA68 multi-pin
CN 73 EOW OUT Engineering Order Wire Output DHA68 multi-pin
CN 74 EOW TERM Engineering Order Wire Termination DHA68 multi-pin
CN 75 CMB IN Channel Management BUS IN DHA68 multi-pin
CN 76 CMB OUT Channel Management BUS OUT DHA68 multi-pin
CN 77 CMB TERM Channel Management BUS Termination DHA68 multi-pin
CN 78 SSMB Synchronous Status Management Byte BUS DHA40 multi-pin
CN 79 DCC Data Communication Channel DHA80 multi-pin
CN 80 OCC OUT Occasional signal Output 27CP coaxial
CN 81 OCC IN Occasional signal Input 27CP coaxial
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.3.2.2 Inter-shelf connection for N+1 AP/CC Operation

Table 3.47 shows the inter-shelf connection list between K-shelf and
BBIU shelf for N+1 AP/CC operation.
Table 3.47 - Inter-shelf connection between K-shelf and BBIU shelf for N+1 AP/CC
Description K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC BBIU shelf Remarks
SSMB CN 42 CN 78
CMB CN 44 CN 75
EOW CN 45 CN 72
DCC CN 53 on ECU1 CN 79
EOW termination CN 73 – CN 74 thru by CD308
CMB termination CN 76 – CN 77 thru by CD304
3.6.3.2.3 Inter-shelf connection for 2x(N+1) CC Operation

Table 3.48 shows the inter-shelf connection list among the main K-shelf
and BBIU shelves for 2x(N+1) CC operation. Table 3.49 shows the inter-
shelf connection list between BBIU shelves for 2x(N+1) CC operation
Table 3.48 - Inter-shelf connection between K-shelf and BBIU shelf for 2x(N+1) CC
Description K-shelf 1 K-shelf 2 BBIU shelf 1 BBIU shelf 2
SINTF-2 CN 41 CN 40
SSMB 1 CN 42 CN 78
SSMB 2 CN 43 CN 78
CMB-BUS CN 44 CN 75
OW CN 45 CN 72
DCC1 CN 53 on ECU1 CN 79
DCC2 CN 53 on ECU2 CN79
Table 3.49 - Inter-shelf connection between BBIU shelves for 2x(N+1) CC

Description BBIU shelf 1 BBIU shelf 2 Remarks
EOW CN 73 CN 72
EOW termination CN 73 – CN 74 thru by CD308
CMB CN76 CN75
CMB termination CN 76 – CN 77 thru by CD304
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.3.3 K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC

UIA blocks of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC.
Figure 3-157 - Multi-pin connectors layout on K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC.
Table 3.50 - Connectors on the BWB on SCSU and UIA block of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC
No.
CN 40 WS/UC 1-1 Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 43 EXT TX-1 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 44 EXT TY-1 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 46 T4 SX-0 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 47 T4 SY-0 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 48 T0 SX-MON Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 49 T0 SY-MON Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 53 HK 5 Housekeeping (DI/DO) – 2nd HK unit Dsub 37 multi-pin
nd
st
st
CN 63 S INT2 CLK Use with SNMP SV in RS mode DHA26 multi-pin
CN 64 EXPAND-2 Inter-shelf cable (*1) DHA80 multi-pin
CN 65 GP1 USW GP1 USW data (*1) DHA50 multi-pin
CN 66 S-INT/CLK Terminate by means of TA21570-C901 Z-pack60 multi-pin
for operation without expansion K-shelf
and remove with expansion K-shelf
CN 67 EXPAND-1 Inter-shelf cable (*1) DHA80 multi-pin
CN 68 GP2 USW GP2 USW data (*1) DHA50 multi-pin
(Note-*1): When expansion K-shelf is used, this connector is in use.
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC Connector PIN assignment for

Housekeeping port 1


PIN PIN
19
37 18
36 17
35 16
34 15
33 14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C
27 8 SD AGC SD AGC monitor (W1)
26 7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
25 6 AGC MON AGC monitor (W1)
24 5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping port 2


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

slot W#n slot W#n
19
37 18 HK1 DO-8C 2W1 CONT2-
36 HK1 DO-8N 2W1 CONT2+ 17 HK1 DO-7C 2W1 CONT1-
29 HK1 DO-1N 1W1 CONT1+ 10 HK-Common Common SG
28 HK-Common Common SG 9 HK1 DI-15 2W1 ALM3
27 HK1 DI-16 2W1 PSFAIL 8 HK1 DI-13 2W1 ALM1
26 HK1 DI-14 2W1 ALM2 7 HK1 DI-11 1W3 ALM3
20 HK1 DI-2 1W1 ALM2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping port 3


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

slot W#n slot W#n
19
37 18 HK1 DO-16C 2OCC CONT2-
36 HK1 DO-16N 2OCC CONT2+ 17 HK1 DO-15C 2OCC CONT1-
33 HK1 DO-13N 1OCC CONT1+ 14 HK1 DO-12C 2W3 CONT2-
29 HK1 DO-9N 2W2 CONT1+ 10 HK-Common Common SG
28 HK-Common Common SG 9 HK1 DI-31 2OCC ALM3
27 HK1 DI-32 2OCC PSFAIL 8 HK1 DI-29 2OCC ALM1
26 HK1 DI-30 2OCC ALM2 7 HK1 DI-27 1OCC ALM3
25 HK1 DI-28 1OCC PSFAIL 6 HK1 DI-25 1OCC ALM1
24 HK1 DI-26 1OCC ALM2 5 HK1 DI-23 2W3 ALM3
20 HK1 DI-18 2W2 ALM2 1 FG FG
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping port 4


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 5


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC Connector PIN assignment for Radio User

Channel

RUC UIA-CN45 Dsub 25

PIN PIN
13 SG Signal Ground
15 U2T DN (O) CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 2 U1T DP (O) CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS
4WS
14 U2T DP (O) CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 1 FG Frame Ground
4WS
13
25
14 1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm

BUS

RAB UIA-CN57 Dsub 15

PIN PIN
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 5
12 NE ALM-C NE alarm (C) 4
11 3
10 2
9 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC Connector PIN assignment for EOW


EOW UIA-CN58 Dsub 15

PIN PIN

11 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line 3 E1-IN T (IN) 4WR E1ch T
10 E1-IN R (IN) 4WR E1ch R 2 E1-OUT T (O) 4WS E1ch T
9 E1-OUT R (O) 4WS E1ch R 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9
1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

WS/UC 1-1 UIA-CN40 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19 SG Signal Ground
27 SUC RRDN ( I ) RADIO side 8 WSR IN P ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (P)
RDATA(N)
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC Coaxial Connector assignment for External

Clock
Coaxial Connectors as per Table 3.62, located on UIA block, are used for
IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz sine wave or
2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be set by LCT.

No.
CN 43 EXT SX-1 Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,

CN 44 EXT SY-1 Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
CN 46 T4 SX-0 Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 47 T4 SY-0 Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 48 T0 SX-MON Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
X-system
CN 49 T0 SY-MON Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
Y-system
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC Connector assignment for RS mode

One (1) coaxial cable with DHA-26pin straight and DHA-26pin right angle
connectors is needed between SNMP SV GP1/GP2 unit front connector
and SINTCLK connector (CN-63) on SCSU BWB when operation mode is
set to “RS”. The operation setting can be set by Web LCT. In case of
“MS” mode, no cable connection is needed.
Table 3.63 - Cable connection for Operation Mode “RS”

Connector on SV unit Connector on SCSU Connector Type
S INT2 CLK CN 63 (SINT2 CLK) DHA 26 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.3.4 Expansion K-shelf

Expansion K-shelf is used in conjunction with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC in
order to achieve higher CCDP capacity configuration up to 2x(7+1)/2x(8+0)
CC.
UIA blocks of Expansion K-shelf.
CN-64
CN-67
CN-65
CN-68
SCSU
Block
G
CN-45
CN-46
CN-47
CN-48
CN-49
CN-50
CN-51
CN-52
UIA
Block
Figure 3-158 - Multi-pin connectors layout on K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Table 3.64 - Connectors on the BWB on SCSU and UIA block of Expansion K-shelf
No.
CN 64 EXPAND-2 Inter-shelf connection with K-shelf DHA80 multi-pin
CN 65 GP1 USW GP1 USW data DHA50 multi-pin
CN 67 EXPAND-1 Inter-shelf connection with K-shelf DHA80 multi-pin
CN 68 GP2 USW GP2 USW data DHA50 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Expansion K-shelf Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

WS/UC 1-4 UIA-CN 45 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19 SG Signal Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.3.4.1 Inter-shelf connection between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf

Table 3.47 shows the inter-shelf connection list between K-shelf and
expansion K-shelf.
Table 3.66 - Inter-shelf connection between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf

Description K-shelf up to 2x(3+1)CC Expansion K-shelf
EXPAND-1 CN 67 CN 67
with G-Terminal G G
EXPAND-2 CN 64 CN 64
GP1 USW CN 65 CN 65
GP2 USW CN 68 CN 68
EXPAND-1 cable is equipped with ground terminal cable as shown in the

following figure.
80-pin connector
marked with “CN67”
with ground terminal
Figure 3-159 - EXPAND-1 inter-shelf cable
3.6.3.4.2 Shift of slide-In-Unit from K-shelf to Expansion K-shelf

When expanding an already installed 2x(N+1) CC system (N<4),
deployed with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC, by means of Expansion K-shelf,
if occasional traffic units are equipped in existing K-shelf up to 2x(3+1)
CC, such cards shall be shifted from initial K-shelf to Expansion K-shelf.
Table 3.67 - Slide-in-unit shift from Initial K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC to Expansion K-shelf
Unit Name From Initial K-shelf To Expansion K-shelf
OCC INTF Remove Plug-in

OPT OCC Remove Plug-in
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.3.4.3 CCC ADPT cards and base band inter-shelf connections

Inter-shelf cable connections between K-shelf and expansion K-shelf by
means of proper CCC (Cable Connection Card) units (named CCC ADPT
E for Expansion K-shelf and CCC ADPT I for Initial K-shelf) are required.
Initial Shelf for 2x(3+1)
Inter-shelf cable Inter-shelf cable

connection connection
CCC ADPT I
CCC ADPT I
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW)M2)
BSW(M3)
CCC ADPT I CCC ADPT I
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK-1
HK-2
V (H) system H (V) system
SCSU
Block
STM-1 x2 STM-1 x2
Wayside x4 Wayside x4
Cont/ALM x1 UIA Cont/ALM x1
Block
Expansion Shelf for 2x(4+0)

CCC ADPT E
CCC ADPT E
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CCC ADPT E CCC ADPT E

BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
V (H) system H (V) system
SCSU
Block
UIA
Block
Figure 3-160 - Inter-Shelf Coaxial Cable Connection and Unit Shift
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Detailed Inter-shelf connection cables between initial and expansion

shelves on CCC ADPT cards are shown in the following tables. Coaxial
cables for STM-1 and wayside channels have 27cp connectors and 2m
length. Multi-pin cable for Cont/ALM has got DHA26 type connectors and
2m length.
Table 3.68 - Inter-shelf coaxial connections between CCC ADPT cards

Connector label Connector label
Signal to CCC ADPT I to CCC ADPT E Cable Code
on initial shelf on expansion shelf
STM-1 IN (L) 156M CMI IN 156M CMI OUT TA70001-2076A4

STM-1 OUT (L) 156M CMI OUT 156M CMI IN TA70001-2076A4
STM-1 IN (R) 156M CMI IN 156M CMI OUT TA70001-2076A4
STM-1 OUT (R) 156M CMI OUT 156M CMI IN TA70001-2076A4
2M WSS IN (L) 2M WSS IN 2M WSS OUT TA70001-2288A1
2M WSS OUT (L) 2M WSS OUT 2M WSS IN TA70001-2288A1
2M WSR IN (L) 2M WSR IN 2M WSR OUT TA70001-2288A2
2M WSR OUT (L) 2M WSR OUT 2M WSR IN TA70001-2288A2
2M WSS IN (R) 2M WSS IN 2M WSS OUT TA70001-2288A1
2M WSS OUT (R) 2M WSS OUT 2M WSS IN TA70001-2288A1
2M WSR IN (R) 2M WSR IN 2M WSR OUT TA70001-2288A2
2M WSR OUT (R) 2M WSR OUT 2M WSR IN TA70001-2288A2
Note*: STM-1 IN (L) means the STM-1 connection on left side CCC ADPT
card and STM-1 IN (R) means the STM-1 connection on right side
CCC ADPT card.
Table 3.69 - Inter-shelf multi-pin connection between CCC ADPT cards

Connector label Connector label
Signal to CCC ADPT I to CCC ADPT E Cable Code
on initial shelf on expansion shelf
Control & Alarm CCC ADPT I CCC ADPT E TA70001-2287A1

(CN 16) (CN 16) (DHA-26 pin)
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Detailed connector port on CCC ADPT card is shown in the following

figures.
156M CMI IN
156M CMI OUT
CN
2M WSS IN
ALM/ 2M WSS OUT
CN16
CONT
2M WSR IN
2M WSR OUT
CN
Figure 3-161 - Cable Connection Card (CCC ADPT I)
156M CMI OUT

156M CMI IN
CN
2M WSS OUT
ALM/ 2M WSS IN
CN16
CONT
2M WSR OUT
2M WSR IN
CN
Figure 3-162 - Cable Connection Card (CCC ADPT E)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.3.4.4 Inter-connection cables between MSTUs

Inter-connection cables between MSTU of RPS1 and MSTU of RPS2 for
2x(N+1) CCDP operation are needed on radio frequency channel basis.
Three coaxial cables (7m length) with angle connectors 1.0/2.3 both sides
are required for XPIC IN, XPIC OUT and REF I/O SYNC.
Maximum twelve (12) cables for

2x(7+1) CCDP operation are
fed through metal square
sockets located top right and
DUP ADPT DUP ADPT
left of BRU block of K-shelf and
expansion K-shelf.
Three (3) coaxial cables from

MSTU (V) are fed up vertically
to the BRU and connected with
MSTU (H) through square
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
sockets located both sides of

the shelf.
Max. 3x4=12 cables in total.
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SV
Square
socket for
XPIC cable
feed between
Connectors TERM MSTUs
Figure 3-163 - Cable Connection between MSTUs in CCDP operation by means of

K-shelf 2x(3+1) ST
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Maximum twelve (12) cables for 2x(3+1) and Three (3) coaxial cables from MSTU (V/H) are
2x(4+0) CCDP operation are fed separately fed up vertically and connected with MSTU
through metal square sockets located both (V/H) through square sockets located both
sides of the K-shelf of each rack. sides of shelf.
Max. 3x4=12 cables in total
DUP ADPT DUP ADPT

MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
OCC INTF
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU1
TCU2
HK1
HK2
SV
Connectors TERM Connectors TERM
Figure 3-164 - Cable Connection between MSTUs in CCDP operation by means of

K-shelf 7+1
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
There are two (2) types of XPIC cable installation location as shown in the
following figures. One is on the rack fixing structure , the other is on the
metal angle of SRT1F rack side.
XPIC cable installation location
is on the SRT1F rack fixing
structure
Rack fixing structure
XPIC cable
wrapped
Figure 3-165 - XPIC Cable Installation Location on the rack fixing structure
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Rack fixing structure
XPIC cable installation

location is on the metal
angle of rack side for the
initial K-shelf.
XPIC cable
wrapped
XPIC cable installation

location is on the metal
angle of rack side for the
expansion k-shelf.
Figure 3-166 - XPIC Cable Installation Location on the SRT1F rack side
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.7 Wiring and Assembly for Connectors

This section provides information on the wiring and assembly for the
connectors of various types used in the radio equipment for external
connections.
3.7.1 Wiring and Assembly for Multi-pin Connectors
3.7.1.1 Assembly for the D-sub Connector (15-pin)

Figure 3-167 below shows the assembly for D-sub 15-pin connector.
a 2
Solder the wire (1) to the pin of the connector
(2).
8 Beforehand, slip the heat-shrink tubing (8) of
appropriate length over the wire, after soldering,
heat the tubing to shrink around the connector
pin.
1
b 3
Attach the cover (3) to the connector (2), as

shown in the figure b.
Fix the multi-cable part of wires (1) with

the cable clamp (4).
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
d
Cable clamp was fixed.
e
5
Put the cover (5) on the cover of opposite

side.
6 7
f
Fix the cover (5) with the screw (6) and the nut
(7).
7
6
Figure 3-167 - Assembly for the D-sub Connector (15-pin)
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

a
2
Solder the wire (1) to the pin of the
8 connector (2).
Beforehand, slip the heat-shrink tubing (8)
of appropriate length over the wire, after
1 soldering, heat the tubing to shrink around
the connector pin.
b 3
Attach the cover (3) to the connector
(2), as shown in the figure b.
Fix the multi-cable part of wires (1) with

the cable clamp (4).
4
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
e
5
Put the cover (5) on the cover of

opposite side.
6 7
f
Fix the cover (5) with the screw (6) and

the nut (7).
7 6
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

a
2 Solder the wire (1) to the pin of the
connector (2).
8 Beforehand, slip the heat-shrink tubing
(8) of appropriate length over the wire,
after soldering, heat the tubing to shrink
around the connector pin.
3
b
Attach the cover (3) to the connector
(2), as shown in the figure b.
4 Fix the multi-cable part of wires (1)

with the cable clamp (4).
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
d
e
5
Put the cover (5) on the cover of opposite

side.
6 7
f
Fix the cover (5) with the screw (6) and

the nut (7).
7 6
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.7.2 Wiring and Assembly for Coaxial Connectors
3.7.2.1 Assembly for the 1.0/2.3 type Coaxial Connector

Figure 3-170 below shows the assembly for 1.0/2.3 type connector.
Slip the boot (2) and the outer ferrule (3)
a over the coaxial cable (1).
Cut the sheath (4), the braid of outer
conductor (5), insulator (6), and inner
conductor (7) into the size as shown in the
1 2 5 6 7 figure.
Note Do not damage the sheath(4), the
braid (5), the insulator (6), or the inner
conductor (7), by cutting too deeply.
Tin the inner conductor (7) before soldering.
3 4
Note Be careful not to melt the insulator
(6) by excess heat .
Insert the inner conductor (7) into the contact (8) until the contact just
touches the insulator (6).
b
Solder the inner conductor (7) to the contact
8 (8).
Note Be careful not to melt the insulator (6)
by excess heat .
Note Shave off the bulge of excess solder
along with the cylindrical surface of the
6 contact (8).
Spread the end of the braid (5) slightly as

c shown in the figure c.
Insert the inner ferrule (10) (part of
5 connector body (9)) into the cable braid (5)
and insert the cable assembly into the body
centre until the end of insulator (6) butts into
the body.
*1 Equipment accessory
10
9
*1
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
d
Slide the outer ferrule (3) over the braid as
11
*2
shown in figure d.
Crimp the outer ferrule (3) with the crimping
tool through the die (11).
a Measuring point for crimp height.
3 Note Crimp heights should be the value
shown in table below.
Tool Die Tool set name Crimp height
CR-H-300 RFD-1 CR-H-1163 A,B,C：
357J-13134 HRFD-1 ditto 5.08-5.30 mm
*2 Maintenance accessory
a
Gap between the contact (8) and the end of

the insulator (6) should be 0 to 0.24 mm.
Gap between the outer ferrule (3) and the
body (9) should be 0.5 mm or less.
Cover the outer ferrule (3) with the boot (2).
Figure 3-170 - Assembly for 1.0/2.3 Coaxial Connector
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.8 Coaxial Cable Installation for EMC Requirement

This section provides information on the coaxial cable installation for
EMC-control measure.
Relevant coaxial cables are STM-1 electrical interface cable and wayside
traffic cable (when 75-ohm unbalanced application is employed.) to/from
BSW/OPT BSW unit of SCSU block.
3.8.1 Coaxial Cable Wiring Installation
Figure 3-171 and Figure 3-172 show the image of coaxial cable
installation for EMC-control measure for K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC and for
Coaxial cables with 1.0/2.3 straight

connector for STM-1 signal
(max. 14 cables, 2 cables/STM-1)
Coaxial cables with 1.0/2.3 straight

Coaxial cable inlet for
connector for wayside traffic signal
EMC-control measure
Figure 3-171 - Coaxial Cable Installation for EMC-control for K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Coaxial cables with straight

connector for STM-1 signal
Coaxial cables with straight

connector for wayside traffic signal Coaxial cable inlet for
EMC-control measure
Figure 3-172 - Coaxial Cable Installation for EMC-control for K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.8.2 EMC-control Measure at the Coaxial Cable Inlet
Figure 3-173 shows the EMC-control measure at the coaxial cable inlet of
SCSU block. Coaxial cables of STM-1 electrical and wayside traffic signal
are stripped off the cable jacket, bind in the cable holder, press the metal
plate with conduction rubber and lock the metal plate.
Strip off all cable jackets of Close the metal plate window
both STM-1 and wayside with conduction rubber
traffic cables at the inlet cabel
Press the metal plate window
holder (Approx. 20 mm in
with enough contact strength.
width)
Fix the metal plate window by
Bind the stripped cables to the
fixing bolts.
cable holder by strap cords
Figure 3-173 - Coaxial Cable Inlet for EMC-control Measure
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.8.3 Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables
Figure 3-174 and Figure 3-175 show the coaxial cable run and wiring &
assembly.
All STM-1 cables are bound together at

the cable holder 1-1.
Cable length confirmation with margin on
each BSW/OPT BSW basis.
Wiring and assembly of 1.0/2.3 straight
coaxial connector
Cable wiring to each BSW/OPT BSW unit
and cable binding.
OCC INTF Cable holder 1-1

BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Cable holder 2-1
All wayside traffic cables are bound

together at the cable holder 2-1.
Cable length confirmation with margin
on each BSW/OPT BSW basis.
CN-11
CN-12
CN-13
CN-14
CN-15
CN-16
CN-17
CN-34
CN-21
CN-22
CN-23
CN-24
UIA
CN-33
Block
CN-32
CN-31
Wiring and assembly of 1.0/2.3

straight coaxial connector
Cable wiring to each BSW/OPT BSW
unit and cable binding.
Figure 3-174 - Wiring works of coaxial cable for K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
All STM-1 cables are bound together at

the cable holder 1-1.
Cable length confirmation with margin on
each BSW/OPT BSW basis.
coaxial connector
Cable holder 1-1
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Cable holder 2-1

All wayside traffic cables are bound
together at the cable holder 2-1.
Cable length confirmation with margin
on each BSW/OPT BSW basis.
CN-40
CN-41
CN-42
CN-39
CN-56
CN-55
CN-54
CN-53
CN-50
CN-51
CN-52
UIA
CN-45
Block
CN-58
CN-57
coaxial connector
Figure 3-175 - Wiring works of coaxial cable for K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.8.4 Precaution for Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables
For the wiring work of coaxial cables, Figure 3-176 shows good
installation and bad installation samples for user reference.
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Good wiring work

< Easy unit removal in case of unit replacement>
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Bad wiring work

< Not easy unit removal in case of unit replacement>
Figure 3-176 – Precaution for Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables
SRT 1F
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.8.5 Metal Plate Installation for EMC Requirement
For the EMC requirement, metal plate is fixed in front of TCU unit part on
SCSU block shown in the following figure.
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
In front of TCU unit part, metal plate for

EMC requirement should be installed by
two bolts at the top and at the bottom.
Figure 3-177 – Metal Plate installation for EMC requirement
SRT 1F
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F
UMN 4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP
4 ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

Acceptance tests are generally performed after installation to check that
proper installation procedures has been followed and to check system
performances comnpliance with specifications.
In this part acceptance of SRT1F rack is described, together with details
about card settings available via HW switches and via SW commands.
IMPORTANT
THE ACCEPTANCE TEST OF SRT 1F EQUIPMENT MUST BE

CARRIED OUT BY SUITABLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
THE SRT 1F EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A

RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION ONLY.
FOR THE EXECUTION OF FIELD ACTIVITIES MORE DOCUMENTS

ARE AVAILABLE TO SUPPORT THE FIELD OPERATOR.
1. INSTALLATION INFORMATION
2. FIELD TEST PROTOCOLS
3. FIELD TEST PROCEDURE
PLEASE CONTACT NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS

REPRESENTATIVES TO REQUEST SUCH DOCUMENTATION.
4.1 Acceptance of the SRT 1F Rack

Acceptance tests are performed to ensure that proper installation
procedures detailed in Part 3 “Installation” have been followed.
Acceptance tests verify the following;
• Proper power wiring has been provided to the rack.
• Equipment shelves are free of defects or damage.
The acceptance tests generally assume;
• Accurate and concise system designations and office records are
available to properly identify systems and equipment.
• Any faults found and not corrected during testing are referred to the
installation group responsibility.
• The test equipment required is available, properly tested and working
correctly.
SRT 1F
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP UMN
4.1.1 Perform Overall Visual Inspection
1. Locate the SRT 1F rack and bay that will house the equipment.
2. Place yourself facing the rack.
3. Check that no slide-in units are installed. Remove any units that are
installed.
4. Check that the shelves are secure and free of defects or damage.
5. Check that all electrical connectors inside the shelves are properly
secured and aligned in the shelf slots.
6. Check that there are no broken, bent or mis-aligned contacts in the
connectors.
7. Check that there are no mis-aligned, dented or twisted shelves.
8. Check that there is no broken or damaged equipment
(connectors, wiring, back wired boards, etc.).
9. Check that all cabling and wiring is terminated and secured in
place.
10. Check that the wiring from the central office battery supply is
connected to the power connector on the SRT 1F rack.
11. Check that the plug from the office alarm system is connected to the
rack alarm bus connector:
SRT 1F K-SHELF VERSION
Connector Description
CN31 on UIA block of K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
CN57 on UIA block of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC
SRT 1F MULTI-SHELF VERSION

CN31 on BWB of SCSU (Terminal configuration)
CN107 on BWB of SCSU “SYS A”(Double Terminal conf.)
CN207 on BWB of SCSU “SYS B”(Double Terminal conf.)
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. VERSION

CN5 (1+1 Not Expandible configuration)
12. Check that the SRT 1F rack connections to the equipment outside
of the bay have been made.
13. Check that the feeder connections are properly terminated.
14. Record the inspection results
Note: Report any problems to the installation group.
SRT 1F
4.1.2 Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack
This procedure lists the steps required to check the incoming power
supply to the SRT 1F rack. Before beginning this procedure, turn on the
main power supply and check that the fuse assigned to the shelf is
inserted properly.
4.1.3 Test Equipment Required
Digital Multimeter (DMM) or equivalent.
4.1.3.1 Procedure for shelves using AMP PS connector

This procedure shall be applied for all the shelves equipped with power
supply AMP connector as shown in Figure 4-1. In particular, it is referred
to SRT 1F Multi-shelf version, to SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. version, to optional
BBIU shelf.
1. Turn off all the No-Fuse Breakers on units and shelves.
2. Unplug all the power connectors from all the units and shelves
equipped on the rack.
3. Confirm the voltage between the –48V and Battery return terminals
in the power connector. –38.4 V DC and –57.6 V DC for –48V
system.
4. If OK, continue with Step 5. If NOT OK, report the problem to the
installation group.
5. Re plug in all the power connectors.
6. Turn on all the No-Fuse Breakers on units and shelves.
Violet
Minus
Power cable 48 V
Plus
Black
AMP connector: 1-79958-2
Figure 4-1 – AMP PS Connector
SRT 1F
4.1.3.2 Procedure for shelves NOT using AMP PS connector

This procedure shall be applied for K-shelves and for Expansion K-shelf,
which make no use of AMP PS connector, but are powered directly via
proper power terminals at UIA block.
1. Turn off all the No-Fuse Breakers on units and shelves
2. Confirm that the voltage on the Power Supply Terminal of UIA block is
–48 V nominal. Note that specification of input DC primary power is
within –36 V to –72 V including all of variation factors such as station
DC power variation, DC power cable loss and so on.
3. If OK, continue with Step 4. If NOT OK, report the problem to the
installation group.
4. Turn on all the No-Fuse Breakers on units and shelves.
SRT 1F
4.2 Installation of the Slide-in Units

This Par. provides instructions to install the various units into the SRT 1F
rack.
4.2.1 Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using

or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety
of all personnel and the protection of equipment.
4.2.1.1 Laser Warning
WARNING
Never look into the end of an optical cable or fiber pigtail.
PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser

radiation is present.
Never handle exposed fiber with bare hands or permit contact with
the body. Fiber fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect
and remove.
Figure 4-2 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting
DANGER
Invisible laser
radiation from
connectors when
uncoupled.
AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE TO
BEAM.
Figure 4-2 - Laser Warning Labels
SRT 1F
4.2.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge Warning
CAUTION
Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during

installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic
discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Figure 4-3) and require
special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be
strictly observed:
Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling slide-in units.
The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 kΩ. Before using
the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum resistance value.
Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks.
Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry
on the units.
Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were
originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and secure
with tape.
Return units to Nokia Siemens Networks in special bags and original
shipping containers.
Figure 4-3 - ESD Warning Labels
SRT 1F
4.2.2 Slide-In Installation Procedures
This procedure assumes that:

1. The equipment rack has been installed in accordance with local
procedures.
2. The SRT 1F rack has been installed and connected according to the
procedure described in par. Connector and Connector Pin
Assignment.
3. The procedures described in par. 4, Acceptance of SRT 1F rack have
been performed.
This procedure is provided as a guide to equipping the SRT 1F rack.
4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units
This section details the procedures to be followed for the insertion and
removal of all slide-in units.
Warning
During replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow,

but firm motion.
They should not be pushed quickly into the slot.
Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimise

power surges during unit replacement.
A slow insertion method will ensure that the slide-in units are not
damaged.
SRT 1F
4.2.3.1 Inserting a Slide-In Unit

1. If required, set the option switches and straps on the unit to customer
requirements. These settings are detailed in the par. 4.3.2.
2. Ensure the card extractor levers are fully open, then slowly press the
unit into the correct mounting slot. Carefully close the top and bottom
extractor levers with both hands, until they latch, to set the unit in the
backboard connectors.
3. The backboard connectors are keyed to accept only the card
assigned to that position. See Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4 - Inserting a Slide-in Unit
Attention
Do not slam the unit into the shelf.
It may damage connectors.
SRT 1F
4.2.3.2 Removing a Slide-In Unit

1. Locate the slide-in unit to be removed.
2. Gently pull open the top and bottom extractor levers until the slide-in
unit is free from the rear connector (see Figure 4-5). If the unit is hard
to remove, gently push the card in, then raise the extractor levers.
Do not force the levers open. See Figure 4-5.
3. Carefully remove the slide-in unit from the mounting shelf.
Figure 4-5 - Removing a Slide-in Unit

Figure 4-6 shows a detailed description of the extraction levers.
Figure 4-6 - Detail of an Extractor Lever
SRT 1F
4.2.3.3 Removing an Optical Unit

1. Gently pull the top and bottom extractor levers out with both hands
until the unit is pulled free from the backboard connector.
2. Slowly pull the unit until it is stopped by the card stopper located at
the bottom edge of the card.
3. Disconnect the optical fiber cords if they are connected to the unit.
An instruction label is located on the Optical Interface unit. This
label is visible when the unit is partially removed.
4. Fit the protection caps to the optical fiber connectors and on the unit
if they are not already fitted with the protection caps.
5. Lift the metal spring on the card stopper and remove the unit
completely out of the shelf. See Figure 4-7.
Note: Care must be taken when removing units with optical fiber cables connected to
prevent undue stress being placed on the fiber cables.
See par Optical Circuits, Fiber Optic Cables and Jumpers for optical fiber cable
handling procedures.
Figure 4-7 - Removing an Optical Unit
SRT 1F
4.3 Card Settings
4.3.1 MSTU Setting
MSTUs (Main Signal Transmit Units) are set and tuned at the factory and
commissioning test is carried out at factory to assure the system
performance.
There is no need to carry out any setting change or readjustment for
MSTU controls.
Nokia Siemens Networks strongly recommends not to attempt to change
or readjust settings unless the error performance degraded seriously
because of equipment deterioration.
Following information is provided for very skilled technical staffs who may
have any chances to change or re-adjust settings in some special
circumstances.
WARNING
Do not attempt to change or readjust settings of MSTU unless
seriously needed.
If needed, use the WebLT as the first priority.
In the case of single antenna reception (without SD),

remove all straps of “DADE” (J1 to J32 in Figure 4-9).
SRT 1F
4.3.1.1 MSTU Front Panel

Figure 4-8 shows the front panel of MSTU unit.
Table 4.1 shows the functions for MSTU front panel.
FAN
(1)
FAN PWR 70M IN (5)

(2)
REF I/O (6)
MN
ON 70M OUT (7)
POWER SD
ON/OFF
(3)
OFF
DADE (8)
TX F MON D-EQL (9)

(4)
XPIC OUT (10)

XPIC IN (11)
INCR
DECR (12) Factory use only.
ITEM No. must be “0“
for normal operation.
ITEM No.
UNIT/RCI (13)
LINE
Figure 4-8 - Front Panel of MSTU Unit
SRT 1F
Table 4.1 - Functions for MSTU Front Panel Controls

Item Item Function
No.
(1) FAN Four fans for transmitter cooling
(2) FAN PWR Power cable connector for cooling fans
(3) POWER ON/OFF DC power supply switch for MSTU unit
(4) TX LO MON Monitor terminal for TX local frequency
(5) 70M IN 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement
(6) REF I/O In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation
OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT.
(7) 70M OUT MN 70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of
70M OUT SD Main/SD antenna reception
(8) DADE DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference
See Figure 4-9 and Table 4.3 for setting.
Remove all straps in case of single antenna reception (without SD).
(9) D-EQL Delay equalizer for branching network
(10) XPIC OUT XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation
(master) Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal
(11) XPIC IN XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation
(slave)
(12) INCR Analog level setting for MSTU (Factory use only)
DECR
Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use LCT for maintenance.
ITEM No.
See the next page for details.
To memorize the setting,
select ITEM No. = 9, then
press INCR/DECR switches together.
(13) LED indicator Alarm/status indicator :
UNIT/RCI Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking
LINE Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on
* : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable through the LCT.
SRT 1F
Table 4.2 shows the relationship between the position of rotary switch
and functions of “Analog Level Setting” (12).
Table 4.2 - Functions for Rotary Switch (12)

Item Item Function
No.
0 Normal operation The position for normal operation, in service state.
INCR and DECR push switches are invalid.
1 DADE for XPIC Compensates the delay time difference between the
feeders for Vertical and Horizontal polarization using
DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer) in the case
of co-channel operation.
2 DELAY-H Adjusts IF-IF group delay, high frequency component.
3 DELAY-M Adjusts IF-IF group delay, medium frequency component
4 DELAY-L Adjusts IF-IF group delay, low frequency component
5 ALC LVL ♣ Sets TX output level at ALC AUTO (ON)
6 ALC GAIN ♣ Sets TX output level at ALC MNL (OFF)
7 SD GAIN ♣ Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
to compensate the loss of DADE line.
8 SD SLOPE ♣ Adjusts XPIC OUT slope at AGC OFF
to compensate the slope of DADE line.
9 RRF GAIN ♣ Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
A RIF GAIN ♣ Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
B R SLOPE ♦ Compensates the slope of Main line.
C T SLOPE ♦ Compensates the slope of TX.
D --- Factory use only
E --- Factory use only
F FAN replacement For FAN replacement,
inhibits FAN alarm and switches TX output to LOW level.
♣ Use the LCT for setting.
Note
♦ Do not attempt to re-adjust.
To memorize the setting,

select ITEM No. = 9, then
press INCR/DECR switches together.
SRT 1F
4.3.1.2 DADE Setting for SD
The difference of waveguide length for Main and SD antenna shall be

compensated by DADE.
no use
J1 J2 -
2 ns
J3 J4 -
J5 J6 -
4 ns
J7 J8 -
J9 J10 -
4 ns
J11 J12 -
J13 J14 -
10 ns
J15 J16 -
J17 J18 -
10 ns
J19 J20 -
J21 J22 -
20 ns
J23 J24 -
J25 J26 -
30 ns
J27 J28 -
J29 J30 -
40 ns
J31 J32 -
Figure 4-9 - Strap pins for SD DADE Adjustment
When 4ns SD DADE is necessary, for example, pin strap both J5-J6 and J7-J8
Are needed.
See Table 4.3 for example of SD DADE setting.
SRT 1F
Table 4.3 - DADE Setting for SD

Strap position vs delay time difference between Main and SD antenna as reference
0 ns 2 ns 4 ns 10 ns 18 ns 36 ns 110 ns
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
2 ns
J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4
J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6
4 ns
J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8
J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10
4 ns
J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12
J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14
10 ns
J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16
J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18
10 ns
J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20
J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22
20 ns
J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24
J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26
30 ns
J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28
J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30
40 ns
J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32
0 ns :
Keep all straps as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J8 and so on.
2 ns :
Strap J1 to J2, J3 to J4, but keep others as default, J5 to J7, J6 to J8 and so on.
4 ns :
Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J9 to J11, J10
to J12 and so on.
10 ns :
Strap J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6
to J8, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on.
18 ns :
Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, J9 to J10, J11 to J12, J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others
as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4 and so on.
Attention : In the case of single antenna reception (without SD),

remove all straps J1 to J32.
SRT 1F
4.3.2 Hardware Setting
Most of system settings for SRT 1F DMR equipment are set through the
WebLT (Local terminal).
However, some part of system setting shall be carried out by hardware
switches. These settings are completed at the factory test according to
the system data and standard value. If you are needed to change these
parameters, follow this instruction.
Table 4.4 - Hardware Setting Position

Unit Item Switch Setting Default
SV OSSI type SW41-bit1 X.25 default
TL1 NE Back to Back
Buzzer enable SW41-bit4 Buzzer disable default
Buzzer enable
SV 4W E1 input level ATT ATT C 0 to 31 dB (1 dB step) 12dB
(-4dBr)
SNMP
4W E1 output level ATT A 0 to 31 dB (1 dB step) 11dB
ATT (-4dBr)
4W E2 input level ATT ATT D 0 to 31 dB (1 dB step) 12dB
(-4dBr)
4W E2 output level ATT B 0 to 31 dB (1 dB step) 11dB
ATT (-4dBr)
Buzzer enable SW5600-bit1 Buzzer disable Default
Buzzer enable
TCU EXT 2M CLK (X) input SW84 Balance Default
Unbalance
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input SW82 Balance Default
Unbalance
EXT 2M CLK (X) input SW15-1 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s)
(pattern)
Return to Zero (Hz) Default
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input SW15-2 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s)
(pattern)
T0, T4 CLK output SW15-3 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s)
(pattern)
SSMB Selector SW15-4 Only effective for Mode-2
SRT 1F
Unit Item Switch Setting Default

BSW CMI input SW2A Balance default
Electr. Unbalance
WS input for 75 ohms SW26 (RFCOH) Balance default
SW29 (SOH) Unbalance
WS output SW65 (RFCOH) 75 ohms unbalance default
SW67 (SOH) 120 ohms balance
WS input SW66 (RFCOH) 75 ohms default
SW68 (SOH) 120 ohms balance
OCC CMI input SW29 Balance default
Electr. Unbalance
BSW SW26 (RFCOH) 75 ohm unbalance default
WS output
Optical SW29 (SOH) 120 ohm balance
SW28 (RFCOH) 75 ohm default
WS input
SW2A (SOH) 120 ohm balance
SW28 (RFCOH) Balance default
WS input 75 ohm
SW2B (SOH) Unbalance
SW33 ALM1 0
ALM Out SW25 ALM2 1
SW24 ALM3 8
CONT1/2 In SW23 CONT1 / CONT2 6
ALS Mode SW22 ALS Mode Setting 0
Non diag. Module SW32-1 Mask fake alarm Mask
OCC SW33 ALM1 0
Optical ALM Out SW25 ALM2 1
SW24 ALM3 8
CONT1/2 In SW23 CONT1 / CONT2 6
ALS Mode SW22 ALS Mode Setting 0
Non diag. Module SW32-1 Mask fake alarm Mask
SRT 1F
4.3.2.1 SV TL1/OSI unit

OSSI type SW41-bit1 X.25 (default) OPEN
NE Back to Back CLOSE
Buzzer enable SW41-bit4 Buzzer OFF (default) OPEN
Buzzer ON CLOSE
SV
UNIT
LINE
MISC
ACS/SWDL
BACKUP
NORM
CR/MJ/RCI
MN/WR
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
LAN
FLEXER
2W E1
OPEN⇔ CLOSE
2W E2
LED TEST
OPEN = BZ OFF Bit-4
(Nof use) Bit-3
ACO SW
X25/BTB Factory use Bit-2
OPEN = X.25 (default) Bit-1
CLOSE = NE Back to Back
SW41
Figure 4-10 – SW41 on SV TL1/OSI unit front panel
SRT 1F
4.3.2.2 SV SNMP/IP unit

Buzzer Enable SW5600 Buzzer Disable (Default) OPEN
-bit1
SV Buzzer Enable CLOSE
UNIT
LINE
MISC
ACS/SWDL
NORM
NE ALM/RCI
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
LAN 1
LAN 2
2W E1
CLOSE ⇔ OPEN
2W E2
LED TEST
OPEN = Buzzer Disable
CLOSE = Buzzer Enable
ACO
Factory use
BZ EN (Default = Open)
Buzzer Enable
Buzz OFF (RAB)
Figure 4-11 – BZ EN switch on SV SNMP/IP unit front panel
SRT 1F

4W OW input level ATT C,D 0 to 31 dB (1 dB step) 12 dB
4W OW output level ATT A,B 0 to 31 dB (1 dB step) 11 dB
SW5602 SW5601
ATT C
ATT D
SW5600
ATT A
ATT B
SW5601 and SW5602 ON 1 2 4 8 16
ATT C
ATT D
1 2 3 4
Factory use OFF

OFF
(Default = OFF)
ON 1 2 4 8 16
ATT A
ATT B
OFF
Figure 4-12 – HW switches on SV SNMP/IP unit side
SRT 1F
4.3.2.3 TCU Unit

EXT 2M CLK (X) input SW84 Balance BAL
Unbalance UNBAL
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input SW82 Balance BAL
Unbalance UNBAL
EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern SW15-1 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s) OFF
Return to Zero (Hz) ON
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input pattern SW15-2 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s) OFF
T0, T4 CLK output pattern SW15-3 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s) OFF
SSMB SEL SW15-4 Only effective for Mode-2 ON
Figure 4-13 - TCU Setting
SRT 1F
4.3.2.4 BSW Electrical Unit

CMI input SW2A Balance (default) BAL
Unbalance UNBAL
WS output SW65 (RFCOH) 75 ohms unbalance 75
(default)
SW67 (SOH)
120 ohms balance 120
WS input SW66 (RFCOH) 75 ohms (default) 75
SW68 (SOH) 120 ohms balance 120
WS input 75 SW26 (RFCOH) Balance (default) BAL
ohm
SW29 (SOH) Unbalance UNBAL
SW69 Factory Use

(Default = Close)
CLOSE ⇔ OPEN
SW2B ↑ TOP
SW2A
CN96
SW28 SW68
SW77
SW27
SW29 SW67
SW25
SW66
SW75
SW26
SW24
CN92
SW65
BSW Unit
SW24,to27
SW65 68 SW2A,25,
SW2B, 26,28
29 SW75, 77
75 BAL
(default) (default)
120 UNBAL
75 120
(default)
Figure 4-14 - BSW Electrical Setting
SRT 1F
4.3.2.5 OCC INTF Elecrical Unit

CMI input SW29 Balance (default) BAL
Unbalance UNBAL
↑ TOP
SW29
CN96
CN92
OCC INTF Unit
SW29
UNBAL
BAL
(default)
Figure 4-15 - OCC INTF Setting
SRT 1F
4.3.2.6 BSW Optical Unit / OCC INTF Optical Unit

SW26 (RFCOH) 75 ohm unbalance (default) 75
WS output
SW29 (SOH) 120 ohm balance 120
SW28 (RFCOH) 75 ohm (default) 75
WS input
SW2A (SOH) 120 ohm balance 120
WS input SW28 (RFCOH) Balance (default) BAL
for 75 ohms SW2B (SOH) Unbalance UNBAL
SW33 ALM1 0 (default)
ALM/COND Out SW25 ALM2 1 (default)
CONT1/2 In SW23 CONT1 / CONT2 6 (default)
ALS Mode SW22 ALS Mode Setting 0 (default)
Non diagnostic Mask
SW32-1 Mask fake alarm
module (default)
CN19
SW2B
SW2A
SW29
(Rear)
SW28
SW27
SW55
SW26
SW24 SW25 SW33
OPT BSW unit

SW22 SW23 SW32
SW28, SW2B SW26, SW27, SW29, SW2A SW22, SW23, SW24, SW25, SW33
UNBAL BAL 75 120

(default) (default)
SW32, SW55
O 1
F 2
F
3
4
Figure 4-16 – BSW Optical Setting
SRT 1F

ALM/COND Out SW25 ALM2 1 (default)
CONT1/2 In SW23 CONT1 / CONT2 6 (default)
ALS Mode SW22 ALS Mode Setting 0 (default)
Non diagnostic Mask
SW32-1 Mask fake alarm
module (default)
CN19
(Rear)
SW55
SW24 SW25 SW33
OCC OPT unit

SW22 SW23 SW32
SW22, SW23, SW24, SW25, SW33
SW32, SW55
O 1
F 2
F
3
4
Figure 4-17 – OCC INTF Optical Setting
SRT 1F
Figure 4-18 - ALS Mode Switch SW22 Setting
Figure 4-19 - Control Switch SW23 Setting
Figure 4-20 - Alarm Switches SW24, SW25, SW33 Setting
SRT 1F
SRT 1F
UMN 5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Philosophy
During normal operation, the SRT 1F microwave radio system requires no
intrusive maintenance work by maintenance personnel. The main duties
of maintenance & operation are:
• Keep tidy and clean the equipment and the environment.
• Observe alarm/status information and record properly.
• In case of system failure, locate the fault and rectify it.
• If any unit has failed, replace with a spare unit and recover the
system.
Human Machine Interface

For maintenance & operation interface, the SRT 1F provides:
• LED indications on each unit.
• Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) to extend alarm/status information outside the
SRT 1F equipment.
5.1 LED Indications

The SV (Supervisory) unit of SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching
Unit) indicates the summary of alarms/status conditions. The LEDs on SV
unit are visible through the SCSU front cover.
Each unit has LEDs for local indication of the alarm/status summary. The
LEDs on each unit will be observed by removing the front cover.
Details of alarm/status shall be observed through the LCT (Local terminal)
or Centralized SV.
Alarm indications, to be displayed or not displayed, are set by “Alarm
Severity of Set Alarm Attribute, Facility, Provisioning” through the LCT.
Figure 5-1 and Table 5.1 show LED indications of the SV unit.
Figure 5-2 and Table 5.2 shows LED indications of other unit.
SRT 1F
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE UMN
SV
SV
UNIT UNIT
SV SV
LINE LINE
TL1/OSI SNMP/IP
MISC MISC
ACS/SWDL ACS/SWDL
BACKUP NORM
NORM NE ALM/RCI
CR/MJ/RCI MAINT
MN/WR CARD OUT
MAINT ACO
CARD OUT CALL E1
ACO CALL E2
CALL E1
CALL E2 DEBUG
LAN
LAN 1
LAN 2
FLEXER
SINT2
CLK
2W E1
2W E1
2W E2
2W E2
LED TEST LED TEST
ACO
ACO SW BZ EN
X25/BTB
Figure 5-1 - Front View of MCF/Controller unit
SRT 1F
Table 5.1 - LED Indication of SV unit

LED Indication
Group LED Color Status Description
Indication UNIT/RCI Red Steady on Unit failure of SV unit
for
SV unit Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of SV unit
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of SV unit
LINE Red Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure
Green (Y) Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal
MISC Red Steady on Housekeeping alarm (DI) on
ACS/SWDL Green (Y) Steady on NE is logged on by user
Red Steady on Mismatch of software version
Yellow (G) Blinking Software download on progress (TL1 only)
Green (Y) Blinking Software download on progress (SNMP only)
BACK UP Yellow (G) Steady on Back up of setting data is on progress
(TL1 only)
Indication NORM Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of NE
for
NE CR/MJ/RCI Red Steady on CR/MJ alarm of any unit in NE
(TL1 only)
NE
MN/WR Red Steady on MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
(TL1 only)
NE ALM/RCI Red Steady on CR/MJ/MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
(SNMP only)
NE
MAINT Yellow (G) Steady on Maintenance condition of NE
CARD OUT Red Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than
WR
Yellow (G) Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious
than WR
ACO Yellow (G) Steady on Alarm cut off of NE
Orderwire CALL E1 Green (Y) Blinking E1 orderwire is being called
CALL E2 Green (Y) Blinking E2 orderwire is being called
SRT 1F
UNIT/RCI
LINE
Figure 5-2 - LED Indication of Other Unit
Table 5.2 - LED Indication of Other Unit

Unit LED Color Status Description
All units UNIT/RCI Red Steady on Unit failure of the unit
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) is operated
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of the unit
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of the unit
All units LINE Red Steady on Loss of Main, Synch or other signal
except HK
Green (Y) Steady on Line signal (working side) is normal
SRT 1F
5.2 LCT for TL1/OSI SV

The LCT (Local terminal) is the main human machine interface for
operation & maintenance and system set-up (turn-up) for SRT1F
equipped with MCF/Controller unit of TL1/OSI type.
The LCT application software is supplied by Nokia Siemens Networks.
The customer is requested to install the software onto a Personal
Computer.
Table 5.3 shows the outline of LCT function.
Table 5.3 - Outline of LCT Function

1 File Establishes/exits communication to NE
2 Session Logs on/logs off to NE
3 TL1 Creates and sends out TL1 commands
4 Provisioning Sets the system configuration
Sets the usage of SOH
Sets alarm severity and threshold level
Sets parameters of NE
5 Status/Control Displays alarms/status
Displays error performance monitor
Displays analogue data of radio section
Controls radio protection switch
Controls other maintenance switches
Sets analogue level of radio section
6 Administration Administrates LCT users
7 Window Manages window display of LCT
8 Help Shows help and version information of LCT
application
SRT 1F
The following table shows the Command tree of LCT (Local Terminal)
and related functions for TL1/OSI SV.
No. LCT Command Unit Functions
1 File
1.1 Logfile
1.1.1 PC Message Log All Displays the logged history of Personal Computer
1.1.2 NE Commands Log Displays the logged history of NE commands
1.1.3 Transaction Log Displays the logged history of Transaction message
1.2 Preference All Sets Alarm retrieve*, Alarm beep, Access mode, Auto
time out
* Alarm retrieve = mother option for “Auto Report
Control”
1.3 Exit All Exits from the LCT application and close the LCT initial
screen
2 Session *
2.1 Log on All Logs on to NEs
2.2* Comm Setup (before log on)
2.2.1* Port Setup * Sets Port No., Baud rate, Data bits, Stop bits, Parity
2.2.2* Modem Setup * Sets Modem type, Dial prefix/suffix, Hangup
prefix/suffix, Originate Seq. for connection via Modem
2.2.3* Modem Dial * Establishes communication via Modem
2.2.4* Modem Hang-up * Abandons Modem dial
2.2.5* PAD Dial * Establishes communication via PAD
2.2.6* PAD Hang-up * Abandons PAD dial
2.3 Log off All Logs off from NEs
2.4 Re-configure Screen All Redraws the shelf picture to reflect configuration change
2.5 ASCII Terminal All Opens “Hyper Terminal” to access to NE
3 TL1
3.1 TL1 Command All Creates and sends TL1 commands
SRT 1F

4 Provisioning
4.1 Service State Changes Primary service state IS (In Service) and
OOS (Out of Service)
Enter = Changes from OOS to IS
Delete = Changes from IS to OOS
Retrieve = Displays current service state
4.1.1 Change EQPT State BBIU Service state of BB INTF unit
4.1.2 Change Facility State BBIU Service state of STM1RS facility
4.1.3 Change RPS State All Service state of Radio Protection System
a Group 1 All Service state of RPS Group 1
b Group 2 All Service state of RPS Group 2
4.2 Facility
4.2.1 Set Baseband Interface All
a Set OHB BBIU Usage of RSOH and MSOH
(MSTU) STM1RS = J0, E1, D1 to D3, B1
STM1MS = MS AIS, MS FERF, E2, D4 to D12
SSBIT, B2, K1K2, Z1,Z2
b Set Facility Threshold BBIU Threshold level of error performance
STM1RS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS
STM1MS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES,
AU4 = PJS
c Set Facility Group BBIU Excessive Error initiator
Signal Fail/Signal Degrade
Signal Degrade Threshold = 1E-5 to 1E-9
d Set Alarm Attribute Alarm severity and SA/NSA of following items
4.2.1d Set Alarm Attribute MSTU EQPT = CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-CM/NC,
MSTU RCI, FAN-FAIL, XPIC-OFF, DEM-FLR, MOD-FLR,
ACTCW, RX-FLR, ACTEPSOFF, ACTSDDADE,
ACTAGCOFF, FMSR, RXLCINT, TCA-RLTS,
TX-FLR, ACTALCOFF, TCA-TLTS, PSFAIL
RSPI = DEM-LOS, LOF, UAS-RP, SUE-RP, TUE-RP,
TCA-RP, TCA-OFS, FADE-ALM, RADRM, RP-
ERR, MOD-LOS, RX-LOS, SD-RCV-DN, TX-
LOS
WS = LOS
CNCT = XPIC-LOS, 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS, PIN-
LOS
SRT 1F

4.2.1d Set Alarm Attribute BBIU EQPT = OPOR, OPD, LBOL, CARD-FAIL, RMVD,
BBIU MIMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, ACTALS, ALSTST,
ALSMAN, PSFAIL
STM1RS = SUE-B1, TUE-B1, TCA-B1, TCA-OFS,
LOS, STIM, UAS-B1
STM1MS = FERF, SUE-B2, TUE-B2, TCA-B2, UAS-
FEBE, SUE-FEBE, TUE-FEBE, TCA-FEBE,
SSMBCHG, LOOPBACK, CSESP, FESP, TESP,
FSEP, TSEP, AIS
AU4 = LOP, AIS, TCA-PJS
UC = LOS
CNCT = 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS
4.2.1d Set Alarm Attribute SCSU SV = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, LOG-THC, TLOG-THC,
SCSU SUBUNIT-FAIL, RCI). RUC (LOS). RSC (LOF).
DCC (DCC-FAIL). RPS (PRCM). COM
(ACTACO). CNCT (SINT-FAIL)
ECU1,2 = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-
CM/NC, RCI). DCC (DCC-FAIL)
HK1,2 = EQPT (same as ECU1,2)
TCU = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-
CM/NC, WKSWP, RCI, MANSW, FRCDSW,
FRZSW, PSFAIL). CLKBIT (LOS-2MB, AIS, FAL).
CLKHZ (LOS-2MH). SYNC (SWTOHO,
SWTOINT, HOLDOVER, INTERNAL, MANSW,
EXTCLK-CUTOFF, QUALITY-DOWN, SYNSW
PRI1/2/3)
4.2.1e Set Trace BBIU
e1 Set OHB BBIU J0 Byte (N/STMID/TRC) for Trace
e2 Set Trace Value BBIU Expect Trace, Sending Trace, MIS-STI Alarm OFF
f Set Signal Label BBIU
f1 Set OHB BBIU Usage of SOH for signal label
f2 Set SLB Value BBIU Signal label value
4.2.2 Set Radio Interface MSTU
a Set RSPI MSTU Recovery (and Generation) of BERALM, Route ID,
SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)
b Set Radio Channel MSTU Frequency CH, Local Clock Master/Slave, Inhibit
MOD/DEM function
c Set Facility Threshold MSTU SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS
d Set Level Threshold MSTU RL-1, RL-2, TL (dBm)
e Set Auto Transmit MSTU ATPC Mode (LOW/HIGH/AUTO)
Control ATPC Initiator Level (dBm)
f Set RSC All X(Prot)/Y(Main), DSC SEL (P/W1 to 7)
4.2.3 Set Way side traffic MSTU SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)
4.2.4 Set User Channel BBIU 64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA)
4.2.5 Set Radio User Channel All RUCVFT(dBr), RUCVFR(dBr),
64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA)
SRT 1F

4.3 System
4.3.1 Set NE ID All NE ID = TID = System ID
4.3.2 Set Date and Time All Current date and time
4.3.3 Set System Configuration All System Type, RF Type, FRQ Arrangement, Space
Diversity, Line Interface, BBIU Use, Group1 Max CH,
Group2 Max CH, Group 1 RPS (Y/N), Group 2 RPS
(Y/N)
4.3.4 Set Optional Unit All ECU (Y/N), HK unit (Y/N), TCU Protection
Configuration
4.3.5 Set Interface Configuration All Sets BB INTF configuration
N/OPTL1/OPTL2/OPTL3
4.3.6 Set PM Time All Standard time for Performance Monitor start
4.3.7 Set Housekeeping Alarm SCSU Alarm Severity, Alarm Type, Alarm Message
4.3.8 Set Ext. Control Name SCSU Control Type
4.3.9 Set Alarm Delay All ALM ACT Time (0/2.5/10), ALM DACT Time (0/16)
4.3.10 Set Synchronization All
a Set Synch Mode All Synch Mode = ½
b Set Synch Parameter All CLK MODE (TCU/THROUGH), EC Priority (1/2), LC

Priority (1/2/3), Ext 2Mhz, Ext 2Mb/s, EC output 2Mbit
EC Threshold, LC Threshold, Error Free (Y/N)
4.3.11 Set Radio Protection Sys
a Set System Parameter All Maximum CH, Priority CH, Wait to Restore, OCC Use
b Set SW Initiator All SW Initiator (Y/N)
4.3.12 Set MSP BBIU Lock in Function, Switching Count, Monitor Time, Hold
Time, Direction, Persist Check Time, Uni/Bi Code
Mask, MSP Mode Setting
4.3.13 Set ALS BBIU ALS Function (Y/N), Release Time
4.3.14 Set Equipment Inventory All Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No. NE-Type, Resource
Status, Eqpt-Note
4.3.15 Set LBK Release Time Loopback RLS Time (hour)
4.3.16 Set Orderwire
a Set OHB BBIU E1 (Y/N), E2 (Y/N)
b Channel Select All E1/2 (N/GP-W1/ GP-W2/....)
c OW Function All OW Function (Y/N), Group Address, Station Address,

LED, Buzzer, Relay, Ringer
d OW Extension All OW Extension E1/2, OW VF TX/RX (-dBr)
4.3.17 Set LED Mode All Mode 1 (Normal = yellow) / Mode 2 (Normal = green)
SRT 1F

4.4 Section DCC
4.4.1 SDCC Service State All In service/Out of Service
4.4.2 LAPD Parameter All Window Size, Frame Timeout, Inact Timeout, Retries,
Frame Size, LAPD Cmd/Rsp, LAPD Data Link
4.4.3 Set 2nd DCC All 2nd DCC CH selection
4.5 OSS Interface
4.5.1 OSSI type & Service State All X25/OSI/Back to Back, IS/OOS
4.5.2 LAPB Parameter All Type, Window Size, Retry Timer, Packet Size,
Retransmit
4.5.3 X25 Parameter All X25 Address, Packet Size, Window Size,
Confirmation, Restart Timer, Request Timeout, Reset
Timeout, Clear Timeout, Closed User ID, Channel-
Lower, Channel-Upper
4.5.4 VC Parameter All PVC = Group No. CH NO. Peer Address
SVC = Peer Address, Packet Size, Window Size,
Confirmation, Ntwk User ID
4.6 Network Layer Protocol
4.6.1 NLP Parameter All NLP Type (IS1/IS1 IS2/ES), Area Address, System ID
4.6.2 NLP Manual Adjacency All NLP Type (SVC/PVC), Area Address, System ID
4.6.3 NLP Address Prefix All NLP Type (SVC), Area Prefix
4.6.4 NLP Manual Area Address All Manual Area Address
4.6.5 Display NLP Manual Area All Scope (LCL/NTWK)

Address
4.6.6 NLP Intermediate Sys1 All Max Area
4.6.7 NLP Intermediate Sys2 All Reachable Area Address
4.7 TARP Control TID Address Resolution Protocol Control
4.7.1 TARP Parameters All TARP Type, Response Time
4.7.2 TARP Manual Adjacency All Adjacency NTWK Address, Destination NTWK
Address, NPL Type
4.7.3 Display TARP Manual All Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address
Adjacency
4.7.4 Display TARP Cache All Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address, TID
List
4.7.5 Operate TARP Echo All Destination TID, System ID, NTWK Address, Request
Working Address, Retries, Response Timer, TID List
4.8 LAN Parameters All TARP Packet, Packet Size, LAN SAP, Service State
SRT 1F

5 Status/Control
5.1 Shelf Condition
5.1.1 Display Log files All AID, AID Type, Alarm Severity, Condition Type,
Service Effect, Monitor Value, Threshold Level,
Location, Direction, Occurred Time, Cleared
Time, Condition Description
5.1.2 Display All Log files All Same as “Display Log Files”
5.1.3 Clear Log files All Clears Log files
5.1.4 Display Maintenance All AID, AID Type, Alarm Severity, Condition Type
List
5.2 Radio Protection Switch
5.2.1 Group 1 All Lockout, Force, Manual, Alarm, Display SW PM
Data, Clear SW PM Data, Set SW Initiator, Set
System Parameter
5.2.2 Group 2 All Same as Group 1
5.3 Service State
5.3.1 Display Eqpt OOS List All Displays Equipment in Out of Service condition
5.3.2 Display Facility OOS All Displays Facilities in Out of Service condition
List
5.4 Performance Monitor
5.4.1. Display PM Data MSTU RSPI = BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OFS, BBER, ESR,
SESR
BBIU STM1RS/STM1MS = BBE, ES, SES,UAS,OFS,
BBER, ESR, SESR
AU4 = PJCH, PJCL, PJCS
5.4.2 Clear PM Data All Deletes Logged PM Data of selected facility
5.4.3 Clear PM Data ALL All Deletes Logged PM Data all
5.5 Analog Monitor
5.5.1 Display Current Level MSTU RL-M, RL-SD, TL
5.5.2 Display History Level MSTU TL-MAX, TL-MIN, RL-M/SD-MIN/MAX
5.5.3 Display TC Second MSTU TLTS (15M/24H), RLTS-M/SD-1/2 (15M/24H)
5.5.4 Clear History Data MSTU
5.6 Display CSES Log MSTU Displays 15 minute data
BBIU
5.7 Housekeeping Alarm SCSU Retrieve
5.8 External Control SCSU Operate/Release
SRT 1F

5.9 Change Maint State MSTU Remove = Changes from IS to Maintenance
BBIU Restore = Changes from Maintenance to IS
Retrieve = Displays current status
5.10 Trace BBIU MIS-STI Alarm OFF, Expect Trace, Sending
Trace, Incoming Trace
5.11 Signal Label BBIU Displays Signal Label
5.12 Alarm Cut Off All Disables audible alarm extension
5.13 Loop Back
5.13.1 Change Maint State BBIU STM1MS LINE/RADIO =
Remove/Restore/Retrieve
(MSTU)
5.13.2 Operate Loopback BBIU STM1MS LINE/RADIO = Operate/Release
(MSTU)
5.13.3 Display Loopback State All Displays facilities in Loopback
5.14 Protection Switch
5.14.1 Operate Protection SW BBIU STM1MS LINE = MAN/FRCD/LOCKOUT for MSP
SCSU EQPT = MAN/FRCD/LOCKOUT for TCU X/Y
5.14.2 Operate Synch SW All EC/LC = PR1/2/3, INT, HO
5.14.3 Display Prot SW State All Displays Protection switches operated
5.15 Maintenance Radio
Interface
5.15.1 Change Maint State MSTU RSPI = Remove/Restore/Retrieve
5.15.2 Radio Physical Interface MSTU Carrier Wave ON, Auto Gain Control Off, Auto
Level Control Off, Frequency Measurement
5.15.3 RSPI Adjustment MSTU TXPWR, TXGAIN, RXRFGAIN, RXIFGAIN,
SDGAIN, SDSLOPE
5.15.4 Maintenance for SD MSTU SD DADE OFF, EPS OFF
5.15.5 Maintenance for Co-CH MSTU XPIC-OFF, RXCLINT
5.15.6 Dade Adjustment MSTU DADEADJST
5.15.7 Display Maint State All Displays Controls in maintenance position
5.16 Physical Inventory
5.16.1 Display Equipment All AID, Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No, NE-Type,
Inventory Resource-Status, Eqpt-Status, NE-Manual-Code,
NE-Product-Code, NE-Serial-No, NE-ACPT-Date,
NE-WARR-END-Date
5.16.2 Display Unit Inventory All AID, SIU-Type, SIU-BLD-HW, SIU-MANU-Code,
SIU-Serial-No, SIU-Barcode, SIU-ACPT-Date,
SIU-WARR-END Date, SIU-BLD-STT
5.17 ALS Release BBIU Restart Mode = MAN/TST
SRT 1F

5.18 RCI Control All Remote Card Identifier = Operate/Release
5.19 Auto Report Control

5.19.1 Allow Alarm Report All Allows automatic report of Alarm message
5.19.2 Inhibit Alarm Report All Inhibits automatic report of Alarm message
5.19.3 Allow PM Report All Allows automatic report of PM data (every 15M)
5.19.4 Inhibit PM Report All Inhibits automatic report of PM data
5.19.5 Allow LED Report All Allows automatic report of LED indication on Unit
picture
5.19.6 Inhibit LED Report All Inhibits automatic report of LED indication
5.19.7 Allow Report All Validates “Allow Alarm Report” and “Allow LED
Report”
“Allow Report” is cancelled when the user logged
of.
5.19.8 PM Report Control
a Periodical Report All Report Function [ STD ] = Y/N
b No data Report All Report Function [NONDAT] = Y/N
c Analog data Report MSTU Report Function [ LVL ] = Y/N
5.20 Transaction Log All
5.20.1 Display Transaction Log All
5.20.1 Clear Transaction Log All
SRT 1F

6 Administration
6.1 Add User All Adds and defines a new LCT user for the NE
6.2 Delete User All Deletes a LCT user from the NE
6.3 Change User All Changes privilege of a user
6.4 Change Logged User All Changes the password of user now logged on to
Password the NE
6.5 Show User List All Shows the user list registered for the NE
6.6 Show Logged User All Shows privilege of the user now logged on to the
Privilege NE
7 Window
7.1 Cascade All Controls the stile of screen display
7.2 Tile Horizontal All
7.3 Tile Vertical All
7.4 Arrange Icons All
7.5 Tool Bar All Shows/hides “Tool Bar” of the LCT screen
7.6 Status Bar All Shows/hides “Status Bar” at the bottom of LCT
screen
7.7 Global View All Shows/hides “Global View” window
7.8 Output All Shows/hides “Command message lines” at the
bottom of LCT screen
8 Help
8.1 Help All Shows the general help of LCT application
8.2 About LCT All Shows the version of LCT application.
SRT 1F
5.2.1 Start-up LCT Operation for SV TL1/OSI
Connect the LCT terminal to the SV unit of SCSU block with an RS-232C
straight cable (9-pin D-sub male to female).
WARNING
If you use a desk top PC, connect ground terminals together to

prevent likely damage to components due to electrical surges.
Turn on the power of LCT terminal, then start the LCT application.
Log on to NE (SRT 1F equipment)

Figure 5-3 shows an example of LCT display after logging on.
When the LCT screen appears, click [ Logon ] button of the Tool Bar
(2) and wait until Tid.log window comes up.
Enter System ID (TID), User name, Password and click [ OK ].
If you cannot log on to NEs (Network Element; SRT 1F equipment),
check the communication setting between the LCT and the local NE by
opening Session ⇒ Comm setup from the Main Menu Bar (1).
When the LCT has logged on to the NE, the Shelf window (4) and Global
View (3) will be displayed on the screen.
Multiple Log on
Maximum 3 NEs in the DCC (Digital Communication Channel) can be
logged on simultaneously by a LCT terminal. However you cannot log on
to any NE outside of the DCC area of the connected LCT.
Alarm Report
Alarm summary of NE is indicated through a change of the colours of the
icons on the Global View window.
Icon of Unit picture Icon on Global View Alarm Severity
Red Red Critical
Orange Major
Yellow Minor
Brown Warning
Green (LED mode 2) Green (LED mode 2) Normal
Yellow (LED mode 1) Yellow (LED mode 1)
SRT 1F
(1) → 1 File Session TL1 Provisioning Status/Control Administration Window Help

(2) → Logon Logoff Open Close TL1 Options About Exit ⇒
1 Global View
1 XXX
1 Group 1 : GROUP1 - MSTU
(3) → 1 COMMON SCSU
1 SCSU 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
← (7) UNIT
1 Group 1
M M M M LINE
1 GROUP1 - MSTU S S S S
1 GROUP1 - BBIU T T T T
U U U U
1 Group 2 (4) →
1 GROUP2 - MSTU P W W W
(5) → 1 2 3
1 GROUP2 - BBIU
(6) → C C C C
(8) → SENT>> RTRV-LED-ALL XXX::

RESP>> XXX 01-01-2007
Note :
(1) : Main Menu Bar
(2) : Tool Bar
(3) : Global View
(4) : Shelf Window
(5) : Unit Picture
(6) : Check mark (“C” mark) to show applicable unit
(7) : Alarm Icon of Unit picture
(8) : Output
Figure 5-3 - Example of LCT Display
Alarm/Control
To supervise/control the logged NE, click Status/Control of Main
Menu Bar (1) and select the sub-menu following the LCT command tree.
Quick View/Control (click right button)

For quick view/control of NE, click the right mouse button on the
applicable space. Menus required for routine operation & maintenance
will be displayed.
New/Last alarm reports are displayed by clicking the right mouse button.
Last Alarm Report: the alarm message already retrieved.
New Alarm Report: the alarm message newly generated after the
previous retrieve command.
SRT 1F
Global View window : All alarms of the NE

Open space of Shelf window : All alarms of the shelf selected
Unit of Shelf window : Alarms of the unit selected
Table 5.4 shows the quick view/control menu of each unit.
Table 5.4 - Quick View/Control (Right Click)

Shelf BBIU SCSU
MSTU
BB INTF
BBC
SV
ECU
HK
TCU
Unit
New Alarm Report : Card V V V V V V V

Last Alarm Report : Card V V V V V V V
New Alarm Report : Shelf V V V V V V V
Last Alarm Report : Shelf V V V V V V V
Close Shelf V V V V V V V
Set OHB (V)* V
Set RSPI V
Set Radio Channel V
Set Facility Threshold V
Set Level Threshold V
Set Automatic Transmit Control V
ALS Release (OPT INTF only) V
Display Log Files V V V V V V V
Display Current Level V
Display History Level V
Display Threshold Crossing Seconds V
Display CSES Log V
Change Maintenance State V
Radio Physical Interface V
RSPI Adjustment V
Display Equipment Inventory V
Display Unit Inventory V V V V V V V
Note: * Set OHB of MSTU is not applicable if BBIU is installed.
SRT 1F
Auto Report
If wanting the NE to display the latest conditions automatically reflecting

any change of alarm/status, execute
Status/Control
⇒ Auto Report Control
⇒ Allow Alarm Report
⇒ Allow LED Report
⇒ Allow Report
Allow Report is cancelled when the user logs off from the NE. Other
commands remain valid until the user execute Inhibit Alarm (LED) Report.
Unit Status
Unit status, such as In Service, Out of Service, Active, Standby,
Unequipped or Removed, is indicated by the colours of unit icons on the
Shelf window as follows:
Color Primary State Secondary State
Gray In Service (IS) Active (ACT)
Unit LED = Green*
Gray In Service (IS) Stand-by (STB)
Unit LED = White
Green Out of service (OOS)
Memory administration (MA)
Yellow Removed
Purple Not configured
No colour Out of supervisory through LCT
Unit LED* :
Active Unit is green coloured for Mode 2, and yellow for Mode 1.
Selecting Unit
Some of Provisioning or Status/Control menus are unit related. Proper
unit(s) have to be selected before executing the menu command.
1. Select the required menu by clicking on the Main Menu Bar (1) first.
2. To select a unit to be supervised/controlled, click on an applicable
unit which is marked with a [ C ]. The selected unit icon will be
recessed.
3. Then click any open space within the shelf window to activate the
menu command.
It might be possible to select multiple units. However, if selecting mis-
matched units, the LCT will reject your unit selection by displaying a
warning message.
SRT 1F
5.2.2 Alarm (Condition) Type and Description
This section sorts out alarm details to be indicated by the LCT.

Alarm severity can be changed through the LCT if required by the
operation conditions.
Alarm indications through unit LED are also affected by alarm severity.
NA (No Alarm) and NR (No Report) will not be indicated by unit LEDs.
NR does not send out the message from the NE. NR can reduce the
traffic of alarm message on the DCC line.
The full list of alarm/condition items and severity change menu are
available:
Provisioning
⇒ Facility
⇒ Set Baseband Interface
⇒ Set Alarm Attribute
Abb. Severity Notes

CR Critical Affects on the traffic transmission directly.
MJ Major
MN Minor
NA No Alarm Not displayed by LED, LCT
NR No Report Messages are not sent out from the NE.
Unit AID Type Alarm Type Description Status
MSTU EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm

RMVD Unit is Removed Alarm
MISMOUNT-CM Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch) Alarm
MISMOUNT-NC Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Alarm
RCI Remote Card Identifier is given Condition
FAN-FAIL Fan Failure Alarm
XPIC-OFF XPIC is Off Condition
(for co-channel operation system)
DEM-FLR DEM block Failure Alarm
QAM DEM LSI failed (Clock loss of QAM DEM LSI)
MOD-FLR MOD block Failure Alarm
MOD DEM LSI failed (Clock loss of MOD DEM LSI)
ACTCW Carrier Wave in Active Condition Condition
Modulation is suspended for maintenance
RX-FLR RX block Failure Alarm
IF output failure occurred
SRT 1F
MSTU EQPT ACTEPSOFF EPS-OFF in Active Condition Condition

(for SD reception)
ACTSDDADE SD-DADE in Active Condition Condition
MSTU is in SD-DADE adjustment mode
ACTAGCOFF AGC-OFF in Active Condition Condition
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of RX is Off (manual)
= maintenance
FMSR Frequency Measurement Condition
ALC, AGC and EPS are OFF for IF-IF
measurement
RXLCINT RX Local is Internal Condition
(for co-channel operation system)
TCA-RLTS Alert of RX Receive Level Threshold Crossing Condition
Seconds
TX-FLR TX block Failure Alarm
TX output level is out of ± 3 dB
ACTALCOFF ALC-OFF in Active Condition Condition
ALC (Automatic Level Control) of TX is Off (Manual)
= maintenance
TCA-TLTS Alert of TX Transmit Level Threshold Crossing Condition
Seconds
PSFAIL Power Supply Failure Alarm
MSTU RSPI DEM-LOS Loss of Signal in DEM block Alarm

Input signal loss to QAM DEM LSI
LOF Loss of Frame occurred Alarm
Frame alignment loss of Radio frame.
UAS-RP Unavailable Seconds by RP (Radio Parity) Condition
SUE-RP Start of Unavailability Event by RP Condition
TUE-RP Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by RP Condition
TCA-RP Threshold Crossing Alert of RP Condition
TCA-OFS Threshold Crossing Alert of Out of Frame Second Condition
FADE-ALM Fading alarm Alarm
Degradation of received IF spectrum and BER ALM
of radio parity occurred
RADRM Radio Route ID Mismatch Alarm
RP-ERR Excessive Bit Error Rate (RP) Alarm
MOD-LOS Loss of Signal in MOD block Alarm
Input signal loss to QAM MOD LSI
SRT 1F
MSTU RSPI RX-LOS Loss of Signal in RX Alarm

MN-RCV-DN or SD-RCV-DN occurred
MN-RCV-DN MN RX Received level Down to squelch level Alarm
(equivalent to BER = 10-3)
SD-RCV-DN SD RX Received level Down to squelch level Alarm
(equivalent to BER = 10-3)
TX-LOS Loss of Signal in TX Alarm
10 dB down IF input level occurred
MSTU WS LOS Loss of Signal WS input occurred Alarm
MSTU CNCT XPIC-LOS Loss of Signal in XPIC Alarm

6MCLK-LOS Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz) Alarm
Loss of STM-1 reference clock signal (6.48 MHz)
from TCU to MSTU
STM-LOS Loss of Signal STM Alarm
PIN-LOS Loss of Protection Signal Alarm
Loss of signal from Prot CH was detected at USW
AU4 LOP Loss of pointer occurred Alarm
AIS Alarm indication signal is received Alarm
BBIU EQPT OPOR Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range Alarm

(OPT INTF only)
OPD Degradation in Optical Power transmitted Alarm
(OPT INTF only)
LBOL Laser bias current is too high Alarm
Laser bias of OPT INTF exceeded the threshold.
CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm
MISMOUNT-CN Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Alarm
ACTALS Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function active Condition
ALS of OPT INTF unit is enabled
ALSTST Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function released Condition
by Test restart
Laser emission of OPT INTF is restarted by
“Test = 90 seconds”
SRT 1F
BBIU EQPT ALSMAN Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function released Condition
by Manual restart
Laser emission of OPT INTF is restarted by
“Manual = 2 seconds”
PSFAIL Power Supply Failure Alarm
BBIU STM1RS SUE-B1 Start of Unavailability Event by B1 Condition

MSTU*
TUE-B1 Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by B1 Condition
TCA-B1 Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition
cumulative number of Background Block Errors by
B1
BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period
BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period
ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period
ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period
SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M
period
SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H
period
TCA-LOS Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition
cumulative number of Loss of Signal seconds
TCA-OFS Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition
cumulative number of Out of Flame seconds
LOS Loss of Signal occurred Alarm
Loss of STM1 signal input occurred.
LOF Loss of frame. Alarm
STIM Section Trace ID Mismatch occurred Alarm
UAS-B1 Unavailable Seconds (B1) Alarm
STM1MS B2-ERR Excessive Bit Error Rate (B2) Alarm

B2-SD Signal Degrade (B2) Alarm
FERF Far End Receive Failure occurred Alarm
SUE-B2 Start of Unavailability Event by B2 Condition

TUE-B2 Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by B2 Condition
SRT 1F
TCA-B2 Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition

cumulative number of Background Block Errors of
B2
period
period
UAS-B2 Unavailable State (B2) Alarm
UAS-FEBE Unavailable Seconds of FEBE (Far End Block Alarm
Error)
SUE-FEBE Start of Unavailability Event by FEBE Condition

TUE-FEBE Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by FEBE Condition
BBIU STM1MS TCA-FEBE Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition

MSTU cumulative number of Background Block Errors by
FEBE
period
period
SSMBCHG Synchronization Status Message Byte changed Condition
LOOPBACK Loopback in Active condition Condition
CSESP Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Alarm
occurred
Error rate of Protection CH exceeded Severely
Errored threshold consecutively
FESP Errored Seconds in 15-minute time period
TESP Errored Seconds in 24-hours time period
FSEP Severely Errored Seconds in 15-minute time period
TSEP Severely Errored Seconds in 24-hours time period
AIS Alarm Indication Signal is received Alarm
BBIU AU4 LOP Loss of Pointer occurred Alarm

SRT 1F
TCA-PJS Threshold Crossing Alert of Pointer Justification Condition

Seconds
period
period
BBIU UC LOS Loss of input Signal Alarm
BBIU CNCT 6MCLK-LOS Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz) Alarm

Loss of STM-1 reference clock signal (6.48 MHz)
from TCU to MSTU
STM-LOS Loss of Signal STM input Alarm
SCSU
SV EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm
LOG-THC Log memory Threshold Crossed Alarm
TLOG-THC Transaction Log memory Threshold Crossed Alarm
SUBUNIT-FAIL Backup sub-unit Failure Alarm
RUC LOS Loss of input Signal of RUC occurred Alarm
RSC LOF Loss of frame of RSC occurred Alarm
RPS PRCM Priority Channel Mismatch Alarm
SWNG-BSW Switching Failure in BSW Alarm
SWNG-USW Switching Failure in USW Alarm
LOCKOUT-BSW Lockout of BSW Condition
LOCKOUT- Lockout of USW Condition
USW
REQ-BSW Bipolar Switch Request Condition
REQ-USW Unipolar Switch Request Condition
FRCD-BSW Forced Switch of BSW Condition
FRCD-USW Forced Switch of USW Condition
MAN-BSW Manual Switch of BSW Condition
MAN-USW Manual Switch of USW Condition
TRAFICTOP- Traffic to Protection by BSW Condition
BSW
SRT 1F

TRAFICTOP- Traffic to Protection by USW Condition
USW
COM ACTACO Alarm Cut Off in Active Condition Condition

Audible alarm extension is cut off
CNCT SINT-FAIL Serial Interface Failure Alarm
ECU EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm

DCC DCC-FAIL DCC Failure Alarm
HK EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm

TCU EQPT CARD-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Alarm

WKSWP Working unit is Switched to Protection Condition
by manually or automatically
MANSW TCU is Manually switched to stand-by Condition
FRCDSW TCU is Forcibly switched to stand-by Condition
FRZSW TCU unit protection is in freeze condition Condition
PSFAIL Power Supply failure Alarm
TCU CLTBIT LOS-2MB Loss of 2Mb/s clock signal input Alarm
FAL Frame Alignment Loss occurred Alarm
Synchronization loss of Frame Alignment signal
occurred
TCU CLKHZ LOS-2MH Loss of 2MHz clock signal input Alarm
SRT 1F
TCU SYNC SWTOHO Synchronization reference is Switched to Holdover Condition

SWTOINT Synchronization reference is Switched to Internal Condition
HOLDOVER Synchronizing clock signal is in Holdover state Condition
TCU has lost the input reference clock signal and
running in the Holdover mode.
INTERNAL Synchronizing clock signal is in Internal state Condition
TCU is running in the Internal oscillation mode
MANSW Switch is in Manual switch mode Condition
EXTCLK-CUTOFF External Clock signal is Cut Off Alarm
TCU SYNC QUALITY-DOWN Quality of the synchronization clock signal has Alarm
deteriorated
SYNSWPRI1 Synchronization Switched to Priority 1 reference Condition
SRT 1F
5.2.3 Performance Monitor
Transmission performances across the SRT 1F section are monitored by

detecting parity error of B1 (STM1RS), B2 (STM1MS) and Radio parity
(RSPI) (factory user only).
Error performances are displayed:
Status/Control
⇒ Performance Monitor
⇒ Display PM Data
Radio Protection Switching count and duration (PSC, PSD) also show the
stability of SRT 1F transmission system.
PSC and PSD are displayed:
Status/Control
⇒ Radio Protection Switch
⇒ Group 1 or Group 2
⇒ CH No. and BSW/USW selection
⇒ Display PM Data
The following table shows Performance monitor types and their

description/threshold level.
SRT 1F
Unit(AID) Monitor Types Description and Threshold Levels

BBIU or BBE Background Block Error
MSTU The number of errored block which is detected during the normal
(STM1MS) operation period except the duration of SES and UAS.
(STM1RS) 15-MIN : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215)
(RSPI = 1-DAY : 0 to 4294967295 units (default = 4294967295)
before Error BBE for VC4 Background Block Error for VC4
Correction) 15-MIN : 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535)
1-DAY : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215)
BBER Background Block Error Ratio
15-MIN : 0E-0 to 1.4E-7
1-DAY : 0E-0 to 1.4E-9
ES Errored Seconds
The number of second which contains at least one block error during
the Available time.
15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900)
1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
ESR Errored Second Ratio
15-MIN : 0E-0 to 1.1E-3
1-DAY : 0E-0 to 1.2E-5
SES Severely Errored Seconds
The number of second which contains Errored Blocks (EB) more than
Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) during the Available time.
SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio
SEV Severely Errored Threshold

The percentage of Errored Block which defines Severely Errored
Second (SES) and Unavailability Second (UAS).
10 to 50 % (default = 30)
SEVR Severely Errored Threshold Ratio
10 to 50 % (default = 30)
UAF Unavailability Filter
The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold
(SEV) which defines Unavailability Seconds (UAS).
2 to 10 seconds (default = 10)
UAFR Unavailability Filter Ratio
2 to 10 seconds (default = 10)
UAS Unavailability Seconds
The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold
(SEV) which is defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF).
In case of UAF = 10 sec, a period of UAS starts when Errored Block
(EB) in each second exceeds SEV for 10 consecutive seconds, and
terminates when EB does not exceed SEV for 10 consecutive
seconds.
OFS Out of Frame Seconds
The number of seconds which contains at least one occasion of
synchronization loss of the frame alignment signal.
NSES Number of Severely Errored Seconds
Threshold of CSES (Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds)
SRT 1F
Unit(AID) Monitor Types Description and Threshold Levels

MSTU PSAC-B Protection Switch Actual Count BSW
PSAC-U Protection Switch Actual Count USW
(RPS) Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation (BSW
and USW respectively).
15-MIN : 0 to 1612800 times
1-DAY : 0 to 154828800 times
PSAD-B Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW
PSAD-U Protection Switch Actual Duration USW
The number of second which contains at least one occasion of
PSAC-B and PSAC-U respectively.
15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds
1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds
PSC Protection Switch Count
The total number of PSAC-B and PSAC-U
15-MIN : 0 to 230400 times
1-DAY : 0 to 22118400 times
PSRC-B Protection Switch Request Count BSW
PSRC-U Protection Switch Request Count USW
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including
PSAC-B/U and invalid request due to persistence (BSW and USW
respectively).
15-MIN : 0 to 1612800 times
1-DAY : 0 to 154828800 times
PSRSAD-B Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW
PSRSAD-U Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration USW
Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch operation
(BSW and USW respectively).
15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds
1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds
5.2.4 Analog Monitor
Analog value of transmitter/receiver of MSTU can be displayed:

Status/Control
⇒ Analog Monitor
⇒ Display Current Level / History Level / Threshold Crossing Seconds
Threshold Level RL-1, RL-2 and TL can be set:
Provisioning
⇒ Facility
⇒ Set Radio Interface
⇒ Set Level Threshold
Tolerance: ± 3 dB between –35 –65 dB
SRT 1F
The following table shows Analog Monitor Types and the threshold level.
Display Monitor Types Description and Threshold Levels

Current Level RL-M Receive Level of Main Antenna
The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the Main antenna.
-15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD Receive Level of SD (Space Diversity) Antenna
The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the SD antenna.
-15 to -80 dBm
TL Transmit Level
The RF transmit level at the output of MSTU.
+11 to +35 dBm
History Level RL-M-MAX Receive Level of Main Antenna Maximum
The maximum receive level during the monitoring period.
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm
1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
RL-M-MIN Receive Level of Main Antenna Minimum
The minimum receive level during the monitoring period.
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm
1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD-MAX Receive Level of SD Antenna Maximum
The maximum receive level during the monitoring period.
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm
1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD-MIN Receive Level of SD Antenna Minimum
The minimum receive level during the monitoring period.
15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm
1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
TL-MAX Transmitted Level Maximum
The maximum transmit level during the monitoring period.
+11 to +35 dBm
TL-MIN Transmitted Level Minimum
The minimum transmit level during the monitoring period.
+11 to +35 dBm
Threshold RLTS-M-1 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified
Crossed by RL-1
Seconds RLTS-M-2 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified
by RL-2
RLTS-SD-1 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified
by RL-1
RLTS-SD-2 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified
by RL-2
TLTS Transmit Level Threshold crossed Seconds
15-MIN: 1 to 900 seconds (default = 900)
Threshold RL-1 Receive Level Threshold 1
Level Setting 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm (default = -80 dBm)
RL-2 Receive Level Threshold 2

15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm (default = -80 dBm)
TL Transmit Level Threshold
15-MIN: +11 to +35 dBm (default = +35 dBm)
SRT 1F
5.2.5 Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI)
The Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI) menu group is provided for
the testing and special maintenance of the MSTU radio section.
This menu group affects the channel traffic. Before executing any control
on this menu group, switch over the traffic to the protection channel and
change the Maintenance State of the channel to Remove.
Status/Control
⇒ Maintenance Radio Interface
⇒ Change Maintenance State (Carry out before following sub-menus)
Radio Physical Interface
RSPI Adjustment
Maintenance for SD
Maintenance for Co-CH
Dade Adjustment
Sub-Menu Item Description

Change Maint. State Remove Changes to Maint. State for following sub-menus.
Restore Changes to In Service State for normal operation.
Retrieve Displays the current status.
Radio Physical Interface Carrier Wave ON Stops modulation and send carrier wave.
Auto Gain Cont. Off Stops AGC of RX block for IF-IF characteristics
measurement.
Auto Level Cont. Stops ALC of TX block for IF-IF characteristics
Off measurement.
Frequency Executes AGC OFF, ALC OFF and EPS OFF at once
Measurement for IF-IF characteristics measurement.
RSPI Adjustment TXPWR Adjusts TX output power at ALC ON.
(Analog level adjustment) TXGAIN Adjusts TX output power at ALC OFF.
RXRFGAIN Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC
OFF
RXIFGAIN Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
SDGAIN Adjusts SD side gain to compensate difference
between Main and SD receiver.
SDSLOPE Adjusts SD side amplitude slope to compensate
difference between Main and SD receiver.
Maintenance for SD SD DADE ON Activate switcher function for SD DADE adjustment.
EPS OFF Stops Endless Phase Shifter (EPS).
Maintenance for Co-CH XPIC-OFF Stops Cross Polarization Interference Cancellor.
RXCLINT Select internal local oscillator reference clock by force.
Dade Adjustment DADEADJST Adjusts baseband DADE for hitless RPS (USW)
operation.
Display Maint. State Displays above items in maintenance position.
SRT 1F
5.3 Radio Protection Switch for SV TL1/OSI

Supervise/control of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) is carried out through
the LCT terminal.
Log on
The LCT must log on to the receive end of the direction to be
supervised/controlled. To control the reverse direction, log in to the
opposite station (NE).
To open the Radio Protection Switch (RPS) window:
Control/Status
⇒ Group 1
Group 2 (for 2nd RPS group if applicable)
To open the RPS window of the other NE, log on to the 2nd NE then
repeat the above process.
To display two windows simultaneously:
Window
⇒ Tile
Figure 5-4 shows the Radio Protection Switch window.
USW/BSW
The Unipolar Switch (USW) is operated Uni-directionally and in the hitless
mode for manual control and for most of the automatic switching.
The Bipolar Switch (BSW) is operated Bi-directionally and bears some
data error. However, the BSW provides more secure isolation for testing
and special maintenance work.
P r ot MSTU MSTU
P r ot
(USW) (USW)
Wor k 1 BB INTF BSW MSTU MSTU BSW BB INTF Wor k 1

(USW) (USW)

(USW) (USW)

(USW) (USW)
To/fr om Wor k N To/fr om Wor k N

Un ipola r sign a l Un ipola r sign a l
To/fr om Wor k N STM-1 CMI To/fr om Wor k N STM-1 CMI
Figure 5-4 - Outline of Radio Protection Switch
SRT 1F
Nea r E n d (5) Far End
Lock ou t
↓
Lock ou t Lock ou t
F or ce
BU B
W2
Ma n u a l Ο Ο OCC BSW USW USW BSW OCC Ο
Ma n u a l F or ce F or ce Ma n u a l
Ala r m BU BU B B
ΟΟ ΟΟ ΟΟ W1 BSW USW USW BSW W1 Ο Ο Ο
Display SW PM ΟΟ ΟΟ ΟΟ W2 BSW USW USW BSW W2 Ο Ο Ο
Clear SW PM ΟΟ ΟΟ ΟΟ W3 BSW USW USW BSW W3 Ο Ο Ο

Set SW
Set Sys
Refr esh
Close
Help
↑ ↑ ↑ Legen d : ↑
(1) (3) (2) Nor m a l : (bla ck) (4)
F a il : (r ed)
(1) Control Button Lockout Inhibits any type of RPS operation (1st priority).
Force Forces the SW (2nd priority).
Manual Operates the SW manually (4th priority) .
ALARM Displays the AID = RPS alarm.
Display SW PM Data Displays PSAC, PSRC, PSAD and PSRSAD.
Clear SW PM Data Clears SW PM data above.
Sets SW Initiator Sets SW Initiator Enable/No.
Set Sys Parameter Sets Max. CH, Priority CH, WTR and OCC
Refresh Redraws the window to refresh the current condition.
Close Close the RPS window.
Help Displays Help.
(2) SW Box BSW Selects the SW for control (Bi-directional).
USW Selects the SW for control (Uni-directional).
(3) Manual Control Ο in Green Normal (Released).
Indicator
Ο in Red Controlled (Operated)
(4) Channel No. W1 to W7 Main 1 channel to Main 7 channel.
OCC Occasional traffic (option).
(5) W2 Switched CH No. indication.
This example shows Bi-directional auto switching by W2 unit failure.
Figure 5-5 - Radio Protection Switch window
SRT 1F
5.3.1 Automatic Switching and Status Indication
Normal CH is shown as a black solid line

Failed CH is shown as a red dotted line
The switched channel No. is displayed on the line of Prot. CH (5).
A single arrow shows Uni-directional switching by USW.
A double arrow shows Bi-directional switching by BSW.
A red circled Manual Control Indicator (3) shows that the switch element
is operated for Lockout, Force or Manual switching.
Figure 5-5 shows the example that automatic Bi-directional switching of
W2 (Main 2) is due to unit failure.
In case of automatic switching, BSW operation caused by MSTU unit
failure has priority over USW operation.
Signal Failure (SF = Loss of Frame) has priority over Signal Degrade (SD
= BER ALM and 1bit error)
A priority channel shall be set to have priority over other channels, if the
switch initiator is at the same level.
5.3.2 Manual Control
The Radio Protection Switch (RPS) can be controlled manually through

the LCT terminal. The following are the functions and priority order of the
manual controls:
Control Priority Function
st
Lockout 1 Inhibits any type of RPS operation.
Force 2nd Switches the Main CH unless the specified Main
CH or Prot CH is locked out.
(Automatic) 3rd The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if
Prot CH is free and normal.
The CH switched by Manual or OCC control will be
chased out by automatic switching from Prot CH.
Manual 4th The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot
CH is free and normal.
OCC 5th Occasional traffic transmission (option)
The lowest priority traffic is allowed when Prot CH
is free and normal.
The OCC traffic gives way to any other RPS
command.
To operate manual control:

⇒ Click BSW or USW (2) of Near End, the SW box changes color
from green to red.
⇒ Click Control button (1) as required, then follow the instruction of
confirmation boxes.
The Manual Control Indicator (3) changes color from green to red.
SRT 1F
5.3.3 SW PM Data
Switch Performance Monitoring (SW PM) Data shows the stability of radio
propagation condition and RPS operation.
Following items will be displayed;--
PSAC-B Protection Switch Actual Count BSW / USW
PSAC-U
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation.
PSAD-B Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW / USW
PSAD-U
The number of second which contains at least one occasion
of PSAC-B / PSAC-U.
PSRC-B Protection Switch Request Count BSW / USW
PSRC-U
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation
including PSAC-B/U and invalid request due to WTR and
persistence.
PSRSAD-B Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW /
PSRSAD-U USW
The number of second which contains at least one occasion
of Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch
operation.
5.3.4 Auto Refresh
To display the current status, click Refresh control button.

If wanting to maintain the RPS window to automatically display the latest
change, execute:
Status/Control
⇒ Auto Report Control
⇒ Allow Report
when you log on to the NE.
Allow Report is automatically cancelled if logging out from the NE.
Note :
Auto Refresh function of RPS is subject to Alarm/condition setting.
SRT 1F
5.3.5 Notice for RPS Operation
Operation of the Radio Protection System is very sensitive to traffic

transmission. Following notice should be observed.
5.3.5.1 Power off of SCSU

When turning off the power supply to SCSU, change the service state of
RPS to OOS (Out of Service) in advance. Otherwise, the traffic may be
briefly interrupted when turning on the power supply.
Provisioning
⇒ Service State
⇒ Change RPS State
⇒ Delete
Then log off the LCT from the NE.
5.3.5.2 Lockout
WTR (Wait to Restore) also affects the LOCKOUT command also.
If WTR is 4 (minutes) or 20 (minutes), the LOCKOUT command will be
effective after the time delay specified by WTR.
If wanting to execute the LOCKOUT immediately, change WTR setting to
“ 0 “ as follows:
Provisioning
⇒ System
⇒ Set Radio Protection System
⇒ Set System Parameter
⇒ Wait to Restore
⇒ 0 min
5.3.5.3 Power off of MSTU

To prevent disconnection, the traffic should be BSW manually switched
over to the Protection channel in advance.
Status/Control
⇒ BSW of the channel to be switched off
⇒ Manual
⇒ Operate
Note:
• BSW operation is not hitless and briefly interrupts traffic.
• If the USW is operated on such occasion, the message indicating
USW operated will remain during the period that MSTU is power off.
SRT 1F
5.4 Other Functions of SV TL1/OSI
5.4.1 Loop Back
The SRT 1F is provided with the baseband loop back function.

LINE side : From Baseband input to Baseband output (Facility)
RADIO side: From DEM QAM module output to MOD QAM module input
(Terminal).
Without BBIU
For the standard configuration of SE interface, the loop back is carried out
at the MSTU unit.
With BBIU
For optional configuration of OPT interface, loop back is carried out at the
OPT INTF unit.
Loop Back test interrupts channel traffic. To safeguard traffic
transmission, Loop Back operation is monitored through the Maintenance
State .
Before carrying out Loop Back, Change Maintenance State to remove
the In Service state from the channel.
To carry out Loop Back test:
Control/Status
⇒ Loop Back
⇒ Change Maintenance State
⇒ Select the unit to be looped back
⇒ STM1MS LINE or
STM1MS RADIO
⇒ Remove (Restore is to release loopback)
MSTU
MOD TX
BSW
DE M RX
LINE side RADIO side
BBIU MSTU
MOD TX
BSW
DE M RX
Figure 5-6 - Loop Back Operation
SRT 1F
5.4.2 Multiplex Section Protection
In case of OPT INTF line protection, MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) is

provided. In addition to automatic switching, MSP can be operated
through the LCT either manually or inhibited from automatic switching.
To carry out MSP manual operation:
Control/Status of BBIU
⇒ Protection Switch
⇒ Operate Protection Switch
⇒ Select the channel to be operated
⇒ STM1MS LINE
⇒ MAN for manual switch or
FRCD for forced switch or
LOCKOUT to inhibit automatic switch
Priority Order of MSP is:
Lockout > Forced > Auto (Signal Failure) > Auto (Signal Degrade) >
Manual
5.4.3 TCU unit Protection
In case of TCU unit protection (two units of X and Y installed), the manual
switch over of the working TCU is available through the LCT.
To change the working TCU;--
Control/Status of SCSU
⇒ Operate Protection Switch
⇒ Select the TCU to remove from working condition
⇒ EQPT
⇒ MAN for manual switch or
FRCD for forced switch or
LOCKOUT to inhibit automatic switch
5.4.4 Synch Switch
The synchronous source is automatically selected to the highest quality

level currently available.
The user can select the synchronous source manually, if necessary.
To change the synchronous source manually:
Control/Status of SCSU
⇒ Operate Synch Switch
⇒ Select the TCU to change the synchronous source
⇒ EC for Equipment clock or
LC for Line clock
⇒ PRI 1/PRI 2/PRI 3/INT/HO
INT (Internal) and HO (Holdover) are not suitable for traffic transmission.
SRT 1F
5.4.5 ALS Release
Laser emission of OPT INTF unit is automatically shutdown when the

fiber optic cable is disconnected for personnel safety. Then the OPT INTF
retransmits the output intermittently to recover the signal transmission at
a specific interval.
ALS Release is provided to restart the Laser emission through manual
control, in addition to normal restarting stated above.
MAN : Emits OPT INTF output for 2 seconds
TST : Emits OPT INTF output for 90 seconds
To operate ALS Release:
Control/Status of BBIU
⇒ ALS Release
⇒ Select the channel to be operated
⇒ Restart Mode
⇒ MAN for 2 seconds emission or
TST for 90 seconds emission.
SRT 1F
5.5 Web LCT for SNMP/IP SV

Web LT is a local terminal that is the main human machine interface for
operation, maintenance, system setup and tune-up. The SRT1F Web LT is
designed as an embedded web server using HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer
Protocol) protocol and HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) document
format on an IP (Internet Protocol) network. An operator can manage the
SRT1F NE by accessing with ordinary web browser client software.
Table below shows outline of SRT1F Web LT major function.
Table 5.5 - SRT1F Web LT Major Functions

Provisioning Sets the system configurations, usage of SOH (Section
Overhead) facilities and optional functions, and NE
parameters.
Status Control Displays alarms and conditions. Controls RPS(Radio
Protection Switching) and maintenance functions.
Performance Monitor Displays performance monitors and analogue monitors.
5.5.1 System
To use the Web LT, the PC hardware and software should meet or exceed
the requirements listed in table below.
Table 5.6 - System Requirements

Client Requirements HTTP/1.0 or later
JavaTM script *1
Cascade Style Sheet (CSS2)
Least one working Ethernet port
supporting 10/100Base-T
1024x769 XGA Display or higher
Recommended Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer *2, (For factory test
Version 6.0 or later environment)
*1 Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., and refer to Sun’s Java programming language.
*2 Microsoft Internet Explorer is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United State and/or other
countries.
Connect your PC to a LAN port on the SV (Supervisory) card (unit) in

SCSU (Baseband interface and Supervisory/Control,& Switching Unit)
block of the target NE (Network Element). Normally, crossover cable
should be used for the connection, if you want to connect the PC to the
NE directly. The SV card (unit) supports both 10Base-T and 100Base-T
Ethernet connection. It is recommended to use CAT5 (Category 5) UTP
(Un-shielded Twisted Pair) crossover cable for the connection. There are
two Ethernet ports on the SV card (unit), and they are connected to a
HUB internally. Therefore, you can use whichever you like better.
SRT 1F
SV
UNIT
LINE
MISC
ACS/SWDL
NORM
NE ALM/RCI
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
LAN 1
LAN 2
CAT5 UTP
Crossover cable for
connection 2W E1
2W E2
LED TEST
ACO
BZ EN
Web LT
FLEXR
Figure 5-7 - Connection between PC and NE showing LAN Ports on the SV SNMP/IP Card
SRT 1F
5.6 Radio Protection Switch for SV SNMP/IP

Supervise/control of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) is carried out through
the Web LT.
Logon
Enter the appropriate IP address of the desired Network Element(NE) to
be logon to open the WebLT.To open the Radio Protection Switch(RPS)
window
Control⇒
 RPS & Loopback
Figure 4.2 shows the radio protection switch window.
For detailed instruction of WebLT, please refer to “Instruction Manual of
WebLT for SRT1F Radio System”.
USW/BSW
The Unipolar Switch (USW) is operated uni-directionally and hitless for
manual control and most of automatic switching.
The Bipolar Switch (BSW) is operated bi-directionally and accompanying
some data error. However, the BSW provides more secure isolation for
testing and special maintenance work.
P r ot MSTU MSTU
P r ot
(USW) (USW)

(USW) (USW)

(USW) (USW)

(USW) (USW)
To/fr om Wor k N To/fr om Wor k N

Un ipolar sign a l Un ipolar sign a l
To/from Work N STM-1 CMI To/from Work N STM-1 CMI
Figure 5-8 - Outline of Radio Protection Switch
SRT 1F
Figure 5-9 - Radio Protection Switch Window
Table 5.7 - Detailed Description of Operate RPS Window
(1) Action Lockout Inhibits any type of RPS operation (1st priority).
Force Operates the SW forciblly (2nd priority).
Manual Operates the SW manually (4th priority) .
Release Lockout Displays the AID = RPS alarm.
Release Force Displays PSAC, PSRC, PSAD, and PSRSAD.
Release Manual Clears SW PM data above.
(2) Switch BSW Selects the SW for control (Bi-directional).
USW Selects the SW for control (Uni-directional).
(3) AID W1 to W7 Work 1 channel to Work 7 channel.
OCC Occasional traffic (option).
SRT 1F
5.6.1 Automatic Switching and Status Indications
Line condition displays the line condition for each AID. "Request" is
displayed when the switchover request to the protection channel is
received after a line failure. The currently active protection channel is
displayed for the protection channel.
Note that nothing is displayed for channels that are not subject to the
RPS.
5.6.2 Manual Controls
The Radio Protection Switch(RPS) can be controlled manually through

the WebLT. Functions and priority order of manual controls are as
following table below.
Table 5.8 - Manual Control Priority for Radio Protection Switch
Control Priority Functions

Lockout 1st Inhibits any type of RPS operation.
Force 2nd Switches the Work CH unless the specified Work
CH or Prot CH is locked out.
(Automatic) 3rd The Work CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if
Prot CH is free and normal.
The CH switched by Manual or OCC control will be
chased out by automatic switching from Prot CH.
Manual 4th The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot
CH is free and normal.
To operate manual control, open "Operate RPS" in Fig3.2 and make the
appropriate setting to AID, Switch and Action then click Operate.
SRT 1F
5.6.3 SW PM Data
Switch Performance Monitoring(SW PM) data in Performance/Current

menu shows the stability of radio propagation condition and RPS
operation.
Following items in table below will be displayed.
Table 5.9 - Data of Switch Performance Monitor for Protection Switch Operation
PSAC-B Protection Switch Actual Count BSW/USW
PSAC-U
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation.
PSAD-B Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW/USW
PSAD-U
PSAC-B/PSAC-U.
PSRC-B Protection Switch Request Count BSW/USW
PSRC-U
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including
PSAC-B/U and invalid request due to WTR and persistence.
PSRSAD-B Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration
PSRSAD-U BSW/USW
Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch
operation.
5.6.4 Notice for RPS Operations
Operations for the Radio Protection System(RPS) are very sensitive for
the traffic transmission. Following notice should be observed.
5.6.4.1 Power off of SCSU

When you turn off the non-fuse breaker on UIA block for SV and TCU
units, change the service state of RPS to OOS (Out of Service) in
advance. Otherwise, the traffic may be interrupted a while when you turn
on the power supply.
Provisioning
⇒ Service State
⇒ Enter RPS
⇒ OOS
5.6.4.2 Lockout
WTR(Wait to Restore) affects on the LOCKOUT command also.
WTR is set to 1 minute as a fixed value, the LOCKOUT command will be
effective after the time delay of 1 minute.
SRT 1F
5.6.4.3 Power off for MSTU

To prevent disconnection, the traffic should be switch over to protection
channel by manual operation of BSW in advance.
Control
⇒ RPS & Loopback
⇒ Operate RPS
⇒ AID, BSW, Operate Manual
⇒ Operate
Note:
• BSW operation is not hitless and interrupts the traffic for a while.
• If the USW is operated on the occasion, the message of USW
operated will remain during the MSTU is power off.
SRT 1F
5.7 Other Functions of SV SNMP/IP
5.7.1 Loop Back
The SRT1F radio is provided with the baseband loop back function.
LINE side : From baseband input to baseband output (Facility)
RADIO side: From DEM QAM module output to MOD QAM module input
(Terminal)
For the standard configuration of SDH Electrical (SE) interface, the loop
back is carried out at the MSTU unit.
Loop back test interrupts the traffic of the channel. For safety of traffic, the
loop back transmission, loop back operation is guarded by maintenance
state. Before carrying out loop back, you must perform Change
Maintenance State to remove the in-service state from the channel.
To carry out loop back test:

Control
⇒ RPS & Loopback
⇒ Operate Loopback
⇒ Select the AID to be looped back
⇒ Select the direction LINE or RADIO
⇒ Operate (Release is to release loopback)
MSTU
MOD TX
BSW
DE M RX
BBIU MSTU
MOD TX
BSW
DE M RX
Figure 5-10 - Loop Back Operation
SRT 1F
5.7.2 TCU unit Protection
For the purpose of TCU unit protection(two units of X and Y are installed),
the manual switch over of working TCU is available through the WebLT.
To change the working TCU;--
Control
⇒ Clock Source
⇒ Operate TCU
⇒ Select AID to be switched
⇒ Operate Manual , Operate Forced or Operate Freeze
5.7.3 Synch Switch
The synchronous source is automatically selected to the highest quality

level currently available.
The user can select the synchronous source manually if needed.
To change the synchronous source manually;--
Control
⇒ Clock Source
⇒ Operate Sync
⇒ Select EC for Equipment clock or LC for Line clock
⇒ Select Priority1/ 2/ 3/Internal/ Holdover
INT(Internal) and HO(Holdover) are not suitable for traffic transmission.
SRT 1F
5.8 Unit Replacement
WARNING
Unit replacement operations may affect

the traffic transmission service.
The maintenance staff must inform these operations to the

Central Maintenance & Operation Center (CMOC) in advance.
Unit replacement shall be made in accordance with the availability of hot

swap and replacement procedure.
Table 6.1 Unit Replacement Procedure and Availability of Hot Swap

Unit Availability Unit Replace Procedure
of hot
swap
MSTU No (1) Switchover the said System to the PRT CH by
BSW switch.
(2) Turn power switch of the said MSTU “OFF”.
(3) Replace MSTU and turn power switch of
MSTU “ON”. Confirm the STM-1 traffic is
normal.
(4) Switchback the said System from PROT CH.
BSW Yes After confirmation of not being BSW switched
OCC INTF Yes
OPT BSW Yes After confirmation of not being BSW switched
OPT OCC Yes
BSW INTF No (1) Confirmation of not being BSW switched in
GP2
(2) Turn power switch of the PROT MSTU “OFF”
(3) Replace BSW INTF unit.
(4) Turn power switch of the PROT MSTU “ON”
SV No (1) Confirmation of not being “ACS/SWDL”
(2) Turn the power switch of SV “OFF”
(3) Replace SV unit.
(4) Turn power switch of the SV unit “ON”
TCU No (1) Turn power switch of the said TCU “OFF”
(2) Replace TCU unit
(3) Turn power switch of the said TCU “ON”
HK No (1) Turn power switch of SV “OFF”
(2) Replace the said HK unit.
(3) Turn power switch of SV “ON”
ECU No (1) Turn power switch of SV “OFF”
(2) Replace ECU unit.
(3) Turn power switch of SV “ON”
SRT 1F
5.8.1 Fan Replacement
An MSTU is equipped with 4 air cooling fans. These fans should be

replaced with spares when they are worn out. Table 5.10 shows the
relationship of FAN alarm and equipment condition.
When FAN alarm is detected, all 4 fans should be replaced with
spares at once.
Table 5.10 - FAN Alarm and Equipment Condition

Number of Fan Equipment
Working Out Alarm Condition of MSTU
4 0 No alarm Normal operation
3 1 FAN Alarm Normal operation
2 2 FAN Alarm TX output power is 10 dB down
1 3 UNIT Failure Power supply off to MSTU.
BSW operates
How to replace FANs

1. Turn the rotary switch on MSTU to [ F ] to switch TX output to LOW
level and inhibit “Fan alarm”. See Figure 5-11.
2. Pull out the FAN PWR cable.
3. Remove the FAN assembly. See Figure 5-11.
4. Mount a new FAN assembly and re-connect the FAN PWR cable
securely.
5. Turn back the rotary switch on MSTU to [ 0 ]
6. Check alarm/status indications on LEDs and LCT.
7. If normal, switch back the traffic from the protection channel.
SRT 1F
Turn to [ F ] to switch TX
output to LOW level and
inhibit “Fan alarm”
The FAN Assembly is mounted on to the MSTU by

4 long screws (1) to (4) and
4 short screws (5) to (8).
Figure 5-11 - Replacement of FAN Assembly
SRT 1F
5.8.2 MSTU and Other Units
MSTU
To replace an MSTU, the traffic should be switched over to the protection
channel by forcing the BSW in advance, and by cutting off power to the
unit. The BSW operation momentarily interrupts traffic.
OPT INTF of BBIU shelf

The traffic cannot be protected during the replacement work, unless the
line (facility) is protected by MSP (for OPT INTF - X/Y only).
Units in SCSU
Replacement of any unit other than that listed below may seriously affect
traffic:
• TCU in stand-by (in case of card protection of TCU-X/Y).
• HK unit.
System Setting Data

System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU.
When a unit is replaced with spares, the system setting data will be
automatically transferred from the SV unit. There is no setting change
after unit replacement.
After unit replacement:
• Turn on power supply and wait at least 10 minutes to complete the
system setting data download.
• Check LED indication on SRT 1F equipment.
• Check Alarm/status indication of Status/Control menu on the LCT.
• Check Analog Monitoring of Status/Control menu on the LCT.
• Check the applicable system setting of Provisioning menu on the LCT.
• Check Service State is In Service of Provisioning menu on the LCT.
• Leave equipment for stability check at least 30 minutes.
• Check Error Performance history by Display PM of Status/Control
menu on the LCT.
• Compare the above data with other channels.
• Minimize setting change and re-adjustment of the replaced unit unless
performance does not meet the long term specification. If setting
change and re-adjustment is required, follow the instructions stated in
par. “Acceptance and Turn up” of this manual.
Removal of SCSU Protection Metal Plate

• Remove the metal plate by two fixing bolts before unit replacement
• Fix the metal plate by two fixing bolts after replacement
SRT 1F
5.8.3 SV TL1/OSI unit Replacement
System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU.
The data is stored in the Inner Memory on the main PCB and also in the
Back-up Memory on the sub-unit.
To replace the SV unit with a spare:
• Check that the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch
operation).
• Change the Service State of RPS from In Service (IS) to Out of
Service (OOS).
Provisioning
⇒ Service State
⇒ Delete
• Log off the LCT from the NE.
• Wait until when BACK UP LED of SV unit turns off
(approx. 4 minutes)
• Cut off power supply to the SCSU and remove the SV unit.
• Remove the Back-up Memory sub-unit form the SV main PCB.
• Fit the Back-up Memory sub-unit on to the spare SV.
• Mount the spare SV on to the SCSU and turn on power supply to the
SCSU.
• Wait until when ACS/SWDL LED of SV unit turns off
(approx. 5 minutes)
• Log on the LCT to the NE.
• Check LED indications SRT 1F equipment and Alarm/status
conditions on the LCT.
• Change the Service State of RPS from Out of Service (OOS) to In
Service (IS).
Provisioning
⇒ Service State
⇒ Enter
• Check the RPS operations. If traffic interruption is not possible, check
Manual operation of USW. If the failure of SV unit is extended to the
RPS total operation, check all related functions.
SRT 1F
Figure 5-12 shows the PCB of SV unit.
WARNING
Do not cut off power supply to the SCSU unit when

BACK UP LED is glowing otherwise
the system setting data may be damaged seriously.
L
E
D
LA CN5
FLEX CN6
MEM
E1 CN8
E2 CN8
VF or DGTL
LED SW9
AC SW
SW
CPU
Figure 5-12 - PCB of SV TL1/OSI unit
WARNING
This unit contains devices that may be damaged by electrostatic

discharge(ESD).
Observe all precautions relating to the safe handling of ESD

sensitive equipment.
SRT 1F
5.8.4 SV SNMP/IP unit Replacement
The system setting data (provisioning setting data) is stored in the inner
memory on the main PCB, therefore the data should be registered to the
spare SV unit. There are two types of data uploading, one is by using
application software ‘HOTTOOL3, the other is manual. For detailed
HOTTOOL3 information, please contact Nokia Siemens Networks staff.
To replace the SV unit with a spare;--
In case of HOTTOOL3 software
• System setting data is downloading from failed SV unit to WebLT
which is already installed the application software “HOTTOOL3”. For
details, refer to the instruction manual of HOTTOOL3.
• Check the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch
operation).
• Check the ASC/SWDL LED being off (no one access the NE)
• Change the Service State of RPS from IS (In-Service) to OOS(Out-
of-Service).
Provisioning
⇒ Service State
⇒ Enter RPS
⇒ Select AID
⇒ State: OOS
• Turn off the non-fuse breaker “SV” on SCSU block and remove the
failed SV unit.
• Set switch SW5602-bit2 on spare SV unit to ON (default value)
• Mount the spare SV unit on the SCSU block and turn on the non-fuse
breaker “SV” on the SCSU block.
• Wait a minute for SV unit startup.
• Set IP address of WebLT to 192.168.0.xx (xx: except 10) and set IP
address of spare SV unit to 192.168.0.10.
• Using “HOTTOOL3” software, system setting data is uploaded
WebLT to spare SV unit.
• Set operation IP address to the spare SV unit.
• Turn off the non-fuse breaker SV on SCSU block and remove the
spare SV unit.
• Set switch SW5602-bit2 on spare SV unit to OFF (operation mode)
• Set IP address of WebLT to normal state.
• Change the Service State of RPS from OOS to IS.
Provisioning
⇒ Service State
⇒ Enter RPS
⇒ Select AID
⇒ State: IS
• Check the RPS operations. If the failure of SV unit extended to the
RPS total operation, you must check all functions related.
SRT 1F
In case of Manual Uploading

• Check the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch
operation).
• Check the ASC/SWDL LED being off (no one access the NE)
• Change the Service State of RPS from IS (In-Service) to OOS(Out-
of-Service).
Provisioning
⇒ Service State
⇒ Enter RPS
⇒ Select AID
⇒ State: OOS
• Turn off the non-fuse breaker “SV” on SCSU block and remove the
failed SV unit.
• Set switch SW5602-bit2 on spare SV unit to ON (default value)
• Mount the spare SV unit on the SCSU block and turn on the non-fuse
breaker “SV” on the SCSU block.
• Wait a minute for SV unit startup.
• Set IP address of WebLT to 192.168.0.xx (xx: except 10) and set IP
address of spare SV unit to 192.168.0.10.
• Using provisioning setting table provided by the Contractor, each
system setting data is set manually one by one. For provisioning
setting procedure, please refer to the instruction manual of WebLT.
• Set operation IP address to the spare SV unit.
• Turn off the non-fuse breaker SV on SCSU block and remove the
spare SV unit.
• Set switch SW5602-bit2 on spare SV unit to OFF (operation mode)
• Set IP address of WebLT to normal state.
• Change the Service State of RPS from OOS to IS.
Provisioning
⇒ Service State
⇒ Enter RPS
⇒ Select AID
⇒ State: IS
• Check the RPS operations. If the failure of SV unit extended to the
RPS total operation, you must check all functions related.
Figure 6.2 shows the SW5602 position
WARNING
This unit contains devices that may be damaged by electrostatic

discharge(ESD).
Observe all precautions relating to the safe handling of ESD

sensitive equipment.
SRT 1F
SW5602 SW5601
ATT C
ATT D
SW5600
ATT A
ATT B
Figure 5-13 - Switch SW5602 position in SV SNMP/IP
SRT 1F
5.8.5 Returning Replaced Unit
Units for SRT 1F equipment are manufactured based on high density

assembling and require special tools, jigs and measurement equipment
for repair. Faulty unit should be returned to the manufacturer for repair.
For quick and adequate repair work, the following information must be
stated on the unit.
• Unit name
• Serial No.
• Station name
• Facing station name
• Frequency band
• Channel No.
• System configuration
• Date and time alarm/abnormality detected
• Date and time the unit replaced
• Detailed description of alarm/abnormality
• Alarm/status log of the local station and associated stations
• Error performance log of the local station and associated stations
• Detailed description after unit replacement
The user shall use Nokia Siemens Networks report form. For detailed
information about repair service, please contact Nokia Siemens Networks
staff.
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX
A APPENDIX
A.1 Abbreviation of Terms
Table A.1- Abbreviation of Terms

Abbreviation Description
A
A/D Analog to Digital converter
ACO Alarm Cut Off
ACTAGC Act Automatic Gain Control of Receiver
ACTALS Act Automatic Laser Shut down
ACTCW Act Carrier Wave mode
ADD Address
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AID Access Identification
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
AIS REC Alarm Indication Signal Receiving
ALC Automatic Level Control
ALM Alarm
ALSMAN Automatic Laser Shut down released by Manual restart
ALSTST Automatic Laser Shut down released by Test restart
AMP Amplifier
ANS Answer
ANT Antenna
APS Automatic Protection Switch
ASCII American Standard Cord for Information Interchange
ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control
ATT Attenuator
AU 4 Administrative Unit 4
AUD NE ALM Audible Network Element Alarm
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007 A-1
A. APPENDIX UMN
Table A1 - Abbreviation of Terms (continued)

B
B/S Bit per Second
BAL Balance
BB Base Band signal
BBC Base Band Control
BBE Background Block Error
BBIU Base Band Interface Unit
BEF Band Eliminate Filter
BER Bit Error Ratio
BIP Bit Interleave Parity check
BPF Band Pass Filter
BR NTWK Branching Network(Radio frequency band)
BRU Branching Network Unit
BSI Bit Sequence Independence
BSW Bipolar Switch
BWB Back Wired Board
C
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio
CIR Circulator
CK Clock
CLK Clock
CMB Channel management Bus
CMI Code Mark Inversion
CN Connector
CNCT Connect
CODIRE Co-directional interface
CONTRA Contra-directional interface
CPU Central Processor Unit
CR Critical Alarm
CSESP Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Occurred
SRT 1F
A-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 5, September 2007
UMN A. APPENDIX

D
D/A Digital to Analog converter
DADE Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer
DCC Digital Communication Channel
DEF Decision Feedback
DEM Demodulator
DI Data Input
DMM Digital Multi-Meter
DO Data Output
DSC Digital Service Channel
DT Double Terminal
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
DUP Duplexer
E
EC Equipment Clock
ECU Embedded Channel Unit/ Embedded Communication Unit/
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Endless Phase Shifter
EQL Equalizer
ES Errored Second
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
F
F LOSS Frame Loss
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction
FEFR Far End Receive Failure
FESP Fifteen minute Error Seconds Performance
FET Field Effect Transistor
FG Frame Ground
FIL Filter
FLR Failure
FMSR Frequency Measurement
FRCDSW Switch is in Forced Switching mode
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN

G
G Ground
GAAS Gallium Arsenide
GNE Gateway Network Element
GUI Graphical User Interface
GP1 Group 1
GP2 Group 2
H
H Horizontal
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3
HEMT High Electron Mobility Transistor
HK Housekeeping
HL Higher Layer
HL CPU Higher Layer Central Processor Unit
HPA High Power Amplifier
HYB Hybrid circuit
I
ICH In-phase Channel
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
INI Initiator
INTF Interface
IS In Service
ITU International Telecommunication Union
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX

L
LAPD Link Application Procedure D channel
LBOL Laser Bias current is too High.
LC Line Clock
L6G Lower 6 GHz band
LED Light Emitting Diode
LL CPU Lower Layer Central Processor Unit
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
LO Local
LO MON Local Monitor
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOP Loss Of Pointer
LOS Loss Of Signal
LPF Low Pass Filter
LSI Large Scale Integrated circuit
LTE Line Terminal Equipment
LVL Level
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN

M
MAINT Maintenance
MANSW Manual Switch
MC Maintenance Center
MID Minimum Dispersion combiner
MISC Miscellaneous
MIX Mixer
MJ Major alarm
MLCM Multi Level Code Modulation
MN Minor alarm
MN ANT Main Antenna
MOD Modulator
MPU Micro-Processor Unit
MS Multiplex Section
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSTU Main Signal Transmission Unit
MUX Multiplexer
N
NA Not Applicable
NC Not Connection
NE Network Element
N.E. Not Expandible
NEND Near END
NFB No Fuse Breaker
NLP Network Layer Protocol
NMS Network Management System
NORM Normal
NSA Non Service Affect
NWC Network Center
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX

O
OCC Occasional
OFS Out of Frame Second
OOS Out Of Service
OP AMP Operational Amplifier
OPD Degradation in Optical Power transmitted
OPOR Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range.
OPT Optical
OS Operation Software
OSC Oscillator
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSSI Operation Support System Interface
OW TEL Orderwire Telephone
P
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCM Pulse Code Multiplex
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PI Photo coupler Interface
PJCH Pointer Justification Count High
PJCL Pointer Justification Count Low
PJCS Pointer Justification Count SEcond
PLL Phase Lock Loop
PLO Phase Lock Loop controlled Oscillator
PM Performance Monitor
PM DATA Performance Monitor Data
PPM Percent Per Million
PSC Protection Switching Second
PSFAIL Power Supply Failure
PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit
PWR Power
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN

Q
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QCH Quadrature Channel
R
R CLK Receive Clock
RAB Rack Alarm Bus
RADRM Radio Route ID Mismatch
RAM Random Access Memory
RCI Remote Card Identification
RCK Receive Clock
RCLK Receive Clock
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
RCI Remote Card Identifier
RCV Receive
RD Receive Data
RDP Receiver Data Processing
RF Radio Frequency
RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Over Head byte
RL Relay
RL-1 Receiving Level-1
RL-2 Receiving Level-2
RL-M Receiving Level of Main receiver
RL-SD Receiving Level of SD receiver
RLTS Received Level Threshold Second
RMVD Required unit is missing
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RRF Receiver Radio Frequency section
RS Regenerative Section
RSL Receive Signal Level
RST Reset
RUC Radio service Channel
RX Receiver
RX-LOS Loss of Signal in RX
RXLCINT RX Local Internal Clock
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX

S
S CLK Send Clock
SA Service Affect
SC Service Channel
SCSU Switching Control, Supervision Unit
SD Space Diversity
SD-RCV-DN SD Receiver Down
SDH Synchronous Digital hierarchy
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SES Severely Errored Second
SEV Severely Errored Threshold
SG Signal Ground
SIU Slide In Unit
SLP EQL Slope Equalizer
SR Shift Register
SS BIT Synchronous State Bit
SSMB Synchronous State Message Byte
SSU Synchronous Source Unit
STD Standard
STM-1 Synchronous Transfer Module level 1
SUE-RP Unavailable State Entered (RP)
SV Supervision/Supervisory
SVC Switched Virtual Circuit
SW Switch
SWDL Software Down Load
SWTOHO Synchronization reference is in Holdover state
SWTOINT Internal source signal is used for Synchronization
SYNC Synchronization
SYNSW Synchronization Switch
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN

Abbreviation Abbreviation
T
TARP TID Address Resolution Protocol
TCA-OFS Threshold Crossing Alert-
TCA-RLTS Threshold Crossing Alert- RX Level Threshold
TCA-RP Threshold Crossing Alert-
TCA-TLTS Threshold Crossing Alert-TX Level Threshold
TCK Transmit Clock
TCLK Transmit Clock
TCU Timing Control Unit
TD Transmit Data
TD N Transmit Data Negative
TD P Transmit Data Positive
TDP Transmitter Data Processing
TEL Telephone
TESP Twenty four Hour Error Seconds
TID Target Identification
TIF Transmitter IF section
TL Transmitter output Level
TL 1 Transaction Language 1
TLTS Transmitted output Level Threshold Second
TRF Transmitter RF section
TVE Transversal Equalizer
TX Transmitter
TX-FLR Transmitter Failure
U
U6G Upper 6 GHz
U8G Upper 8 GHz
UAS Un-available Second / Un-available State
UC User’s service Channel
UCH User’s service Channel
UL User Level Layer
USW Unipolar Switch
UAF Un-Availability Filter
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX

V
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VF Voice Frequency
VIS NE ALM Visual Network Element Alarm
W
WKSWP Working unit Switched to Protection
WR Warning
WS Wayside Signal
WTR Wait To Restore
X
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN
A.2 Unit part numbers
Table A.2.1 – Base Band Unit

Description Code
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT TL1/OSI SINGLE RPS
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT TL1/OSI SINGLE RPS 634-002/01 TA22763-B50X
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT SNMP/IP SINGLE RPS
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT SNMP/IP SINGLE RPS 634-002/04 TA22779-B40X
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT TL1/OSI DOUBLE RPS
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT TL1/OSI DOUBLE RPS 634-002/02 TA22763-B60X
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT SNMP/IP DOUBLE RPS
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT SNMP/IP DOUBLE RPS 634-002/05 TA22779-B30X
SINT CLK CABLE FOR RST MODE 597-527/50 M66L-1361-0836#B-0600-41
BASE BAND BIPOLAR SWITCH FOR ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
BASE BAND BIPOLAR SWITCH FOR ELECTRICAL INTERFACE 612-614/09 TA21491-B60X
BASE BAND BIPOLAR SWITCH FOR OPTICAL INTERFACE
BASE BAND BIPOLAR SWITCH FOR OPTICAL INTERFACE 612-614/09A TA21460-B81X
ALM/CONT CABLE FOR BSW OPTICAL 314-329/93A TA70001-2712A1
BSW INTERFACE FOR RPS2
BSW INTERFACE FOR RPS2 614-105/31 TA21571-B80X
CABLE KIT FOR BSW INTF 597-527/54A TA70001-2077A1
TIMING SOURCE UNIT
TIMING SOURCE UNIT 607-013/31 TA21491-B70X
OCCASIONAL TRAFFIC TRIBUTARY INTERFACE ELECTRICAL
OCCASIONAL TRAFFIC TRIBUTARY INTERFACE ELECTRICAL 612-614/10 TA21491-C80X
OCCASIONAL TRAFFIC TRIBUTARY INTERFACE OPTICAL
OCCASIONAL TRAFFIC TRIBUTARY INTERFACE OPTICAL 612-614/10A TA21460-B90X
HOUSEKEEPING UNIT TL1/OSI
HOUSEKEEPING UNIT TL1/OSI 614-105/32 TA21376-B40X
HOUSEKEEPING UNIT SNMP/IP
HOUSEKEEPING UNIT SNMP/IP 614-105/33 TA21377-B50X
DCCM MANAGEMENT UNIT
DCCM MANAGEMENT UNIT 612-614/21 TA21376-B30X
DIGITAL/VF CHANNEL INTERFACE TL1/OSI
VF CHANNEL INTERFACE TL1/OSI 530-003/81 TA21376-C60X
DG CHANNEL INTERFACE TL1/OSI 530-003/82 TA21376-C70X
DIGITAL/VF CHANNEL INTERFACE SNMP/IP
VF CHANNEL INTERFACE SNMP/IP 530-003/83 TA21245-B80X
DG CHANNEL INTERFACE SNMP/IP 530-003/84 TA21245-B90X
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.2.2 – MSTU

Band Power XPIC Code MSTU-2 Description
4G(64QAM) +32dBm without 602-016/01 TA02017-B791 4G WOXPIC HP 64QAM LOWER
XPIC 602-016/02 TA02017-B792 4G WOXPIC HP 64QAM UPPER
with 602-016/03 TA02017-B793 4G WXPIC HP 64QAM LOWER
XPIC 602-016/04 TA02017-B794 4G WXPIC HP 64QAM UPPER
+29dBm without 602-016/05 TA02017-B795 4G WOXPIC NP 64QAM LOWER
XPIC 602-016/06 TA02017-B796 4G WOXPIC NP 64QAM UPPER
with 602-016/07 TA02017-B797 4G WXPIC NP 64QAM LOWER
XPIC 602-016/08 TA02017-B798 4G WXPIC NP 64QAM UPPER
U4G without 602-016/11 TA02017-B801 4G WOXPIC HP 128QAM LOWER
+32dBm
(128QAM) XPIC 602-016/12 TA02017-B802 4G WOXPIC HP 128QAM UPPER
with 602-016/13 TA02017-B803 4G WXPIC HP 128QAM LOWER
XPIC 602-016/14 TA02017-B804 4G WXPIC HP 128QAM UPPER
+29dBm without 602-016/15 TA02017-B805 4G WOXPIC NP 128QAM LOWER
XPIC 602-016/16 TA02017-B806 4G WOXPIC NP 128QAM UPPER
with 602-016/17 TA02017-B807 4G WXPIC NP 128QAM LOWER
XPIC 602-016/18 TA02017-B808 4G WXPIC NP 128QAM UPPER
5G(64QAM) +32dBm without 602-016/21 TA02017-B811 5G WOXPIC HP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/22 TA02017-B812 5G WOXPIC HP UPPER
with 602-016/23 TA02017-B813 5G WXPIC HP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/24 TA02017-B814 5G WXPIC HP UPPER
+29dBm without 602-016/25 TA02017-B815 5G WOXPIC NP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/26 TA02017-B816 5G WOXPIC NP UPPER
with 602-016/27 TA02017-B817 5G WXPIC NP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/28 TA02017-B818 5G WXPIC NP UPPER
L6G(128QAM) +32dBm without 602-016/31 TA02017-B821 L6G WOXPIC HP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/32 TA02017-B822 L6G WOXPIC HP UPPER
with 602-016/33 TA02017-B823 L6G WXPIC HP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/34 TA02017-B824 L6G WXPIC HP UPPER
+29dBm without 602-016/35 TA02017-B825 L6G WOXPIC NP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/36 TA02017-B826 L6G WOXPIC NP UPPER
with 602-016/37 TA02017-B827 L6G WXPIC NP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/38 TA02017-B828 L6G WXPIC NP UPPER
U6G(64QAM) +32dBm without 602-016/41 TA02017-B831 U6G WOXPIC HP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/42 TA02017-B832 U6G WOXPIC HP UPPER
with 602-016/43 TA02017-B833 U6G WXPIC HP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/44 TA02017-B834 U6G WXPIC HP UPPER
+29dBm without 602-016/45 TA02017-B835 U6G WOXPIC NP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/46 TA02017-B836 U6G WOXPIC NP UPPER
with 602-016/47 TA02017-B837 U6G WXPIC NP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/48 TA02017-B838 U6G WXPIC NP UPPER
continue
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN
Table A.2.2 - MSTU (continued)
Band Power XPIC Code MSTU-2 Description

U7G(128QAM) +32dBm without 602-016/61 TA02017-B851 U7G WOXPIC HP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/62 TA02017-B852 U7G WOXPIC HP UPPER
with 602-016/63 TA02017-B853 U7G WXPIC HP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/64 TA02017-B854 U7G WXPIC HP UPPER
+29dBm without 602-016/65 TA02017-B855 U7G WOXPIC NP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/66 TA02017-B856 U7G WOXPIC NP UPPER
with 602-016/67 TA02017-B857 U7G WXPIC NP LOWER
XPIC 602-016/68 TA02017-B858 U7G WXPIC NP UPPER
11G(64QAM) +29dBm 602-016/81 TA02017-B871 11G WOXPIC TX:LL/RX:UL
without 602-016/81A TA02017-B881 11G WOXPIC Annex-2 TX:LL/RX:UL
XPIC L 602-016/83 TA02017-B873 11G WOXPIC TX:UL/RX:LL
602-016/83A TA02017-B883 11G WOXPIC Annex-2 TX:UL/RX:LL
602-016/82 TA02017-B872 11G WOXPIC TX:LH/RX:UH
without 602-016/82A TA02017-B882 11G WOXPIC Annex-2 TX:LH/RX:UH
XPIC H 602-016/84 TA02017-B874 11G WOXPIC TX:UH/RX:LH
602-016/84A TA02017-B884 11G WOXPIC Annex-2 TX:UH/RX:LH
602-016/85 TA02017-B875 11G WXPIC TX:LL/RX:UL
with 602-016/85A TA02017-B885 11G WXPIC Annex-2 TX:LL/RX:UL
XPIC L 602-016/87 TA02017-B877 11G WXPIC TX:UL/RX:LL
602-016/87A TA02017-B887 11G WXPIC Annex-2 TX:UL/RX:LL
602-016/86 TA02017-B876 11G WXPIC TX:LH/RX:UH
with 602-016/86A TA02017-B886 11G WXPIC Annex-2 TX:LH/RX:UH
XPIC H 602-016/88 TA02017-B878 11G WXPIC TX:UH/RX:LH
602-016/88A TA02017-B888 11G WXPIC Annex-2 TX:UH/RX:LH
13G(128QAM) +27dBm without 602-016/91 TA02017-B891 13G WOXPIC TX:LL/RX:UL
XPIC L 602-016/93 TA02017-B893 13G WOXPIC TX:UL/RX:LL
without 602-016/92 TA02017-B892 13G WOXPIC TX:LH/RX:UH
XPIC H 602-016/94 TA02017-B894 13G WOXPIC TX:UH/RX:LH
with 602-016/95 TA02017-B895 13G WXPIC TX:LL/RX:UL
XPIC L 602-016/97 TA02017-B897 13G WXPIC TX:UL/RX:LL
with 602-016/96 TA02017-B896 13G WXPIC TX:LH/RX:UH
XPIC H 602-016/98 TA02017-B898 13G WXPIC TX:UH/RX:LH
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.2.3 – Delay Equalizers for 128 QAM MSTU
Description Code
Delay EQL for no adjacent channel 621-009/01B CA53140-0330
Delay EQL for both adjacent channels 621-009/02 CA53140-0263
Delay EQL for upper side adjacent channel 621-009/03 CA53140-0264
Delay EQL for lower side adjacent channel 621-009/04 CA53140-0265
Table A.2.4 - Accessories
Code Description
443-015/07 1XSTM-1 OPTICAL MODULE SFP (S-1.1)
443-015/08 1XSTM-1 OPTICAL MODULE SFP (L-1.1)
634-901/08 TELEPHONE HANDSET
314-332/98 XPIC CABLE KIT SIEM. CONN. (1.0/2.3)
314-333/04 XPIC CABLE KIT 27CP - SIEM.CONN. HYBRID
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN
A.3 Installation material part numbers
Table A.3.1 – Equipment WaveGuide connection

(solution with Flex-Twist)
FLEX-TWIST TWIST FLEXIBLE

FREQUENCY
P/N ATTENUATION LENGHT FLANGE LENGHT FLANGE LENGHT Rmin Rmin
BAND (dB) (mm) (mm) (mm) P.E. P.H.
(GHz) (mm) (mm)
4
(3,6 ÷ 4,2)
504-657/51 0,18 1050 UDR-UDR40 150 UDR-UDR40 900 50 80
4U
(3,8 ÷ 4,2)
5
504-657/53 0,19 1050 UDR-UDR48 150 UDR-UDR48 900 50 60
(4,4 ÷ 5,0)
6L
(5,925 ÷ 6,425)
6U
(6,430 ÷ 7,120)
504-657/55 0,20 980 UDR-UDR70 80 UDR-UDR70 900 30 50
7L
(7,125 ÷ 7,425)
7U
(7,425 ÷ 7,725)
8L
504-657/57 0,25 980 UDR-UDR84 80 UDR-UDR84 900 25 42
(7,725 ÷ 8,275)
11
504-657/58 0,30 960 UDR-UDR100 60 UDR-UDR100 900 22 38
(10,7 ÷ 11,7)
13
504-657/61 0,40 960 UDR-UDR 20 60 UDR-UDR120 900 18 34
(12,75 ÷ 13,25)
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.3.2 – RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (Multishelf - SCSU Standard Type)

(31111.00940C)
P/N DESCRIPTION UNIT Q.TY
203-360/04 Screw M8 for fixing rack NR 4

223-009/16 Cable Tie NR 40
131-011/01 PVC Adhesive Tape NR 1
Used for : - VARIOUS utilisation
215-031/08 Cable-Lug Ø25mm² NR 1

204-366/10D Screw for Cable-Lug Fixing NR 1
103-037/60 1x25mm² Cable (YE-GR) M 2
165-011/38 Flying Terminal NR 1
Used for : - N3 RACK GROUNDING Connection
105-013/02 2x1.5 mm² Bipolar Shielded Cable for Power Supply M 20

User for : POWER SUPPLY for SCSU Connection (Adds 20m if there is the BBIU)
422-062/86 Sub-D 15 Pin Connector NR 2

422-030/87 Metallic Shell for Sub-D 15 pin Connector NR 2
106-001/61 8x2x0.4 Double Shielded Cable M 15
User for : - ALARMS Connection (CN31)
- EOW Connection (CN32)
For CC order only for MASTER Rack

User for : - RUC Connection (CN33)

User for : - HOUSEKEEPING Connection on SV Card (CN34)
- OSSI Connection (CN35)
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN
Table A.3.2 – RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (Multishelf - SCSU Standard Type)

(continued)
(31111.00940C)

User for : - HOUSEKEEPING Connection on 1st/2nd Card (CN21-22/23-24)
Order these q.ty for each HOUSEKEEPING Card
421-015/60 Self-Locking Coaxial Plug Series 1.0/2.3 – 75 Ohm NR 3

User for : - SYNCHRONISM Connection (CN1..6)
Order these q.ty for each TCU Card
Table A.3.3 – RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (Multi-Shelf - SCSU Double Terminal Type)
(31111.00940DT)

223-009/16 Cable Tie NR 40

103-037/60 1x25mm² Cable (YE-GR) M 2

User for : POWER SUPPLY for SCSU Connection (Adds 20m if there is the BBIU)
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.3.3 – RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (Multi-Shelf - SCSU Double Terminal Type)
(continued)
(31111.00940DT)

User for : - ALARMS Connection (CN107-207)
- EOW Connection (CN108-208)

User for : - RUC Connection (CN33)

User for : - HOUSEKEEPING Connection on SV Card (CN104-204)

User for : - HOUSEKEEPING Connection on Card (CN105-205/106-206)
Order these q.ty for each HOUSEKEEPING Card

User for : - SYNCHRONISM Connection (CN1..3-4..6)
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN
Table A.3.4 – TRANSCEIVER INSTALLATION MATERIALS (Multi-Shelf)

(31111.00942C)

User for : POWER SUPPLY Connection

Used for : - STM-1 and WS 75 Ohm Connections
104-104/04 75 Ohm Coaxial Cable TCE 2H2HH2 1(0.4/1.9)/M1 M 60

Used for : - STM-1, WS 75 Ohm and SYNCHRONISM Connections

Used for : - WS 120 Ohm Connection
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.3.5 – RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (K-Shelf)

(31111.00940K)

223-009/16 Cable Tie NR 40

103-037/60 1x25mm² Cable (YE-GR) M 2
103-037/34 1x10 mm² Cable (Black) M 20

103-037/35 1x10 mm² Cable (Blue) M 20
215-031/18 Ring Terminal 10mm² M.8 NR 4
103-037/50 1x16mm² Cable (YE-GR) NR 1
Used for : POWER SUPPLY for SCSU Connection

Used for : - ALARMS Connection
- EOW Connection

Used for : - RUC Connection

Used for : - HOUSEKEEPING 1 (HK1) Connection
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN
Table A.3.5 – RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (K-Shelf) (continued)

(31111.00940K)

Used for : - HOUSEKEEPING 2 and 3 / HOUSEKEEPING 4 and 5 Connection
Order these q.ty for each equipped HOUSEKEEPING Card (item 00150)

Used for : - SYNCHRONISM Connection (CN1..6)
Order these q.ty for each equipped Timing Source Card (item 00130)
Table A.3.6 – RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (Expansion K-Shelf)

(31111.00941K)
223-009/16 Cable Tie NR 40


103-037/50 1x16mm² Cable (YE-GR) NR 1
103-037/34 1x10 mm² Cable (Black) M 20

103-037/35 1x10 mm² Cable (Blue) M 20
103-037/50 1x16mm² Cable (YE-GR) NR 1
Used for : POWER SUPPLY for SCSU Connection

Used for : - ALARMS Connection
- EOW Connection
SRT 1F
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.3.7 – TRANSCEIVER INSTALLATION MATERIALS (K-Shelf)

(31111.00942K)

Used for : - STM-1 and WS 75 Ohm Connections
104-104/04 75 Ohm Coaxial Cable TCE 2H2HH2 1(0.4/1.9)/M1 M 60

Used for : - STM-1, WS 75 Ohm and SYNCHRONISM Connections

Used for : - WS 120 Ohm Connection
Table A.3.8 – SPECIAL TOOLS (USER TABLE)
USE FOR CONNECTORS
Item Code DESCRIPTION Power Supply Coaxial Plug Connector

connector (421-015/60) (422-053/63)
(AMP)
1 236-100/32 Crimping tool X - -

2 236-100/40 Crimping tool - X -
3 236-100/28 Extractor tool - X -
4 236-100/17 Crimping tool - - X
SRT 1F
A. APPENDIX UMN
SRT 1F

Manual Radio SDH

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual Radio SDH

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

User Manual

Issue 5, September 2007

- Current Issue 5, September 2007

- Previous Issue 5, August 2007

In Issue 5, September 2007, as to the previous issue:

This page intentionally left blank

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................... 1-1

1.5.2.1 General .................................................................................................. 1-50

1.10 Antenna System................................................................................... 1-108

2.1.7.4 Switching Initiator and Operation Time .................................................. 2-43

3.2.3.1 Tools Required......................................................................................... 3-8

3.5.2.7 Baseband Signal Cable Connection .................................................... 3-102

4.2.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge Warning .............................................................. 4-6

5.4.3 TCU unit Protection................................................................................ 5-38

1.1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment

1.2 Equipment Features

• High efficiency error correction using Multi-Level Coded Modulation

• Resource management facility:

Tributary Tributary Tributary

Figure 1-1 - Linear Configuration

SDH MUX SDH MUX SDH MUX

Figure 1-2 - Media Diversity Configuration

SDH MUX SDH MUX

Network feature : Network protection switching with ring operation

Figure 1-3 - Standard Ring Configuration

1.3 Equipment Details

1.3.1 Ordering Guide

Assembling an SRT 1F terminal means to select the proper equipment

Table 1.1 - Classification of available configurations for SRT 1F

Figure 1-4 N+1 Terminal (N < 8) x x x x x

Branching configuration No. of DUP No. of ADPT

Figure 1-4 shows the configuration of SRT 1F (N+1) terminal equipment.

: RF Branching Network Unit Block :

MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block :

SCSU : BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :

BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x N, N < 8 (Electrical or Optical)

TCU : Timing Control Unit: x 1 ( + 1 max as option)

HK : Housekeeping Unit (option): x 2 max

ECU : Embedded Communication Unit (option): x 1 max

OCC : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit (option): x 1 max (El. or Opt.)

VF : VF module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max

DIG : 64 kb/s module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max

TCU is mandatory for TL1/OSI, optional for SNMP/IP.

Figure 1-4 - SRT 1F N+1 (N < 8) Terminal Radio Equipment

Figure 1-5 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2×(N+1) Single Terminal

: RF Branching Network Unit Block :

MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block :

SCSU : BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :

BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 2*N, N < 4 (Electrical or Optical)

BSW INTF : BaseBand Switch Interface Unit: x 1

TCU : Timing Control Unit: x 1 ( + 1 max as option)

HK : Housekeeping Unit (option): x 2 max

ECU : Embedded Communication Unit (option): x 2 max

OCC : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit (option): x 2 max (El. or Opt.)

VF : VF module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max

DIG : 64 kb/s module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max

TCU is mandatory for TL1/OSI, optional for SNMP/IP.

Figure 1-6 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2×(N+1) Single Terminal

: RF Branching Network Unit Block :

MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block :

SCSU : BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :

BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 2*N, N < 8 (Electrical or Optical)

BSW INTF : BaseBand Switch Interface Unit: x 1

TCU : Timing Control Unit: x 1 ( + 1 max as option)